Carlsbad City Council
October 21, 2025

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

32 90 00-4 PLANTING

4. Each plant shall be planted with its proportionate amount of soil from the flat or in a peat pot, in a manner that will ensure minimum disturbance of the root system. Hand smooth planting area after planting to provide an even, smooth, final finish grade. To avoid drying out, plantings shall be immediately watered after planting until the entire area is soaked to the full depth of each hole unless otherwise noted on the drawing.

5. A representative number of plants shall be inspected and approved at the nursery by the Owner’s Representative prior to shipment to the planting site. Prior to such visit, Contractor shall submit 3” x 5” color photographs of all proposed tree and shrub material for Owner’s Representative review. Photos shall be submitted seven (7) calendar days prior to specified plant material review at nursery site and shall include a Philadelphia rod or other measuring tool to depict height. Plants shall be inspected for size and condition of root growth, insects, injuries, and latent defects. The Owner’s Representative reserves the right to reject entire lots of plants represented by defective samples.

Plant condition shall be in accordance with the California State Department of Agriculture's regulations for nursery inspections, rules, and grading.

F. Tree ties: V.I.T Twist Brace Ties for double staking and triple staking, or equal as approved by the Owner. Secure tree to stake in two places minimum. Using two galvanized screws at each attachment. Nursery stakes are to be removed at time of planting and installation of tree stakes.

G. Tree stakes: (2) 3 inch diameter x 10 foot long lodgepole stakes for all 24 inch box trees. Use 3 lodgepole pine stakes (triple stake) for all trees 36 inch box size and larger. Tree stakes shall be pine and pointed at one end.

H. Root Barriers: Where trees are planted within 10 feet of curbs, sidewalks or pavement, install a sub- surface panel barrier 24 inches deep x 16 feet long centered on the tree trunk ("Deep Root" or approved equal).

I. Mulch:

1. Mulch material to be obtained through City’s natural waste recycled mulch program free of charge. Contractor is responsible for collecting mulch at City site, hauled to project site, and installation in all landscape planting areas. No hardwood pieces larger than 2” in size are allowed and should be removed from mulch material. In be free of trash.

J. Soil Herbicide. A commercially manufactured non selective herbicide for total control of vegetation products shall meet all federal and state regulations pertaining to the use of such substances.

Application and rate of application shall follow manufacturer's recommendations. Application shall not be made until obtaining written approval from the Owner’s Representative. Such application shall be performed in consideration of overall construction schedule and operation so as not to disrupt or interfere with the project schedule and timeline.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Site clearance: Clean up and remove from the planting areas weeds and grasses, including roots, and any minor accumulated debris and rubbish before commencing work.

B. Storage: Secure permission from the Owner’s Representative to store plants on the project site and

City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

PLANTING 32 90 00-5
ensure that they are protected from damage by the sun, wind, and construction work.

C. Finish grading of all turf, shrub, and groundcover planting areas. Grading shall be done as indicated on the grading plans and as follows.

1. Do not work on the soil when moisture content is so great that excessive compaction will occur, or when it is so dry that dust will form or clods will not readily break up.

2. Remove and dispose of all soil in planting areas that contains any deleterious substance such as oil, plaster, concrete, gasoline, paint, solvents, etc., removing the soil to a minimum depth of six (6) inches or to the level of dryness in the affected areas. The affected soil shall be replaced with native or imported soil as required. The contractor shall be responsible for any damage to installed plants caused by such substances.

3. If an area to be landscaped is not acceptable to the contractor, the contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative in writing.

4. Prior to start of finish grading, loosen all planting areas to a depth of six (6) inches. Finish grades shall allow for addition of soil conditioners.

5. Make minor grade adjustments as directed by the Owner’s Representative.

6. Where designated drainage meets an obstruction, warp grades so that no water collects.

7. Use water trucks and sprinklers as required to control all airborne dust caused by grading operations.

8. Finish grading all planting areas to a smooth and even condition, making certain that no water pockets or irregularities remain. Remove and dispose of all foreign materials, clods, and rocks over 1 inch in diameter at the surface and sub-surface down to 8 inches depth minimum.

9. Provide a grade which, after conditioning and planting, is 1 inch below the tops of curbs and walks in lawn areas and 2 inches below for shrub areas sloping to drain to adjacent roadway, drain swale or catch basin.

D. Soil conditioning:

1. Amend all planting areas with a grade of 2:1 or less. Incorporate evenly into the top 6 inch of existing soil (with a rototiller or approved piece of equipment) the following per each 1,000 square feet of planting area.

a. 4 cubic yards of soil amendment.
b. 25 lbs. of commercial fertilizer or approved equal.

2. The above soil conditioning quantities shall be used for bidding purposes only, soil conditions may change drastically from the time these specifications were developed until the actual soil conditioning takes place. Therefore, the contractor shall obtain soil samples at a rate of one per every 25,000 square feet of planted area in the presence of the Owner’s Representative. These soil tests shall be conducted by an approved agronomic soils testing laboratory approved by the Owner’s Representative. Copies of the soil test shall be provided during the pre-site meeting and verified by the Owner’s Representative. The contractor shall add amendments per soils report recommendations for individual planting areas and as approved by the Owner’s Representative.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

32 90 00-6 PLANTING

3. All rocks or unbroken soil clods over 1 inch in diameter brought to the surface shall be removed from the project site.

E. Weed control program: Upon completion of the soil amendment installation and fine grading work perform weed control measures as follows:

1. Irrigate all areas designated to be planted for seven days at a schedule required to germinate all weed seed possible.

2. Apply weed killer per manufacturer's recommendation and the Owner’s Representative's approval and allow efficient time for complete kill of all germinated weeds.

3. Repeat step one above.

4. Repeat step two above.

F. Planting shall be completed as follows:

1. Determine location of the trees and shrubs by scaling from the planting plan.

2. Spot containers and obtain approval from the Owner’s Representative before excavating planting pits.

3. Excavate planting pits with vertical sides for all plants. Shrub pits shall be twice the diameter and 1 1/2 times the depth of the rootball. Tree pits shall be twice the diameter and 1 1/2 times the depth of the rootball. Tree pits depth shall include the rootball and a transitional zone of compacted, unamended native soil.

4. If planting pits are cut with power auger, vertical sides of pit shall be additionally broken with balling bar or spade to interrupt continuous curve influence on root development.

5. Plant material shall be planted in such a way that after settling, the crown of the plant bears the same relation to finish grade that it did to the surface in the container.

6. Backfill tree and shrub planting pits with a prepared mix as follows:

a. 5 parts native on site soil.
b. 3 parts soil amendment.
c. 5 lbs. commercial fertilizer per cubic yard of mix or approved equal. d. 5 lbs. gypsum per cubic yard of mix.

7. Form shallow basin around the edge of planting pits. Provide and Install a 1” layer of mulch.

8. Plant Tablets: 7 gram planting tablets, Provide tablets in the following ratios:

a. 1 tablet per ground cover and liners.
b. 2 tablets per gallon plant.
c. 6 tablets per 5 gallon plant.
d. 12 tablets per 15 gallon plant.
e. 14 tablets per 24 inch box plant.
f. 16 tablets per 30 inch box tree.
g. 18 tablets per 36 inch box tree.
h. 20 tablets per 48 inch box tree.

City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

PLANTING 32 90 00-7

9. Grade area around plants to finish grades and dispose of excess soil.

10. Location for street trees adjacent to any light standards or utility equipment shall be adjusted to maintain a suitable clearance, as approved by the Owner.

11. Install sump drains per details for all trees per detail.

G. Pruning:

1. Prune minimum necessary to remove injured twigs, branches, dead wood, sprouts and suckers.

2. Prune plants according to standard horticultural practices, by qualified personnel.

3. No topping of any trees will be permitted. Trees that have been topped will be replaced at the contractor's expense.

H. Clean up:

1. During the course of the work, daily remove surplus materials from the site and leave premises in a neat and clean condition.

2. Prior to acceptance of the project for maintenance, clean up and remove all remaining debris and surplus materials upon completion of work, leaving the premises neat and clean.

3. Remove all tags, labels, nursery stakes and ties from all plant material only after the approval of the Owner’s Representative.

PART 4 – MAINTENANCE

4.1 GENERAL:

Continuously maintain all areas included in the contract during the progress of the work, the maintenance period and until the final acceptance of the work.

4.2 MAINTENANCE PERIOD:

After all the work indicated on the drawings or herein specified has been completed and inspected and approved by the Owner’s Representative and the Owner; maintain all areas within the project boundary for a period of 90 calendar days.

4.3 TREE AND SHRUB CARE:

A. Watering: Maintain a large enough water basin around plants so that enough water can be applied to establish moisture through the major root zone. When hand watering, use a wand to break the water force.

B. Tree pruning:

1. Prune trees to select and develop permanent scaffold branches that are smaller in diameter to the trunk or branch of which they are attached, which have vertical spacing of from 18 to 48 inches and radial orientation so as not to overlay one another; to eliminate narrow V shaped branch forks that lack thinning out crowns; to maintain growth within space balance crown with roots.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

32 90 00-8 PLANTING

2. Under no circumstances will stripping of lower branches or "raising up" of young trees be permitted. Retain lower branches in a "tipped back" or pinched condition with as much foliage as possible to promote trunk growth (tapered trunk). Lower branches may be removed only after the tree is able to stand erect without staking or other support.

3. Thin out and shape evergreen trees when necessary to prevent wind and storm damage.

Perform primary pruning to deciduous trees during the dormant season. Prune damaged trees or those that constitute health or safety hazards at any time of the year as directed by the Owner.

C. Shrub pruning:

1. The objectives of shrub pruning are the same as for trees. Do not clip shrubs into balled or boxed forms unless such is required by the design and designated on the planting plans.

2. Make all pruning cuts of lateral branches or buds, as directed by the Owner’s Representative.

3. Topping is not allowed.

D. Staking: Remove stakes as soon as the trunk of the tree has grown thicker than the diameter of the stakes. Inspect stakes to prevent girdling of trunks or branches, and to prevent rubbing that causes bark wounds. The contracting crew at the time of maintenance shall remove the stakes and cut the stakes so they are not protruding into the canopy.

E. Weed control:

1. Keep basins and areas between plants free of weeds. Apply pre-emergent herbicides recommended by a licensed pest control advisor to all non- seeded landscape areas only. Avoid frequent soil cultivation that destroys shallow roots or disturbs pre-emergent herbicide application.

2. Eradicate all noxious weeds from site (i.e. nutgrass, bermuda grass, kikuyu grass, crab grass).

F. Insect and disease control: Maintain control with approved materials.

G. Fertilization: Make three applications of commercial fertilizer at the rate of 5 6 lbs. per 1,000 square feet at the following periods: (Maintenance progress inspections are required for verification of fertilizer applications)

1. 30 calendar days after the maintenance period has begun.

2. 60 calendar days after the maintenance period has begun.

3. Just prior to the end of the 90-calendar day maintenance period.

4. Note: Application should be per manufacturer's recommendation per site agronomic test and Owner’s Representative's approval.

H. Replacement of plants: Remove dead and dying plants and replace with plants of equal size and variety of original planting plan at no additional cost to the Owner and as approved by the Owner’s Representative.

I. Groundcover Care: Apply a pre-emergent herbicide having a life no less than six (6) months to all ground cover and shrub areas. Herbicide shall be registered for use on the species of plant material specified in planting plans and approved by a licensed pest control advisor.

City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

PLANTING 32 90 00-9

J. General maintenance:

1. Remove trash weekly.

2. Edge ground cover to keep in bounds and trim top growth as necessary to achieve an overall even appearance.

3. Exterminate vertebrate pests, gophers, moles, etc.; and repair damage as required.

4. Test irrigation system weekly and submit reports to Owner’s Representative.

5. The site temporary fence shall be maintained to ensure security to the site.

PART 5 – GUARANTEE

5.1 All trees (15 gallon and larger) shall be guaranteed for a period of one year. All shrubs and plant materials shall be guaranteed for a period of 90 calendar days. All guarantee periods commence from the time of final acceptance by the Owner’s Representative at the completion of the 90-calendar day maintenance period.

5.2 Replace, as soon as weather permits or as directed by the Owner’s Representative, all dead plants, and all plants not in vigorous condition as noted during the inspections and maintenance period.

5.3 Plants used for replacements shall be the same kind and size as originally planted. Replacement plants shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative and shall be furnished, planted, fertilized as specified and guaranteed the same as the original plant materials.

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

SOIL PREPARATION 32 91 13-1
SECTION 32 91 13

SOIL PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this section.

B. “Geotechnical Investigation” by Southern California Geotechnical, Inc.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent: Furnish all labor, material, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary for Soil Preparation of planting areas as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. The work includes installation of soil amendments, finish grading and plant pit backfill.

B. Related work includes but is not limited to:

1. 31 10 00 – Site Clearing

2. 31 22 00 – Grading

3. 32 90 00 – Planting

4. “Geotechnical Investigation” by Southern California Geotechnical, Inc.

1.3 REVIEWS

A. Contractor shall specifically request at least (2) two days in advance the following review prior to progressing with the work:

1. Intermediate Review – completion of site grading, amendment depths, finish grade.

2. See Specification Sections 32 84 00 – Irrigation system and 32 90 00 – Planting for other items to be inspected during this review.

3. The review shall be conducted only after all items pertaining to the review as noted above and in related Sections have been completed by the Contractor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Test Samples: Contractor shall provide samples, as specified herein, to an agricultural soils testing laboratory approved by the Engineer, referred to herein as the Testing Lab, unless delivered to the site in original, unopened containers, each bearing the manufacturer guaranteed analysis.

1. Testing Lab – Waypoint Analytical, Inc., 4741 E Hunter Avenue, Suite A, Anaheim, California 92807, (714) 282-8777 or prior approved equal testing lab.

2. Use of an alternative soil testing lab without prior approval shall be cause for rejection of the submitted analysis.

3. No material shall be delivered to the site until the Owner’s Representative approves the material.

4. The same Testing Lab shall be used for all tests specified herein.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

32 91 13-2 SOIL PREPARATION

5. Contractor shall pay for all testing fees from the Testing Lab for all tests specified herein.

B. Product Certificates: Certification stating quantity, type, and composition, weight and origin for all amendments and chemicals shall be delivered to the Owner’s Representative within fourteen (14) days of the Notice to Proceed and before the material is delivered to the site.

C. Testing - Existing Soil: Prior to finish grading operations or at least four weeks before proposed planting operations, Contractor shall take a sample each of the topsoil and sub-soil, from 0"-12" deep, in three separate locations across the site after rough grading, as directed by the Engineer.

Topsoil stockpiled from the same site is to be considered as one of the locations. Samples shall be mixed from the three locations to provide a composite sample, representative of the entire site, combined volume of samples not less than 2 quarts. Soil samples shall be forwarded to the Testing Lab by the Contractor for testing and recommendations as to exact fertilizers and soil amendments to be used in planting, A05 analysis or approved equal.

1. Amendment and fertilizer recommendations by the Testing Lab shall be specific to the proposed amendments to be used. Generic recommendations will require the Contractor to re-obtain specific recommendations from the Testing Lab.

2. Soils report shall include an estimated infiltration rate for the tested soils.

3. Representative samples of sub-soil shall additionally be supplied to the Testing Lab from areas previously covered by paving for contamination testing. Allow six weeks for testing procedures .

D. T e
sting – Amendments: Contractor shall provide, along with a sample, latest analysis of amendments/bulk organic materials by the Testing Lab for verification of conformance to this specification, and specific recommendations as to exact quantities to be used in planting.

1. Analysis shall conform to physical and chemical properties specified herein.

2. Analysis shall not be more than three months old at the time of submitting sample.

3. Analysis shall assume tilling of the amendments into the soil as described elsewhere in this Specification.

4. Analysis shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative prior to use on the project.

E. Testing – Imported Topsoil: Contractor shall provide, along with sample, latest analysis of soil proposed to be imported by the Testing Lab for testing as to exact fertilizers and soil amendments to be used in planting.

1. Submit certificate or sample of any proposed bulk organic materials simultaneously for testing with soil samples for optimum amendment recommendations.

2. Analysis shall not be more than three months old at the time of submitting sample.

3. Should the final soil mixture be a combination of existing soil and imported topsoil, Contractor shall provide additional lab recommendations on method of mixing and exact fertilizers and soil amendments to be used in planting for the mixture.

F. Submit delivery tags for all amendments and fertilizers delivered to the Site for the Project.

City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

SOIL PREPARATION 32 91 13-3

1.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect concrete from any sulfate-based amendments that may be specified from soils analysis to avoid staining. Concrete damaged from amendment placement shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 EXISTING SOIL

A. Topsoil: The top layer of existing soil in planting areas below the grass root zone, containing minerals and organic materials including humus, and completely free of weeds, roots, rocks/clods over one cubic inch and other objectionable material. Depth of topsoil shall be taken to be 2-4 inches deep or as determined by the Owner’s Representative at the time of construction after clearing and grubbing.

1. Topsoil is a clay loam type.

2. At turf areas topsoil starts below the grass root zone.

3. At planting areas other than turf, topsoil starts below the mulch layer.

B. Sub-soil: Shall be the remaining existing soil on the site after clearing & grubbing, after topsoil has been removed, and after all rocks over one cubic inch and all foreign debris and organic material have been removed.

1. Soil under paving and aggregate base areas shall be considered as subsoil provided contamination testing as specified elsewhere in this section indicates that it is free of contaminants that are harmful to plant growth.

2.2 IMPORTED TOPSOIL

A. Imported Topsoil: USDA classification of fraction passing a 2.0 mm sieve: Shall be loose, friable sandy loam, sandy clay loam or loam, free of harmful insects, all weed growth, clods over 1" and/or clods that will not be pulverized during operations, and free of rocks over one cubic inch.

1. Class Particle Size Range Maximum% Minimum %

Coarse sand 0.5 – 2.0 mm 15 0
Silt plus clay <0.05mm 50 15

Other Classes

Rock / Gravel 1/4 - 1/2 inch 10 % volume with none >1/2 inch Organic 15 5

2. Chemistry – Suitability Considerations

Salinity: Soil Saturation Extract (ECe) – Less than 4.0 dS/m (mmhos.cm) @ 25° C Sodium: Sodium Adsorption Ratio (SAR) – Less than 6.0
Boron: Saturation Extract Concentration – Less than 1.0 ppm Reaction: pH of Saturated Paste – 5.5-7.0

3. Fertility Considerations: Soil to contain sufficient quantities of available nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium, calcium, and magnesium to support normal plant growth. In the event of nutrient

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

32 91 13-4 SOIL PREPARATION
inadequacies, provisions shall be made to add required materials prior to planting.

2.3 FERTILIZERS

A. Soil amendment(s), fertilizer(s), and the backfill mix, for bid purposes only.

B. Plant fertilizer shall be commercial fertilizer, controlled-release three year 16-8-8 (N-P-K) by NutriPak, or approved equal.

2.4 SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Nitrogen-stabilized Organic Amendment: shall conform to the following sieve requirements and chemistry:

B. Gradation:

Sieve Size Percent Passing
3/8” (9.5 mm) 100%
1/4” (6.25mm) At least 95%
#8 (2.36mm) At least 60%
#16 (1.18mm) 20%-70%
#32 (500 um) 0%-30%

C. Chemistry – Suitability Considerations

1. Nitrogen (dry weight basis): 0.4 to 0.6%

2. Iron (minimum): 0.08%

3. Organic material content: Shall be 35% to 100% dry weight and moisture shall be 25% to 60% wet weight basis. Physical contaminants (manmade inert materials) shall not exceed 1% by dry weight.

4. Carbon-Nitrogen Ratio: below 25:1

5. pH: between 6 and 7.5

6. Salinity (ECe): a value such that when combined with the existing site soil at a rate determined by the Testing Lab Analysis, the salinity of the amended soil shall not exceed 4 dS/m. BFS SOILS ANALYSIS GUIDELINES HAS A CHART TO EVALUATE THIS

7. Stability: Carbon Dioxide evolution rate shall be less than 3.0mg CO2-C per gram of compost organic matter (OM) per day or less than 6mg CO2-C per gram of compost carbon per day, whichever unit is reported. Alternatively, a Solvita rating of 5.5 or higher is acceptable.

D. Gypsum: Agricultural Grade

E. Pathogens and Pollutant Limits: Select pathogens shall pass US EPA Class A Standard, 40 CFR Section 503.32(a), Trace Metals shall pass US EPA Class A Standard, 40 CFR Section 503.13, Table 1 for Ceiling Concentrations.

2.5 CHEMICALS

A. The following brand names of various chemicals to be used in this Section are provided for ease of specifying; equals or brands with similar chemicals that will match or improve performance may be used at the Contractor's discretion. Contractor shall verify use of any chemicals with Owner’s Representative prior to application:

1. Pre-emergent herbicides - (granular form only) Treflan, Ronstar, or prior approved equal.

City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

SOIL PREPARATION 32 91 13-5

PART 3 – EXECUTION

4.1 GENERAL

A. Limits and Grades: Prior to commencing soil preparation operations, Contractor shall request a review by the Engineer to verify grading work completed to date and verify specified limits of soil preparation work to commence.

B. Contractor shall complete the site grading necessary to smoothly integrate newly graded areas with the existing grades.

4.2 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT

A. Stockpiled and imported topsoil shall be installed and completed as necessary to produce final finish grade requirement, minimum depth 6" (six inches).

1. Existing undisturbed landscape areas that are to be replanted (excluding bio-retention areas) as shown on the Drawings, do not require topsoil across the areas, only individual plant pit preparation per Specifications.

2. Proposed landscape areas including areas to be graded or that have been disturbed by construction that are to be planted as shown on the Drawings require topsoil across the entire planting areas. Amended excavated subsoil cannot be used as topsoil for these areas.

B. Sub-grade shall be cross-ripped or cultivated to a depth of 10 inches. Water shall be added and ripping or cultivation shall be continued until the entire 10 inch depth is loose and friable. Place three inches of topsoil uniformly over sub-grade and thoroughly cultivate before placing remaining topsoil.

Place topsoil and bring to a smooth, even grade. Soil shall be thoroughly water settled and high/low areas re-graded in accordance with paragraph "Finish Grading" this Section.

C. Stockpiled Topsoil: See Specification Section 31 10 00 – Site Clearing.

4.3 AMENDMENT PLACEMENT

A. Follow the specific instructions in the City of Carlsbad BMP Design Manual, Section E.6 SD-F for Amended Soils for soil preparation, amendment mixing, and placement.

B. Plant pits: Soil which has been amended in the above manner shall be used as the backfill mix around the sides of the root balls. See Specification Section 32 90 00 – Planting for plant pit requirements.

4.4 FINISH GRADING

A. Contractor shall finish grade all planting areas unless otherwise noted, and shall remove all rocks and clods over one cubic inch. In lawn areas, all rocks and clods shall be removed. All areas shall be smooth and uniformly graded. All erosion damage during the construction period shall be repaired by the Contractor.

B. Unless otherwise noted, all soil finish grades shall be 1/2 inch below finish grade of walks, pavements, and curbs.

4.5 CHEMICALS

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

32 91 13-6 SOIL PREPARATION
A. Herbicides and pesticides: Contractor shall verify compatibility, dosage, and other application procedures with the manufacturer. All chemicals shall be applied by a pest control operator licensed in the State of California.

B. Planting areas: Treat all ground cover and non-naturalized areas for weed control with preemergent herbicide, as recommended by the manufacturer. See Specification Section Landscape Maintenance for related work.

C. Include copies of documentation of pesticide and herbicide applications, countersigned by the Owner, in the Maintenance Binder - see Specification Section Landscape Maintenance.

4.6 PLANT FERTILIZER
A. All container stock shall receive additional fertilizer, in the form of commercial fertilizer packets at the rate of:

Container Size Fertilizer Packets
1 gallon plant two (2) packets
5 gallon plant four (4) packets
15 gallon plant ten (10) packets
24” box fifteen (15) packets

1. Space the tablets evenly around the ball halfway up backfill touching side of root ball.

PART 4 – SUPPLEMENTAL INFORATION

4.1 EXISTING SOIL REPORT

A. Existing Testing: Master Plan Existing Soil Reports with specific recommendations on soil preparation including required amendments, fertilization and maintenance fertilization are included in this Specification Section, for bid purposes only. Contractor is still required to carry out tests of the existing soils as described in this Section. Changes to soil preparation including amendments as a result of the soils tests shall be carried out at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION
City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

HYDROSEEDING 32 92 13-1
SECTION 32 92 13

HYDR

OSEEDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

The requirements of the "General Conditions of the Contract" and of Division 1, "General Requirements," shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Work Included:

All labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations of the work for this section, complete as shown on the Drawings or specified herein. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Hydroseeding

2. Clean Up

B. Related Work in Other Sections:

1. Section 32 01 90 Operation and Maintenance of Planting

2. Section 32 84 00 Irrigation System

3. Section 32 90 00 Planting

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Quality Control:

1. Submit documentation of all hydroseed seed mix material being ordered for the project at least 60 days prior to start of planting. Arrange procedure for inspection of materials with Owner’s Representative at time of submission.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, and HANDLING

A. Delivery:

1. Deliver materials to site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's guarantee chemical analysis, name, trademark, purity, germination, and conformance to State law.

2. Deliver materials with legible waterproof identification labels.

3. Protect material during delivery to prevent damage.

4. The Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect seven days prior to delivery of all materials and shall submit an itemized list for each delivery.

B. Storage:

City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

32 92 19-2 HYDROSEEDING

1. Store plant material in shade and protect from weather.

2. P
rotect material from damage and theft.

C. Handling:

1. Do not drop materials.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Planting:

Perform actual planting only when weather and soil conditions are suitable according to locally accepted practices.

B. Scheduling:

Install trees and container stock plant material before hydroseed installation.

1.6 SAMPLES AND TESTS

A. Owner reserves the right to take and analyze samples of materials for conformity to Specifications at any time. Contractor shall furnish samples upon Owner's request.

Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site at Contractor's expense.

Contractor shall pay costs of testing materials not meeting Specifications.

B. Laboratory Analysis: Provide laboratory soils analysis conforming to the Landscape Planting Specification.

1.7 REPLACEMENTS

A. Replacement

Any materials found to be dead, missing, or in poor condition during the maintenance period shall be replaced immediately. The Landscape Architect shall be the sole judge as to the condition of materials. Materials to be replaced within the guarantee period shall be replaced by the Contractor within 15 days of written notification by the Owner’s Representative.

1.8 CONTROL

The selection of herbicides, application rates and methods are to be performed under the control and guidance of a State of California licensed pest control advisor and applicator.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Specific amendments and fertilizer Specifications are to conform to the Landscape Planting Specifications.

B. All material shall be of standard, approved, and first-rate quality and shall be in prime condition when installed and accepted. Any commercially processed or packages material shall be City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

HYDROSEEDING 32 92 13-3
delivered to the site in the original unopened container bearing the manufacturer’s guaranteed anal
ysis.

2.2 STATEMENT OF CONFIRMATION

A. Submit at time of delivery invoice statements certifying quantities by bulk and/or weight, for all materials. Submit supplier’s certificates of compliance with these specifications. Owner may take random samples for analysis.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Equipment shall have a built in agitation system and operating capacity sufficient to agitate, suspend and homogeneously mix a slurry containing not less than 20 kilos (44 lbs.) of organic mulching amendment plus fertilizer, chemical additives and solids for each 100 gallons of water.

2.4 HYDRO-SEED MATERIALS

A. Hydro-seed Mix No. 1: California Native Erosion Control Mix from S&S Seeds

SPECIES COMMON NAME BULK
#’s/ACRE

MIN %
PURITY
MIN %
GERM.

Bromus carinatus
‘Cucamonga’ Cucamonga Brome 20 80 80
Festuca microstachys Pacific Fescue 8 80 80
Trifolium ciliolatum Foothill Clover 4 90 80
Stipa pulchra Purple Needlegrass 3 80 80
Melica imperfecta Small Flowered Melic Grass 3 80 60

B. Hydro-seed Mix No. 2: Coastal Wildflower Mix from S&S Seeds

SPECIES COMMON NAME BULK
#’s/ACRE
MIN %
PURITY
MIN %
GERM.

Eschscholzia californica California Poppy 2 90 80
Collinsia heterophylla Chinese Houses 2 80 80
Gilia capitata Blue Field Gilia 1 80 80
Lasthenia californica Goldenfields 1 80 50
Layia platyglossa Tidy Tips 1 80 50
Penstemon spectabilis Showy Penstemon 2 90 30
Sisyrinchium bellum Blue Eyed Grass 2 90 80
Diplacus australis Monkeyflower 2 4 20
Camissoniopsis cheiranthifolia Beach Primrose 1 90 80
Achillea millefolium Yarrow 2 90 80
Lupinus succulentus Succulent Lupine 3 80 80
Lupinus nanus Sky Lupine 2 90 80
Deinandra fesciculata Tarweed 2 40 40
Lupinus microcarpus
‘Ed Gedling’ Ed Gedling Lupine 2 90 60
Corethrogyne filaginifolia California Aster 2 4 20

City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

32 92 19-4 HYDROSEEDING
C. Hydro-seed Mix No. 3: Coastal Sage Scrub Mix from S&S Seeds

SPEC

IES COMMON NAME BULK
#’s/ACRE
MIN %
PURITY
MIN %
GERM.

Acmispon americanus American Bird Foot Trefoil 1.5 90 70 Acmispon glaber Deerweed 2 80 80
Amsinckia intermedia Common Fiddleneck 1 40 40
Artemisia californica California Sagebush 2 30 20
Collinsia heterophylla Chinese Houses 0.5 80 80
Deinandra fasciculata Clustered Tarweed 1 40 40
Encelia californica Bush Sunflower 3 20 40
Eriogonum fasciculatum California Buckwheat 6 60 10
Eriogonum confertiflorum Golden Yarrow 1 30 50
Festuca microstachys Pacific Fescue 6 80 80
Lupinus succulentus Succulent Lupine 2 80 80
Iva hayesiana San Diego Poverty Weed 1 15 15
Melica imperfecta Small Flowered Melica 2 80 60
Rhus integrifolia Lemonade Berry 1 80 50
Diplacus australis Monkeyflower 2 4 20
Salvia mellifera Black Sage 2 80 40
Stipa pulchra Purple Needlegrass 4 80 80
Scrophularia californica California Bee Plant 0.5 80 60

D. Hydro-seed Mix No. 4: Ornamental Low Grow Mix from S&S Seeds

SPECIES COMMON NAME BULK
#’s/ACRE
MIN %
PURITY
MIN %
GERM.

Eriophyllum confertiflorum Golden Yarrow 1 30 50
Acmispon glaber Deerweed 4 80 80
Diplacus australis Monkeyflower 2 4 20
Sisyrinchium bellum Blue Eyed Grass 2 90 80
Festuca microstachys Pacific Fescue 6 80 80
Achillea millefolium Yarrow 2 90 80
Acmispon heermannii Woolly Lotus 2 80 80
Deinandra fasciculata Tarweed 1 40 40
Stipa pulchra Purple Needlegrass 4 80 80
Lupinus nanus Sky Lupine 2 90 80
Lupinus succulentus Succulent Lupine 2 80 80
Eschscholzia californica California Poppy 2 90 80
Lasthenia californica Goldenfields 0.5 80 50
Layia platglossa Tidy Tips 0.5 80 50
Collinsia heterophylla Chinese Houses 1 80 80
Corethrogyne filaginifolia California Aster 2 4 20
Penstemon spectabilis Showy Penstemon 1 90 30

City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

HYDROSEEDING 32 92 13-5

E. B
elow are guidelines for selecting the right combination of materials and application rates to meet the erosion prevention and vegetation establishment requirements of the project:

1. For flat ground and gentle sloped installations in seasons other than Winter:
a. Slope angles no steeper than 4:1
b. Slope length maximum of 40 ft. (without slope interruption devices) c. Low erosive soil types
d. Functional longevity requirement of up to 3 months

Product Application Rate
100% Wood Fiber Hydraulic Mulch 2,000 lbs./acre
Hydropost Premium Compost 1,000 lbs./acre
Ecology Control M-Binder/Tack 150 lbs./acre
Biosol Forte 7-2-1 Organic fertilizer 800 lbs./acre
AM 120 Mycorrhizal inoculum 60 lbs./acre
Tri-C Humate Soil Conditioner 400 lbs./acre
Seed mix as prescribed by S & S Seeds

2. For mild to moderate slopes and installations any time of the year:
a. Slope angles no steeper than 2:1
b. Slope length maximum of 50 ft. (without slope interruption devices) c. Low to moderately erosive soil types
d. Functional longevity requirement of up to 6 months

Product Application Rate
Promatrix BFM 3,500 lbs./acre
Hydropost Premium Compost 1,000 lbs./acre
Biosol Forte 7-2-1 Organic fertilizer 800 lbs./acre
AM 120 Mycorrhizal inoculum 60 lbs./acre
Tri-C Humate Soil Conditioner 400 lbs./acre
Seed mix as prescribed by S & S Seeds

3. For moderate to severe slopes and installations any time of the year for critical areas where maximum performance is essential including waterways, channels, bioswales, and basins:
a. Slope angles up to 1:1 or steeper
b. Slope length maximum of 75 ft. (without slope interruption devices) c. Erosive soil types
d. FlexTerra HP-FGM has no cure time
e. Functional longevity of up to 18 months

Product Application Rate
Flexterra HP-FGM 4,000 lbs./acre
Tri-C Humate Soil Conditioner 500 lbs./acre
Biosol Forte 7-2-1 Organic fertilizer 800 lbs./acre
AM 120 Mycorrhizal inoculum 60 lbs./acre
Seed mix as prescribed by S & S Seeds

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

A. Inspection of conditions: Examine related work including irrigation and grading of surface before proceeding with any work and notify the Owner’s Representative in writing on conditions which may prevent the proper execution of this work. Failure to report unsuitable City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

32 92 19-6 HYDROSEEDING
conditions will require the contractor to rectify unacceptable work at no additional cost to the Owne
r.

B. Water all plant areas thoroughly to saturate upper layers of soil prior to the hydroseeding operation.

C. Allow the planting area soil surface to dry out for one day only prior to the hydroseeding application. Exercise care not to allow the soil surface to be overly saturated with water prior to the hydro-seeding installation. At the same time the soil surface should not become too dry during this period. There should be some residual moisture within the first 1/4 inch of the soil surface.

D. Prior to starting the hydro-seeding operation notify the Owner’s Representative forty eight (48) hours in advance to be present at start of start of hydroseeding.

3.2. HYDRO-SEEDING APPLICATION

A. Apply the hydroseeding in the form of a slurry consisting of organic soil amendments, commercial fertilizer, and any other chemicals that are called out. When hydraulically sprayed onto the soil, the mulch shall form a blotter-like material. Direct the spray operation so that this procedure will drill and mix the slurry components into the soil, the slurry spray will also penetrate the soil surface, thus ensuring maximum impregnation and coverage. The impregnation and mixing of the components will help in retaining moisture while stabilizing soil surface from superficial erosion.

B. Do not let the hydroseeding slurry components in the hydro-seeding machine for more than two (2) hours because of possible seed destruction. If slurry components are left for more than two hours in the machine, add 50% more of the originally specified seed mix to any slurry mixture, which has not been applied within the two hours after mixing. Add 75% more of the original seed mix to any slurry mixture, which has not been applied eight (8) hours after mixing.

All mixtures more than eight (8) hours old, must be disposed, off-site, at the contractor's expense.

C. Spray the area with a uniform visible coat, using the dark color of the cellulose fiber as a visual guide. The slurry shall be applied in a downward drilling motion via a fan stream nozzle.

Insure that all of the slurry components enter and mix with the soil. Insure the uniformity of the hydroseed application. The Owner’s Representative shall approve the hydraulic contractor.

D. Exercise special care to prevent any of the slurry from being sprayed onto any hardscape areas including concrete walks, fences, walls, buildings, etc. Remove all slurry sprayed onto these surfaces at the contractor's expense.

E. Contractor shall save all seed and fertilizer tags and fiber mulch bags for the Owner’s Representative to verify compliance with the drawings and specifications.

F. The Owner’s Representative shall be present during the hydro-seeding operation and has final determination if conditions are acceptable for hydro-seed application.

G. Planting Sequence and Watering: Plant seed in sequence with sprinkler operating patterns. At no time after planting shall seed be subject to drying conditions. Keep seed moist until germination (7 to 12 days, depending on weather conditions). Under heat conditions, plant seed in early morning or late afternoon. Irrigate newly planted areas at a frequency and duration to maintain surface soil moisture without creating areas of City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

HYDROSEEDING 32 92 13-7
inundation or puddling. If entire job cannot be completed in (1) day, stop at perimeter of a give
n irrigation valve zone so as to not disturb the next days successive applications.

H. Re-seeding

1. All bare spots shall be re-seeded by the Contractor within fourteen days of initial application. The Contractor shall be responsible for all re-seeded areas as long after seeding as necessary until an acceptable coverage is realized and approved by the Landscape Architect.

I. Protection

Protect all hydroseeded areas against damage, including erosion and trespass. Provide whatever facilities and safeguards are necessary to accomplish this. Take special care to prevent erosion. All damages shall be the Contractor's responsibility during the life of the contract.

PART 4 – MAINTENANCE / GUARANTEE

4.1. Upon acceptance of hydroseeding operations, maintain all hydroseeding areas for a period of 90 calendar days as follows:

A. Germination stage irrigation: Approximately 25 hours after hydro-seeding the planting areas, initiate the watering sequence. Leave the water on long enough to moisten the soil thoroughly to the depth of the slurry mulch taking care not to super saturate or wash away the slurry and seed. Perform frequent, light irrigation until the seed has germinated. Repair all seed washings and erosion.

B. Establishment stage irrigation: After germination, reduce each watering. Owner’s Representative shall approve the specific watering program.

4.2. FERTILIZATION

Fertilize all hydroseed areas with an approved commercial fertilizer, 30 calendar days from the start of the grow-in period and continuing once every 60 calendar days until the completion of the 120 calendar day grow-in period.

4.3 WEEDING

All concentrated developments of weed growth appearing in the seed mix planting areas during the maintenance period shall be removed at weekly intervals. The contractor may elect to remove such concentrations of weeds manually or by an Owner approved herbicide program. Contractor’s maintenance team shall be knowledgeable in determining weeds from the germinated hydroseeded plant material, and be able to identify weeds for removal.

4.4 MINIMUM COVERAGE AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Minimum coverage: Final acceptance may be given at the end of the 90 calendar day maintenance period if an acceptable germination of turf and adequate plant establishment has been obtained, as determined by the Owner’s Representative.

B. Final approval and acceptance will be given in writing by the Owner’s Representative following a final acceptance inspection. The Owner’s Representative reserves the option to extend the maintenance period to achieve complete germination of all plant materials with a uniform height, color and density for each species throughout all hydroseeded areas.

City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

32 92 19-8 HYDROSEEDING

4.5 G

UARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT

A. Guarantee until end of maintenance period and acceptance by the Owner’s Representative.

4.6 CLEAN UP

A. After all planting operations are complete, remove all trash, excess soil, and rubbish from the property. Repair scars, ruts, or other marks in the ground caused by this work and leave the ground in a neat and orderly condition.

B. Leave the site in broom-clean condition, and wash down all paved areas within the project site. Leave walks in clean and safe condition.

C. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors, and trades and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed.

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

SODDING 32 92 23-1
SECTION 32 92 23

SODDING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. The requirements of the "General Conditions of the Contract" and of Division 1, "General Requirements," shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Work Included:

All labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations of the work for this section, complete as shown on the Drawings or specified herein. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Clean Up

B. Related Work in Other Sections:

1. Section 32 84 00 - Irrigation System

2. Section 32 90 00 – Planting

C. Contractor Furnished Labor. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor to support all aspects of the sodding process. This additional labor is to ensure that all planting occurs at the same time with progression in an organized fashion followed by a uniform application of water within thirty (30) minutes of planting.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Quality Control:

1. Submit documentation of all lawn and grass material being ordered to Owner’s Representative at least 60 days prior to start of planting. Arrange procedure for inspection of materials with Owner’s Representative at time of submission.

2. Materials shall be subject to inspection and approval by Owner’s’s Representative at place of growth or upon delivery for conformity to specifications. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection during the progress of the work.

3. Submit written request for inspection of materials at place of growth and/or availability to Owner’s’s Representative. Written request shall state the place of growth and/or availability and the harvesting record for the specified sod. The Owner’s’s Representative reserves the right to refuse inspection at this time if, in his judgment, an inspection is not warranted.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protection and Delivery of Sod:

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

32 92 23-2 SODDING

1. Sod for site planning shall be delivered to planting site within twenty four (24) hours of harvest.

Sod shall be refrigerated immediately after harvest prior to transportation. Sod shall remain moist at all times prior to planting.

2. Deliver materials to site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's guarantee chemical analysis, name, trademark, purity, germination, and conformance to State law.

3. Deliver materials with legible waterproof identification labels.

4. Protect material during delivery to prevent damage.

5. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative seven days prior to delivery of all materials and shall submit an itemized list for each delivery.

B. Storage:

1. Store plant material in shade and protect from weather.

2. Protect material from damage and theft.

C. Handling:

1. Do not drop materials.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Planting:

1. Perform actual planting only when weather and soil conditions are suitable according to locally accepted practices.

B. Scheduling:

1. Install trees and container stock plant material before Sodded Lawn and Grass installation.

1.6 SAMPLES AND TESTS

A. City reserves the right to take and analyze samples of materials for conformity to Specifications at any time. Contractor shall furnish samples upon County’s request. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site at Contractor's expense. Costs of testing materials not meeting Specifications shall be paid by Contractor.

B. Laboratory Analysis: Provide laboratory soils analysis conforming to the Landscape Planting Specification.

1.7 REPLACEMENTS

A. Replacement

1. Any materials found to be dead, missing, or in poor condition during the maintenance period shall be replaced immediately. The Owner’s Representative shall be the sole judge as to the condition of materials. Materials to be replaced within the guarantee period shall be replaced by the Contractor within 15 days of written notification by the Owner’s Representative.

City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

SODDING 32 92 23-3

1.8 CONTROL

A. The selection of herbicides, application rates and methods are to be performed under the control and guidance of a State of California licensed pest control advisor and applicator.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Specific amendments and fertilizer Specifications are to conform to Section 32 90 00 Planting.

B. All materials shall be of standard, approved, and first-rate quality and shall be in prime condition when installed and accepted. Any commercially processed or packaged material shall be delivered to the site in the original unopened container bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis.

2.2 STATEMENTS OF CONFIRMATION

A. Submit at time of delivery invoice statements certifying quantities by bulk and/or weight, for all materials. Submit suppliers' certificates of compliance with these specifications. Random samples may be taken by Owner’s representative for analysis.

2.3 SOD

A. Sod:

1. Sod Variety: “Tifway Drought-tolerant Bermuda Grass” sod supplied by West Coast Turf. Unless otherwise specified on the plans. 800-447-1840. Sod shall be 1” thick, washed, and soil-less, and delivered in 4-foot rolls.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Obtain certification that final grades to 0.1” for sodded areas have been established prior to commencing landscaping operations. Provide for incorporation of all amendments, settling, etc. Be responsible for shaping all planting areas as indicated on Drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. The irrigation system shall be fully operational and approved prior to sodding.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Actual planting shall be performed during those periods when weather and soil conditions are suitable and in accordance with locally accepted practice as approved by the Owner’s Representative.

B. Preparation of Lawn Areas:

1. See Section 32 90 00 for soil preparation of turf.

C. Final Grades:

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

32 92 23-4 SODDING

1. Grade all lawn planting areas to a level of 1 inch below the adjacent pavement surface. Where no grades are shown, grade between existing or fixed controls (such as walks, curbs, catch basins) and elevations shown to provide a smooth and continual plane. Rake and level as necessary to obtain true and even surfaces. Maintain all swales and drainage patterns specified on the site grading plans.

2. Finish grading shall ensure proper drainage of the site.

3. Surface drainage to be as indicated on plans.

4. Re-grade and replant all erosion scars.

D. Disposal of Excess Soil: Dispose of unacceptable or unused excess soil off site.

E. Weed Control:

1. After soil preparation and establishment of final grades prior to any planting, provide Weed Abatement Program per Section 32 90 00.

F. Scheduling

1. The Contractor shall commence the field turf grass sod installation at the Owner Representative’s direction. Contractor shall incorporate these dates and the related construction activities in the overall construction schedule. Contractor shall show due diligence in his performance in meeting this schedule.

G. Laying Sod:

1. Soil moisture. All areas to receive planting shall be irrigated prior to planting. Soil shall be maintained in a constant moist condition but well below field capacity. Extreme care must be exercised to prevent over-watering to prevent soil-compaction or creating grade irregularities by heavy equipment.

2. The Contractor shall provide and install the type and quantity of turf grass sod as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Only long roll sod of the variety specified shall be utilized.

3. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod strips; do not overlap. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses. Work from boards to avoid damage to subgrade or sod. Tamp or lightly roll to ensure contact with subgrade. Work sifted soil into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess material from sodded areas to prevent smothering.

NOTE: Mesh backing material shall be removed from sod at the time that sod is laid.

The Contractor shall clean up and dispose, off-site, all mesh material and surplus sod.

4. Thoroughly water soil with a fine spray immediately after planting to saturate the sodded area to a depth of four inches.

5. After two days of thorough watering, the Contractor shall curtail watering to permit re-rolling of the sodded area to ensure proper contact with subgrade.

6. After the second rolling of the sod, the Contractor shall routinely water, fertilize and maintain sodded area until the termination of the specified maintenance period and until acceptance by the Owner’s Representative.

City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

SODDING 32 92 23-5
H. Maintenance and Observation:

1. Turf type Bermuda shall be no more than 3/4 to 1 inches height at time of the first mowing. All turf areas shall be mowed, removing no more than 1/3 of the turf grass blade, and all bare spots shall be resodded prior to beginning of the maintenance period.

2. Conduct a complete review of all landscape construction items at the end of the landscape construction period to establish the time for beginning of the maintenance period. Notify the Owner’s representative at least seven days in advance of review.

3. Maintain lawns to watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, and other operations such as rolling, regarding, and replanting as required to establish a smooth, acceptable lawn, free of eroded or bare areas.

a. Mowing

1) Mow throughout maintenance period. At a rate of (2) times weekly. 2) Mow in 3 different directions across entire turf area. 3) Mow height shall be between ¾" and ½" depending on Owner’s representative. 4) Mower shall be a reel mower with hydraulic reels, 7 blade minimum. 5) Top dress any settling in grade (weekly) throughout maintenance period. Use same material as per Soil Preparation specification.
6) Monitored daily for possible fungus or insect damage. Correct immediately. 7) Submit weekly maintenance schedule to Owner’s representative. 8) Walk entire Turf grass surface with Owner’s representative weekly for performance evaluation and to address any needed adjustments.

b. Fertilization:

1) Apply fertilizer every 10 days. ½ of # pound actual nitrogen per 1000 sq. ft. to turf grass. 21-0-0 is recommended or approved equal. This is equal to 2.5 lbs. of product per 1000 sq. ft. for the entire 120-day maintenance period. 2) In addition, at 45-day interval apply Gro-Power 3-12-12 at recommended rates.

c. Irrigation should be adjusted from constant daytime syringing to light shallow evening irrigation and daytime irrigation as needed.

d. Weeds shall be mechanically removed daily upon appearance.

4. Final Observation will be made at the conclusion of the maintenance period. Submit written notice requesting final observation to the Owner’s representative at least seven days before anticipated date.

5. When observed turf work does not comply with requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until observed by the Owner’s representative and found to be acceptable. Remove rejected materials promptly from project site.

6. In the event the contractor requests observation of incomplete work, without completing previously noted corrections or without preparing for the observation, he will be responsible for reimbursing the Owner’s Representative at the hourly rate in effect at the time of the observation portal to portal (plus transportation costs) for the inconvenience. No further observations will be scheduled until this charge has been paid.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

32 92 23-6 SODDING

3.4 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT

A. Guarantee until end of maintenance period and acceptance by the Owner’s Representative. Replace damaged or dead lawn areas with sod.

3.5 CLEAN-UP

A. After all planting operations are complete, remove all trash, excess soil, and rubbish from the property. Repair scars, ruts, or other marks in the ground caused by this work and leave the ground in a neat and orderly condition.

B. Leave the site in broom-clean condition and wash down all paved areas within the project site. Leave walks in clean and safe condition.

C. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors, and trades and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed.

3.6 OBSERVATION SCHEDULE

A. Normal progress observation shall be requested by the Contractor from the Owner’s Representative at least 40 hours in advance of an anticipated site visit. Advance notification for the below site visits shall be required as follows:

1. Final grade review: 48 hours

2. Lawn sod installation: 48 hours

3. Pre-maintenance: 7 days

4. Final acceptance: 7 days

No site visits shall commence without all items noted in previous observation reports either completed or remedied unless such compliance has been waived by the Owner’s Represenative.

Site visits that are scheduled, but the contractor has failed to accomplish punchlist tasks or prepare adequately for desired inspections, shall make the Contractor responsible for reimbursing the Owner’s Representative at his current hourly billing rate plus transportation costs. No further inspections shall be scheduled until this charge has been paid and received by the Owner’s Representative.

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION 33 14 00-1
SECTION 33 14 00

WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 – GENERAL

This Part and all Subparts shall conform to the following related documents:

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1. Standard Specifications:

a. "Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction", latest Edition, hereafter referred to as "GreenBook", published by Building News Inc., Los Angeles, California.

a. Design Criteria and Standard Drawings issued by Carlsbad Municipal Water District for Water and Sewer Facilities.

b. Work Area Traffic Control Handbook (WATCH Manual), Public Works Standards, Inc. (Latest Edition).

2. Standard Drawings:

a. Design Criteria and Standard Drawings issued by Carlsbad Municipal Water District for Water and Sewer Facilities.

3. References

a. California Building Code (Latest Edition)

b. California Plumbing Code (Latest Edition)

c. California Fire Code (Latest Edition)

d. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) codes and standards (Latest Edition)

e. City of Carlsbad Fire Department Guidelines, (Latest Edition)

f. American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standards

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and specialties up to five feet outside the building for the following:

1. Domestic Water services.

2. Fire Water services.

3. Combined water service and fire-service mains.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

33 14 00-2 WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals and Shop Drawings for public water improvements shall be reviewed and approved by the Santa Margarita Water District Engineering Department.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Products in this Part and all Subparts shall conform to the documents referenced in Part 1 – General.

Products include, but are not limited to the following:

2.1 WATER METERS

A. Water Meters are to be purchased from Carlsbad Municipal Water District.

2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLIES

A. Approved manufacturers/models of backflow prevention assemblies are those approved by the State of California Department of Health Services (DOHS), Division of Drinking Water and Environmental, as shown in its latest edition of “Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies for Service Isolation” and the approved list from Carlsbad Municipal Water District.

2.3 FIRE HYDRANTS

A. Carlsbad Municipal Water District approved Manufacturer(s):

1. James Jones Company Model No. 3700 or J4040

2. Clow Corporation Model No. 850 or 2500

3. Long Beach Iron Works Model 425 or 125 CL

2.4 EXECUTION

A. Execution of all related work in this Section shall conform to the documents referenced in Part 1 - General. Execution includes, but is not limited to the following:

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad
VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK 10/07/2025

SANITARY SEWERAGE 33 30 00-1
SECTION 33 30 00

SANITARY SEWERAGE

PART 1 – GENERAL

This Part and all Subparts shall conform to the following related documents:

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1. Standard Specifications:

a. "Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction", latest Edition, hereafter referred to as "GreenBook", published by Building News Inc., Los Angeles, California.

b. Design Criteria and Standard Drawings issued by Carlsbad Municipal Water District for Water and Sewer Facilities.

c. Work Area Traffic Control Handbook (WATCH Manual), Public Works Standards, Inc. (Latest Edition).

2. Standard Drawings shall apply to the work to the extent referenced on the plans:

a. Standard Plans for Public Works Construction (Latest Edition).

b. Design Criteria and Standard Drawings issued by Carlsbad Municipal Water District for Water and Sewer Facilities.

3. References

a. California Building Code (Latest Edition)

b. California Plumbing Code (Latest Edition)

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

WATER UTILITIES 33 40 00-1
SECTION 33 40 00

STORMWATER UTILITIES

PART 1 – GENERAL

This Part and all Subparts shall conform to the following related documents:

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1. Standard Specifications:

a. The “GreenBook”: Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Latest Edition).

b. Work Area Traffic Control Handbook (WATCH Manual), Public Works Standards, Inc. (Latest Edition).

2. Standard Drawings shall apply to the work to the extent referenced on the plans:

a. Standard Plans, issued by the City of Carlsbad Municipal Water District

b. Standard Plans for Public Works Construction (Latest Edition).

3. References

a. California Building Code (Latest Edition)

b. California Plumbing Code (Latest Edition)

c. County of San Diego Department of Public Works Hydrology Manual (Latest Edition)

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes storm drain piping and structures outside the building.

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

SITE CONDITIONS FOR BIKE PARKS 02 00 00-1
SECTION 02 00 00

SITE CONDITIONS FOR BIKE PARKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED INFORMATION

A. Related information and requirements are included in the General and Supplementary Conditions with regards to existing underground utilities.

1.2 INFORMATION ON SITE CONDITIONS

A. All information obtained by the Engineer regarding site conditions, subsurface information, groundwater elevations, existing constructions of site facilities, and existing underground utilities and similar data are shown on the plans or provided herein.

B. Information derived from inspection of topographic maps, or from plans showing locations of utilities and structures will not in any way relieve Prime General Contractor from any risk, or from properly examining the site and making such additional investigations as he may elect, or from properly fulfilling all the terms of the contract documents.

1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the nature and location of the work and the general and local conditions.

B. The Prime General Contractor further shall satisfy himself as to the character, quality, and quantity of surface and subsurface materials to be encountered by reviewing Soils Report (if applicable) and reviewing any other pertinent information. Any new exploratory work must be approved by the Owner.

Failure of the Contractor to acquaint himself with the site and all available information will not relieve him of the responsibility for properly estimating the difficulty or cost of completing the work.

The Contractor will not be responsible for inspections. Owner to provide third party inspections.

C. The Prime General Contractor shall anticipate underground obstructions such as utility lines, concrete, water table and variation hereof due to rainfall, soil conditions and debris. No extra payment will be allowed for the removal, replacement, repair, or possible increased cost caused by underground obstructions. Any such lines or obstructions indicated on the map show only the approximate location and must be verified in the field by the Contractor. The Owner and Engineer will endeavor to familiarize the contractor with all known underground obstructions, but this will not relieve the Contractor from full responsibility in anticipating and locating all underground obstructions.

D. Additional information

1. Prior to construction, the Prime General Contractor may make their own subsurface investigations subject to time schedules and arrangements approved in advance by the Owner.

Before any subsurface test holes are excavated, obtain permits from governing agency to perform such work.

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

02 41 13-1 SITE DEMOLITION FOR BIKE PARKS
SECTION 02 41 13

SITE DEMOLITION FOR BIKE PARKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Perform all site demolition work, complete, as shown and as specified.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork for Bike Parks

2. Section 31 12 00 – Selective Site Clearing for Bike Parks

3. Section 31 23 13 – Sub-Grade Preparation for Bike Parks

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials.

B. DIS – Division of Industrial Safety.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Demolish existing site improvements as indicated on the Drawings, in an orderly and careful manner. Comply with all local codes and ordinances.

B. Equipment: Use equipment specifically designed for the demolition of each type of material.

C. Labor: Employ workmen skilled in the use of the equipment being utilized for demolition.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND DISPOSAL

A. Delivery and Storage: Do not deliver to the job site nor store thereon demolition equipment and materials prior to receiving written notice to proceed. Confine storage to areas approved by Owner.

B. Disposal: Legally dispose of off -site products of demolition during or at end of each day's work.

Contractor shall pay all disposal costs associated with the project.

1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions: Inspect site prior to commencing work. Determine scope of applicable site conditions.

B. Access and Testing: Make test excavations and borings required to determine existing conditions, subject to Owner's convenience. Refer to Geo-Technical report within the Appendix.

C. Acceptance: Commencing work constitutes Contractor's acceptance of site conditions, both surface and subsurface. No extra payment shall accrue to Contractor by virtue of unknown conditions or difficulties of performing this demolition work.

1.6 PROTECTION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

SITE DEMOLITION FOR BIKE PARKS 02 41 13-2
A. Protection of Existing Plants to Remain

1. Operations: Do not store materials or equipment, permit, burning, or operate or park equipment under the branches of existing plants to remain except as actually required for construction in those areas.

2. Barriers: Provide barricades, fences, or other barriers as necessary at the drip line to protect existing plants to remain from damage during construction.

3. Notification: Notify Owner's Representative when Contractor feels construction activities may damage existing plants to remain.

4. Replacement of Damaged Plants:

a. Replace existing plants to remain which are damaged during construction with accepted plants of the same species and as those damaged at no cost to Owner. b. Owner's Representative will determine extent of damage and of damaged plants.

B. Protection of Existing Site Improvements

1. References: Verify and maintain benchmarks, monuments, and other reference points. Replace if disturbed or destroyed.

2. Protection: Protect existing improvements noted to remain within designated limit(s) of work.

Supply shoring, bracing, reinforcing and barricades as required. Refer to drawings for limit of work.

3. Utilities: Keep in operation existing utility circuits and piping to including sprinkler irrigation except at the direction of the Representative. Provide 48- hour notice of interruption service.

Notify Owner's Representative should utilities not on Drawings be found during demolition.

4. Repair: If damage to site improvements to remain occurs during the course of the work, restore to the satisfaction of the Owner no additional cost.

PART 2 – MATERIALS (CONTRACTOR’S OPTION)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verification: Verify with Owner items to be removed prior to commencement of work.

B. Compliance: Proceed with demolition in an orderly and careful, in compliance with local codes and ordinances.

C. Disposal: Legally dispose of demolished materials off site unless directed by Owner.

3.2 DEMOLITION

A. Utilities

1. Capping: Disconnecting and capping of utilities must be in with the regulations of the utility company affected.

B. Paving and Walls

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

02 41 13-3 SITE DEMOLITION FOR BIKE PARKS

1. Saw-cutting: Accurately and cleanly sawcut existing concrete as shown on Drawings. Confine cuts to areas shown. Avoid damage to adjacent improvements.

2. Finishing: Rough grade excavated areas as necessary to achieve the final line and grade as called for in other Sections of this work. Compact to the density of the surrounding area. The final surface shall be smooth, even, and tight, free from loose or soft areas.

C. Plant Materials to be Demolished: See Selective Clearing for Bike Parks - Section 31 10 00.

D. Subgrade: Fill depressions made by demolition and restore areas to a smooth and even grade.

Compact to the of the surrounding soil per Geo-Tech. recommendation.

3.3 DE-WATERING

A. General: Provide and operate equipment and do ditching and necessary to keep the project area free from water.

B. Storm Water: Pump off storm runoff or other water until such time as new work in other Sections shall effectively remove such water.

C. Protection: Take measures required to dispose of surface and subsurface water in compliance with municipal requirements.

D. Debris: Prevent transport of soil, aggregate or debris off site where practical.

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

CONCRETE FORMWORK FOR BIKE PARKS 03 10 00-1
SECTION 03 10 00

CONCRETE FORMWORK FOR BIKE PARKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide formwork and accessories for construction of cast-in-place concrete work.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing for Bike Parks

B. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete for Bike Parks

C. Section 03 36 00 – Shotcrete for Bike Parks

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Design Criteria: Conform to ACI 347-68, Chapter I.

B. Allowable Tolerances: Conform to ACI 347-68, 2.4.

1.4 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

A. Store materials on and under protective sheeting.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Notify responsible trades of schedules of concrete pours to allow time for installation and coordination.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Forms

1. Flatwork: Nominal 2" thick No. 2 Common Southern Yellow Pine or steel forms.

2. Vertical and Custom Work: Exterior grade Standard Douglas Fir (or equal plywood), minimum three ply, one smooth side sufficiently thick to sustain loads, or steel forms.

B. Form Oil: Non staining, paraffin-base oil having a specific gravity of between 0.8 and 0.9.

C. Form ties, bolts, rods, or patented devices having tensile strength of 3000 lbs., adjustable length, free of lugs which would leave a hole larger than 5/8" diameter and having a full one- inch depth of break-back.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

03 10 00-2 CONCRETE FORMWORK FOR BIKE PARKS
PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION AND ERECTION

A. Construct forms in accordance with ACI 347-68.

B. Build forms to shapes, lines, and dimensions of detailed members of concrete construction. Set to line and grade, brace and secure to withstand placing of concrete and maintain their shape and position.

C. Construct forms with care to produce concrete surfaces without unsightly or objectionable form marks in exposed concrete surfaces.

D. Thoroughly clean surfaces of form material and remove nails before reuse. Do not reuse damaged or worn forms. Coat contact surfaces of forms with non- staining form oil prior to placing metal reinforcement.

E. Immediately before placing concrete, clean forms of chips, sawdust, and debris. Immediately after removal of forms, remove form ties, wires, and defects and patch.

3.2 INSERTS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Make provisions for required installation of accessories, bolts, hangers, sleeves, anchor slots and inserts cast in concrete. Obtain suitable templates or instructions for installation of items. Place expansion joints where detailed and required.

3.3 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SHORING

A. Remove forms and shores in accordance with ACI 347-68.

3.4 CLEANUP

A. Remove debris and trash.

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT FOR BIKE PARKS 03 20 00-1
SECTION 03 20 00

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT FOR BIKE PARKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish materials, labor, transportation, services, and equipment necessary to install all concrete reinforcement related to the skate park as indicated on scope of work contract and shown on drawings and as specified herein.

B. Provide all steel reinforcement for construction of concrete paving for the skate park.

1.2 RELATED INFORMATION

A. Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Formwork for Bike Parks

B. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete for Bike Parks

C. Section 03 36 00 – Shotcrete for Bike Parks

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

1. ACI 315-80, Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures.

2. ACI 318-77, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM - latest editions)

1. ASTM A233, Mild Steel Arc Welding Electrodes.

2. ASTM A615, Deformed Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

3. A706, Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Manual of Standard Practice, latest edition.

D. American Welding Society (AWS): Reinforcing Steel Welding Code, D12.1- 75, including latest revisions.

1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Stack reinforcing steel in tiers. Mark each length, size, shape, and location. Maintain reinforcement free of dirt, mud, paint, or rust.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings

1. Indicate complete reinforcing method for each concrete member including materials, sizes, bends, dimensions, stirrup spacing, and placing details not shown on drawings.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

03 20 00-2 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT FOR BIKE PARKS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deformed billet steel, ASTM A615, Grade 60. Minimum 75% Recycled Product.

B. Welded Steel Reinforcement: Deformed low-alloy steel, ASTM A706, carbon content not exceeding

0.30% and manganese content not exceeding 0.60%. Identify and tag with manufacturer's heat identification number.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and lengths detailed in accordance with requirements of ACI 318-71 and ACI 315-65.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute’s recommended practice for “Placing Reinforcing Bars” for placing and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover over reinforcement.

D. Accurately place reinforcing steel in accordance with drawings. Rebar shall be 2” beneath concrete surfaces. Thoroughly clean reinforcement of any coating which would reduce bonding. Do not heat, cut, or bend bars without Owner’s approval. Do not splice reinforcement at points of maximum stress.

Stagger splices in adjacent bars and provide a minimum overlap of 30- bar diameters at splices unless specifically noted otherwise on Drawings.

E. Securely saddle tie intersections with No. 18- gauge black annealed wire. Rigidly secure reinforcement in place. Provide concrete coverage as shown on Drawings.

3.2 WELDING REINFORCEMENT

A. Weld deformed steel reinforcement bars in strict accordance with AWS 12.1, using recommended pre-heat temperature and electrode for type of steel being welded.

B. Do not weld steel reinforcement bars without proper heat identification of bars.

3.3 CLEANUP

A. Remove debris and trash resulting from specified work.

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS 03 30 00-1
SECTION 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish materials, labor, transportation, services, and equipment necessary to install all Cast -In- Place Concrete related to the skate park as indicated on scope of work contract and shown on drawings and as specified herein.

1.2 RELATED INFORMATION

A. Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Formwork for Bike Parks

B. Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing Bike Parks

C. Section 03 36 00 – Shotcrete Bike Parks

D. Section 03 33 51 – Concrete Finishing Bike Parks

E. Section 03 37 00 – Concrete Curing Bike Parks

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

1. ACI 315-80, Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures.

2. ACI 318-77, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM - latest editions)

1. ASTM A233, Mild Steel Arc Welding Electrodes.

2. ASTM A615, Deformed Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

3. ASTM A706, Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Manual of Standard Practice, latest edition.

D. American Welding Society (AWS): Reinforcing Steel Welding Code, D12.1- 75, including latest revisions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Design of Concrete Mixes

1. Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for design of concrete mixes. Design of concrete mixes shall be performed by a Testing Laboratory selected by Contractor and reviewed and approved by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer. Design methods to be in accordance with ACI 318-71.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

03 30 00-2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS

2. Concrete mix plant to conduct advance tests of trial mixes with proposed materials. Test four (4) cylinders in accordance with ASTM C39 at seven (7) days and twenty -eight (28) days. Do not place concrete on project until laboratory reports and breaks of confirmations cylinders indicate that the proposed mixes will meet the strength requirements.

3. Check mix design and revise, if necessary, wherever changes are made in aggregate or in surface water content of aggregate or workability of concrete. Slump shall be the minimum to produce workable mix. Laboratory shall prescribe minimum quantity of water.

4. If Portland Cement reducers or other additives are used, submit control mix design without reducers or additives as well as mix exactly proposed to be used. Submit W.R. Grace Co. recommendations for retarder and shrinkage compensation of slab on grade.

5. Forward two (2) copies of design mix to the City.

B. Submit product data and manufacturer's instructions for:

1. Color admixture.

2. Expansion joint fill material.

3. Curing compound.

4. Dowel aligners/caps.

5. Crack repair materials.

6. Form facing materials.

7. Proprietary cleaning agents.

8. Plastic film for curing.

9. Surface retarders.

10. Micro-Fiber reinforcement.

C. Samples

1. Samples for Color Selection: Submit color additive manufacturer's color chart & sample chip set; indicate color additive number and required dosage rate. Samples indicate general color and may vary from concrete finished in field according to Specifications.

2. Joint Fill Materials: Submit data sheets for Sika 1A and Sika 1C-SL.

D. Placement / Pour Schedule

1. Contractor to indicate on plans the locations to be installed within a day’s work and not exceeding 50 cubic yards per day for quality control and inspection schedules.

2. Schedule and sequence to be reviewed and approved by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer prior to starting this work.

E. Cast in Place Concrete Samples / Mock-Ups

1. Contractor shall prepare 4’x 4’ samples for each cast -in-place concrete type indicated on Drawings. Contractor may pour each type as part of the finished project, and if approved by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer it may remain in place as finished product. If the sample is not approved, the Contractor in charge of the specific scope of work shall remove and replace another sample for Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer’s approval at no additional cost to the City.

2. Samples shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer including aggregates, texture, color, and finishes. If samples are rejected by the Resident

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS 03 30 00-3
Engineer / Skate Park Designer, the Contractor in charge of the specific scope of work shall remove and replace the sample for the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer’s approval at no additional cost to the City.

3. These samples will become the standard of quality by which future paving samples and work will be judged.

4. Samples to remain on-site and be protected during construction, to compare work in progress.

If samples are damaged or removed, the Contractor in charge of the specific scope of work shall repair/replace in-kind immediately at no additional cost to the City.

F. Test Reports: Compressive strength of concrete test cylinders taken upon delivery of concrete.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Concrete Testing

1. Prepare samples by each application crew using the equipment, materials and mix proportions proposed for the Project. City shall observe preparation of test panels noting placement of cast in place concrete by applications crew.

2. Test panel shall be minimum 6” x 18” x 18” maximum 6” x 24” x 24”. Test panel shall conform to Part 1.04 Submittals.

3. Secure and protect samples during construction and test for compliance with Specifications.

4. Test strength of the cast in place concrete as work progresses as follows:

a. Cut cores from the test panel and test in accordance with ASTM C42. b. One test panel per 50 yards of accumulated cast in place concrete, minimum 6” x 18” x 18” maximum 6” x 24” x 24”. Cores taken from the test panel shall be taken not less than once each shift nor less than one for each 50 cubic yards of cast in place concrete pl aced through the nozzle.
c. Cores shall be soaked in water for a minimum of forty (40) hours before testing.

B. Certification

1. Nozzleman certification shall be in accordance with ACI 506.3R.

C. Regulatory Requirements

1. Meet requirements of applicable laws, codes, and regulations required by authorities having jurisdiction over Work.

D. Acceptance

1. Final acceptance of the cast in place will be done by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer and will based upon the results obtained from cores.

E. Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications

1. Manufacturer of ready -mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

F. Skate Park Contractor / Sub-Contractor Experience

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

03 30 00-4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS

Provide evidence to indicate successful experience in providing cast in place concrete work for skate parks similar in scope to that specified herein and can demonstrate successful experience through past project documentation and references.

1. Required Experience

Skate Park Contractor or Sub-Contractor must have completed three (3) public concrete skate park facilities with a minimum size of 10,000 square feet, in the last five (5) years. Parks must be open and in good operating condition for at least one (1) year.

2. Evidence of Experience

Skate Park Contractor or Sub- Contractor shall submit to Field Engineer Inspector satisfactory documentation of previously mentioned experience and qualification. If a Contractor cannot provide this information or if it is unverifiable, work under this Section and any other related Section cannot be completed by Contractor. This submission must contain the Project Name & Location, City Name & Contact Information, Designer Name & Contact Information, Project Size, Contract Value, Completion Date, and Supervisor and/or Key Personnel responsible for this experience for each of the qualifying projects.

3. Safety and Performance Guidelines

Comply with all safety and performance requirements and all applicable references as specified in the ASTM F2480 Standard Guide for In-ground Skate Parks.

4. ACI Requirements

Meet all requirements of ACI 6. ~ ACI 318- 77 – Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials in dry and protected locations and protect from damage.

B. Do not change brand of cement or source of aggregate during course of Work, without prior approval from the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Contractor shall submit plan to monitor wind velocity, relative humidity, temperature, and concrete temperature to maintain specified maximum rate of evaporation.

2. Do not place concrete when sub-base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, nor when surface is wet.

3. Protect concrete against extreme cold and heat, frost, rapid drying, and damage by rain.

B. Coordination:

1. Coordinate schedules of concrete placement to allow adequate time for installation of other related work.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS 03 30 00-5

2. Verify that anchor bolts and other embedded steel items to be cast into concrete are properly placed.

3. Coordinate size and location of mechanical and electrical equipment concrete pads.

4. Coordinate earthwork and Soils Report requirements with placement requirements.

5. Coordinate with formwork and finishes sections to provide finish floor levelness and flatness as specified herein. Slope to drains at grades and percent slope shown on contract documents.

6. Ensure that irrigation sleeves, electrical conduit, drainage lines and other utility elements are accommodated and as-built located prior to placing concrete.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Ready Mixed Concrete: Batched, mixed, and transported in accordance with ASTM C94 – Specifications for Ready Mixed Concrete.

B. Portland Cement: Refer to Drawings for specific paving type and finish required and conform to ASTM C-150, Type II. Use same brand of cement from single source throughout entire project for each paving type unless approval from the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer states otherwise.

C. Fine Aggregate (washed concrete sand): Clean, hard, durable, uncoated washed natural sand, free from silt, loam, or clay, and conforming to ASTM C33.

D. Coarse Aggregate: Class II -Hard durable, un- coated crushed limestone meeting requirements of ASTM C-33. Unless otherwise noted in aggregate size 1” minimum, No., 56 or 57. Base rock shall conform to local code.

E. Water: Potable and free from deleterious materials such as oils, acids, and organic matter.

F. Admixture: Cement -dispersing, water -reducing compound, ASTM C 494, Type A, as made by Master Builders, Sika, or Gifford- Hill Co., or equal. Depending upon weather conditions at time of placing, ASTM C 494, Type D (water -retarding) or Type E (water -reducing, accelerating) may be used if approved by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer.

G. Additives: Micro-Fiber reinforcement that is designed to mitigate plastic shrinkage cracking, to be approved by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer, in all concrete (dosage as recommended by the manufacturer).

H. Curing Materials:

1. Water: Domestic Quality, clear and potable with no chemical content.

2. Sheet Material: Comply with ASTM C171. Moisture loss maximum .055 g/cm sq. Color: White.

3. Curing Compounds/Sealer: Curing compound shall comply with ASTM C309 and be approved by color additive manufacturer for use with colored concrete.

2.2 PROPORTIONS AND MIXING

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

03 30 00-6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS
A. Proportions and Design: In accordance with approved mix design. Minimum allowable compressive strength at 28 days is 4000 psi (as marked per plan).

B. Admixture: No admixtures without approval of the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer.

Introduce adm ixtures in quantities and according to methods recommended by admixture manufacturer. Add air-entraining agent to concrete as scheduled.

C. Slump: Not to exceed 4”.

D. Mixing: Ready mixed concrete in accordance with ASTM C -94. Do not transport or use concrete after 1-1/2 hours have elapsed from time of initial mixing. Supplier of transit -mixed concrete shall have a plant of sufficient capacity, and adequate transportation facilities to assure continuous delivery at required rate, to provide continuous concrete placement throughout a pour.

E. Grout and Dry Pack: Non- Shrink, Non-Metallic: U.S. Grout Corp or equal. “Five Star Grout” ASTM C- 827, C-1107-02 Grades A, B and C, and C-1107-07, 5,000 PSI.

2.3 CURING MATERIALS

A. Water: Domestic Quality, clear and potable with no chemical content.

B. Sheet Material: ASTM C171. Moisture loss maximum .055 g/ cm sq. Color: White.

C. Curing Compounds: Ashford Formula™ Curecrete by Curecrete Distribution, Inc., Phone (800) 998- 5664, or equal.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect subgrade, forms, reinforcing steel, pipes, conduits, sleeves, hangers, anchors, inserts, and other work required to be built into concrete and report any discrepancies. Notify City at least five (5) working days in advance of scheduled placement.

B. Correct unsatisfactory work prior to placing concrete.

C. Remove rubbish from formwork immediately prior to placing concrete.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Placing Concrete:

1. Convey and place concrete allowing no separation of ingredients in accordance with ACI 304 and as specified below.

2. Maximum height of concrete free fall – five (5) feet.

3. Regulate rate of placement to maintain plasticity and flow into position.

4. Deposit concrete continuously until panel or section is completed.

5. Place concrete in horizontal layers 18" maximum thickness.

B. Consolidation:

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS 03 30 00-7

1. Use mechanical vibrating equipment for consolidation.

2. Vertically insert and remove hand-held vibrators at 18" O.C. for 10 to 15 seconds.

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete in forms.

4. Provide vibrators with minimum speed of 8000 RPM and with amplitude to consolidate effectively.

5. Thoroughly consolidate concrete and work around reinforcement, embedded items and into corners of forms. Thoroughly consolidate layers of concrete with previous layers.

C. Construction Joints:

1. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, each footing, wall, beam, and slab shall be considered as a single unit of operation and shall be monolithic in construction.

2. Where construction joints are unavoidable, locate joints at or near quarter points of spans where approved by Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer and/or shown on plan.

3. Saw Cut joints, Expansion Joints and Cold Joints as detailed in contract documents.

D. Expansion Joint Fillers:

1. Refer to Drawings for Expansion Joint locations and details.

2. Finish joint material flush with concrete surface.

E. Hot Weather Placement:

1. Prevent high temperature in fresh concrete during hot weather in accordance with ACI 305.

2. Use water reducing set retarding admixtures in such quantities as especially recommended by manufacturer to assure that concrete remains workable and lift lines will not be visible.

F. Flatwork:

1. Cast slabs -on-grade in alternate sections unless permanent forms are used. Wait 48 hours between all adjacent concrete castings.

2. Plane Surface Tolerance: Exterior- Class AX, 3/16” in 10’ with no ponding.

3. Maximum 1:500 slope from indicated plane at any point.

G. Finish:

1. Smooth Trowel finish to match approved Mock -Up finish. If the finish is not approved, the Contractor in charge of the specific scope of work shall remove and replace another sample for Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer’s approval.

2. After surface water disappears and floated surfaces have sufficiently hardened, steel trowe l then re-trowel the surface to a smooth and consistent finish.

3. After concrete has set enough to provide edge troweling, re- trowel edges to a smooth and

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

03 30 00-8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS
uniform finish.

H. Cracking:

1. Cracking from inadequate curing is not allowed. Sawcut joints and construction joints are shown on drawings. Contractor may, with review and approval by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer, recommend and detail other joints required to prevent cracking.

3.3 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, defective, or does not meet the requirements of this Section or conformance with ASTM F 2480 - Standard Guide for In-ground Skate Parks.

B. Protect concrete from damage; exclude traffic from paving for at least 28 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

C. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, wax, and other foreign material.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Minor variations in appearance of colored concrete, which are like natural variations in color and appearance o uncolored concrete, are acceptable but subject to approval by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer.

3.5 REJECTIONS

A. Major variations in the appearance of integral colored concrete compared to manufacturer’s sample chip shall be rejected by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer. The Contractor in charge of the specific scope of work shall remove and replace rejected work for the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer’s approval at no additional cost to the City.

B. Defects in the concrete including lack of uniformity, exhibits segregation honeycombing, or lamination, or which contains any dry patches, slugs, voids, or pockets shall be rejected by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer. The Contractor in charge of the specific scope of work shall remove and replace rejected work for the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer’s approval at no additional cost to the City.

C. Radial wall finishes shall consist of smooth, hard, uniform surface of smooth trowel with a level tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet when tested with a 10- foot steel straightedge placed on the surface horizontally and vertically. Grinding the surfaces will not be an acceptable means of achieving the intended radii and uniformity shall be approved by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer. If rejected, The Contractor in charge of the specific scope of work shall remove and replace rejected work for the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer’s approval at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.6 CLEAN UP

A. At completion of Work, remove concrete stains from adjacent work, including but not limited to dissimilar paving types, walls, columns, railing posts, light fixtures, plant materials, to satisfaction of the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer.

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

CONCRETE FINISHING FOR BIKE PARKS 03 33 51-1
SECTION 03 33 51

CONCRETE FINISHING FOR BIKE PARKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SPECIALTY SKATE PARK CONSTRUCTION

A. All work contained in this Section is considered Specialty Skate Park Construction. Only those Contractors that meet the minimum experience requirements contained in the Quality Assurance Section of this specification may perform this work as specified herein.

1.2 REGULATIONS

A. The work shall conform to requirements of the American Concrete Institute (ACI) and the local Building Code for concrete finishing, as supplemented and modified on drawings or herein.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The Concrete Finishing shall conform to the requirements of the following Reference Standards or as modified and supplemented hereinafter.

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, ACI 301

2. ACI Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting, ACI 306

3. ACI Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting, ACI 605

1.4 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Formwork for Bike Parks

B. Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcement Bike Parks

C. Section 03 30 00 – Cast in Place Concrete Bike Parks

D. Section 03 36 00 – Shotcrete Bike Parks

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Skate Parks are not considered standard concrete flatwork. Where indicated to be exposed, Skate Park concrete is architecturally finished concrete represented in the form of complex and unique shapes. Typical Skate Park features will incorporate concave and convex transitioning between surfaces which require the specified finishes to sculpturally blend along compound radius curves. It is critical that Skate Park concrete work be completed with a high level of precision for the skate facility to function properly and safely. Special care must be taken to provide the specified finished surfaces without gravel pockets, and other defects/defacements. The Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer shall inspect concrete after removal of forms and before concrete repair work begins.

Concrete that does not meet the minimum requirements of the specifications shall be rejected by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer and therefore removed and replaced in its entirety by the Contractor at their expense.

1.6 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATION STATEMENT / SUBMITTAL

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

03 33 51-2 CONCRETE FINISHING FOR BIKE PARKS
A. To be considered a qualified and responsible Bidder, the Bidder shall provide documentation establishing that the Bidder and/or subcontractor has satisfied the experience requirements listed below:

1. The Skate Park specialty contractor, or subcontractor must provide proof of three (3) public concrete skate park facilities with a minimum size of 10,000 square feet, in the last five (5) years.

Parks must be open and in good operating condition for at least one (1) year.

2. Installation of storm drainage systems in conjunction with Skate Park components.

3. Shaping of earthwork to specified radius.

4. Experience creating the following in facilities specifically intended for skateboarding: Cast in place concave and convex shaped concrete elements containing compound radius curves that must be precisely shaped to function as intended.

5. Experience in application of vertical and horizontal shotcrete work, including horizontal and vertical radius transitions that include compound radius curves and blends, formed concrete, grinding rails, and associated concrete reinforcement as needed.

6. The Contractor shall be skilled with the installation of steel coping edges, smooth flowing seamless transition areas, and smooth trowel concrete finish work.

7. Layout, fabrication, and construction of the steel coping.

8. Installation of concrete flatwork between bowled areas.

1.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect persons and adjacent materials and finishes from dust, dirt and other surface or physical damage during finishing operations, including materials driven by wind.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT APPLICABLE

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIRS

A. Immediately after the removal of forms inspect all surfaces for defects. Repair or patch defects only after defects are inspected by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer and then only with the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer’s permission. Do all cutting and repair within 48 hours after removal of forms; cure repairs same as new concrete.

3.2 FINISHES FOR FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough Form Finish

1. Provide for surface of walls and footings adjacent to grade or below grade. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form f acing material use with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.

B. Smooth Formed Finish

1. Provide a smooth formed finish on formed concrete surfaces exposed to view. This is an as -

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

CONCRETE FINISHING FOR BIKE PARKS 03 33 51-3
cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Remove fins and other projections completely and smoothed. Repair and patch honeycombs and defective areas as directed by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer. Tie holes shall not be filled.

C. Sacked Finish

1. On all inconsistent surfaces of the exposed concrete, provide a sacked finish by coating the concrete with sacking mortar. Sacking of patched or defective concrete surfaces may be required by the Resident Engineer/ Skate Park Designer for areas not otherwise already requiring this work.

2. Repair and patch tie holes, honeycombs and defective areas and trowel to smooth finish.

Remove fines and other projections completely.

3. Thoroughly wet surface to prevent absorption.

4. Coat the entire surface with sacking mortar as soon as surface of concrete approaches surface dryness.

5. Thoroughly and vigorously rub mortar over area with clean burlap pads to fill all voids.

6. While mortar is still plastic but partially set (so it cannot be pulled from voids), sack -rub surface with dry mix of sacking mortar (leave out water). There should be no discernible thickness of mortar on concrete surface, except in voids; all surfaces should be uniformly textured.

7. Immediately begin a continuous moist cure for 72 hours.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces

1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. Provide for face surface of walls adjacent to plaza, walks and stairs.

3.3 FINISHES FOR UNFORMED SURFACES

A. Screed all slabs, for whatever finishes, to true levels or slopes, work surfaces only to the degree required to produce the desired finish; do no finishing in areas where water has accumulated until they have been drained and excess moisture has dried. Carefully finish all joints and edges with proper tools, unless otherwise specified.

B. Rough Screed Finish

1. Consolidate, level, and screed all surfaces to obtain evenness and uniformity; remove all surplus concrete after consolidation by striking off with sawing motion against guide strips.

C. Float Finish

1. Apply float finish to monolithic slabs to receive trowel or other finishes. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating, using floats appropriate to the surface contours only, when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power driven floats or by hand floating if area is small

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

03 33 51-4 CONCRETE FINISHING FOR BIKE PARKS
or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains.

Cut down high spots and fill low spots immediately after leveling, re- float surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

D. Hard Trowel Finish

1. After floated surface is firm enough to receive steel trowels, trowel at least two complete passes, or until last stage before blackening. Leave no trowel marks discernible to the touch. Do not use excessive water, especially on last the pass.

E. Defective Work

1. Remove and replace when directed by the Resident Engineer/ Skate Park Designer, surfaces which show inferior finish quality.

3.4 CURING

A. Protect concrete surfaces against rapid drying. Apply Clear Spray -on cure agent after final finish is achieved. Keep sealed with cure agent for necessary amount of time to reach concrete strength and inhibit moisture loss after placing per manufacturer’s recommendation.

B. Duration of Curing

1. In addition to the initial overnight curing, continue final curing operations until the cumulative number of days or fractions thereof (not necessarily consecutive) occurs, during which time the temperature of the air in contact with the concrete is above 50 degrees F, equals 7 days. Curing period considered done when compressive strength is reached. If high-early strength concrete has been used, continue final curing operation for 3 days total time, calculated as before. Take care to prevent rapid drying at the end of the curing period. Early removal of forms will not be approved when forms are removed during the curing period.

3.5 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall notify Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer that they are starting concrete finish repair work at least five (5) working days prior to the beginning of work.

3.6 REJECTIONS

A. Major variations in the appearance of integral colored concrete compared to manufacturer’s sample chip shall be rejected by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer. The Contractor in charge of the specific scope of work shall remove and replace rejected work for the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer’s approval at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Defects in the concrete including lack of uniformity, exhibits segregation honeycombing, or lamination, or which contains any dry patches, slugs, voids, pockets or does not meet the radius requirements of the design shall be rejected by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer. The Contractor in charge of the specific scope of work shall remove and replace rejected work for the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer approval at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Radial wall finishes shall consist of smooth, hard, uniform surface of smooth trowel with a level tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet when tested with a 10- foot steel straightedge placed on the surface horizontally and vertically. Grinding the surfaces will not be an acceptable means of achieving the intended radii and uniformity shall be approved by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer. If rejected, The Contractor in charge of the specific scope of work shall remove and replace rejected

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

CONCRETE FINISHING FOR BIKE PARKS 03 33 51-5
work for the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer’s approval at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Leave premises clean and free of residue from work in this section.

3.8 PROTECTION AND SITE SECURITY FROM VANDALISM

A. It shall be the contactors responsibility to protect the site from theft and vandalism.

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

03 36 00-1 SHOTCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS
SECTION 03 36 00

SHOTCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide sprayed-on concrete (concrete conveyed into place by air pressure through a flexible tube or gun with controlled nozzle) referred to herein as shotcrete, complete as shown and as specified by Skate Park Contractor.

1. Provide sprayed-on concrete (concrete conveyed into place by air pressure through a flexible tube or gun with controlled nozzle) referred to herein as shotcrete, complete as shown and as specified.

2. Application, cutting, and sculpting and finish work related to this Work is deemed specialty work within the Contract Documents.

3. All work related to this application, cutting, sculpting, and installation shall be coordinated with the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer, prior to project start.

1.2 RELATED INFORMATION

A. Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Formwork for Bike Parks

B. Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing for Bike Parks

C. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete for Bike Parks

D. Section 03 33 51 – Concrete Finishing for Bike Parks

E. Section 03 37 00 – Concrete Curing for Bike Parks

F. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications for Bike Parks

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Comply with the requirements of the current edition of the following codes and standards, except as herein modified:

B. Latest Uniform Standard Specifications issued by the Owner.

C. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 506, Chapter 13, Wet Method. Chapter 5, Shotcrete Crew.

D. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit current product data and manufacturer’s instructions for proprietary materials including:

1. Color admixture

2. Expansion joint fill material

3. Curing compound

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

SHOTCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS 03 36 00-2

4. Dowel aligners / caps

5. Form facing materials

6. Form release agents

7. Proprietary cleaning agents

8. Plastic film for curing

9. Surface retarders

10. Micro-Fiber reinforcement

B. Shop Drawings

1. Section and plan views showing all proposed construction joints.

2. Contractor to submit shop drawings for all templates to be used on the project.

C. Design of Concrete Mixes

1. Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for design of concrete mixes for each type of concrete specified. Design of concrete mixes shall be performed by a Testing Laboratory selected by Contractor and approved by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer. Design methods to be in accordance with ACI 318.

2. Make three (3) trial mixes using aggregate proposed.

3. Check mix design and revise, if necessary, wherever changes are made in aggregate or in surface water content of aggregate or workability of concrete. Slump shall be the minimum to produce workable mix. Laboratory shall prescribe minimum quantity of water.

4. Forward two copies of design mix to the Owner and Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer for approval.

D. Placement / Pour Schedule

1. Contractor to indicate on plans the locations to be shot within a day’s work and not exceeding 50 cubic yards per day for quality control and inspection schedules.

2. Schedule and sequence to be reviewed and approved by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer prior to starting this work.

E. Shotcrete Samples / Mock-Ups

1. Provide representative samples of materials for material testing, mix proportion testing, and finish.

2. Sample of each of the following must be provided: Bowl section with 2” round steel coping and a standard bank with radius transition bottom. The shotcrete samples need to match the same height, radius, angle, curvature, finish, and reinforcement of the corresponding sections and details for inspection an approval. The sample may be part of the finished product and can remain in place as finished product if approved by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer.

If the sample is built in place it needs to follow the jointing outlined in the Concrete Jointing plan.

If the samples are built elsewhere on-site, they only need to be six feet (6’) wide with height and length corresponding to the sections.

3. Contractor shall prepare and pay for a sample for each paving type indicated on Drawings prior to installation.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

03 36 00-3 SHOTCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS

4. Samples shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer and shall include aggregates, texture, color, and finishes. If samples are rejected by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer, the Contractor in charge of the specific scope of work shall remove and replace the sample for the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer’s approval at no additional cost to the Owner.

5. These samples will become the standard of quality by which future paving samples and work will be judged.

6. Samples to remain on-site and be protected during construction, to compare work in progress.

If samples are damaged or removed, Contractor shall repair / replace in-kind immediately at no additional cost to the Owner.

F. Test Reports: Compressive strength of concrete test cylinders taken upon delivery of concrete.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Concrete Testing

1. Prepare samples by each application crew using the equipment, materials and mix proportions proposed for the Project. Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer shall observe preparation of test panels noting placement of shotcrete by applications crew.

2. Test panel shall be at least 6” x 18” x 18”. Test panel shall conform to Section 03 36 00 Shotcrete, Part 1.04 Submittals.

3. Secure and protect samples during construction and test for compliance with Specifications.

4. Test strength of the shotcrete as work progresses as follows:

a. Cut cores from the test panel and test in accordance with ASTM C42. b. One 6” x 18” x18” test panel every 50 cubic yards of accumulated shotcrete. A set of four 43) 2’ x 2’ x 6” cores taken from the test panel shall be taken and broken on days 7, 14, 21 and 28. shotcrete placed through the nozzle.
c. Cores shall be soaked in water for a minimum of 40 hours before testing.

B. Certification

1. Nozzleman certification shall be in accordance with ACI 506.3R.

C. Regulatory Requirements

1. Meet requirements of applicable laws, codes, and regulations required by authorities having jurisdiction over Work.

D. Acceptance

1. Final acceptance of the shotcrete will be done by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer and will based upon the results obtained from cores.

E. Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications

1. Manufacturer of ready -mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

SHOTCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS 03 36 00-4
F. Skate Park Contractor / Sub-Contractor Experience

1. Provide evidence to indicate successful experience in performing shotcrete concrete work for skate parks similar in scope to that specified herein and can demonstrate successful experience through past project documentation and references.

a. Required Experience

Skate Park Contractor or Sub- contractor must have completed three (3) public concrete skate park facilities with a minimum size of 10,000 square feet, in the last five (5) years.

Parks must be open and in good operating condition for at least one (1) year.

b. Evidence of Experience

Skate Park Contractor or Sub- contractor shall submit to Field Engineer Inspector satisfactory documentation of the experience and qualification. If a Contractor cannot provide this information or if it is unverifiable, work under this Section and any other related Section cannot be completed by Contractor. This submission must contain the Project Name & Location, Owner’s Name & Contact Information, Designer Name & Contact Information, Project Size, Contract Value, Completion Date, and Supervisor and/or Key Personnel responsible for this experience for each of the qualifying projects.

c. Safety and Performance Guidelines

Comply with all safety and performance requirements and all applicable references as specified in the ASTM F2480 Standard Guide for In-ground Skate Parks.

d. ACI Requirements

Meet all requirements of ACI 506, Chapter 13, Wet Method and Chapter 5, Shotcrete Crew.

1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE

A. Properly deliver and handle materials to prevent contamination, segregation, or damage to materials.

B. Store cement in weather tight enclosures to protect against dampness and contamination.

C. Prevent segregation and contamination of aggregates by proper arrangement and use of stockpiles.

D. Store admixtures properly to prevent contamination, evaporation, or other damage.

E. Do not change brand of cement or source of aggregate during course of Work.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II, one brand only.

B. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C only. The amount of fly ash used shall not exceed 20% by weight of the combined weight of fly ash and cement.

C. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33 and as herein specified.

1. Batch fine coarse aggregates separately to avoid segregation.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

03 36 00-5 SHOTCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS

2. Aggregates shall be free from clay, mud, loam, or other deleterious substances.

3. Dune sand, bank run sand, and manufactured sand are not acceptable for fine aggregate.

4. Coarse aggregate shall be clean, uncoated, heavy media processed aggregate of crushed stone or river washed aggregate.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Water: Fresh, clean, potable, and free of deleterious acids, mixing, and curing water, as available from Owner. Transport as required.

B. Admixtures: Use only accepted admixtures meeting the following requirements:

1. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C494

2. Air-entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260

C. Expansion Joints: See Cast-In-Place Concrete - Section 03 30 00.

D. Additive: Micro -Fiber reinforcement that is designed to mitigate plastic shrinkage cracking, to be approved by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer, in all concrete (dosage as recommended by the manufacturer).

2.3 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXES

A. Mix

1. Prepare design mix to achieve an in- place 28-day compressive strength of 4,000 pounds per square inch and an air content as specified on plans. Maximum aggregate size shall not exceed 3/8 inch. Unit weight of in- place shotcrete shall be 494 pounds per cubic yard. Contractor to pay for and use an independent Testing Agency acceptable to the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer to prepare and report the proposed mix design. Testing is at the cost of the Contractor responsible for this mix.

B. Test Data

1. Submit for acceptance proportioning and test data from prior experience if available. If data from prior experience are not available or accepted, make, and have tested specimens from three or more different mix proportions in accordance with pre-construction testing requirements of this Specification.

C. Strength

1. Selected mix proportions based on compressive strength tests of specimens shall be cut from the shotcrete test panels not earlier than five (5) days after shotcreting. For mix acceptance purposes, average core strengths shall be least equal to f'c for cores with L/D of 2.0. For cores with L/D between 1.0 and 2.0, use correction factors given in ASTM C42.

D. Review

1. Mix design shall be reviewed for acceptance by Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer.

2.4 CONCRETE APPLICATION EQUIPMENT

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

SHOTCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS 03 36 00-6
A. For Wet Mix Shotcrete

1. Mixing Equipment: Capable of thoroughly mixing aggregate, cement, and water in sufficient quantity to maintain continuous placement.

2. Ready-mixed Concrete: ASTM C94, except that it may be delivered to the site in the dry state if the equipment can add the water and mixing it satisfactorily with the dry ingredients.

3. Air Supply: Clean air adequate for maintaining sufficient nozzle velocity for parts of work, and for simultaneous operation of blow pipe for cleaning away rebound.

4. Delivery Equipment: Capable of discharging aggregate- cement-water mixture accurately, uniformly, and continuously through delivery hose.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examination

1. Examine concrete formwork and verify that it is true to line and dimension, adequately braced against vibration, and constructed to permit escape of air and rebound but to prevent mortar leakage during shotcreting. Correct deficiencies.

B. Inspection

1. Inspect reinforcement steel and items to be embedded in concrete. Correct any deviations from the accepted shop drawings.

C. Notification

1. Notify other trades involved in ample time to permit the proper installation of their work.

Cooperate in setting such work.

D. Existing Surfaces

1. Examine existing concrete surfaces for unsound material. Correct deficiencies.

3.2 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE

A. Forms

1. Use a form- coating material on removable forms to prevent absorption of moisture and to prevent absorption of moisture and to prevent bond with shotcrete.

3.3 CONCRETE BATCHING AND MIXING

A. Proportions

1. Mix proportions shall be controlled by weight batching. Contractor's Testing Laboratory shall maintain quality control records during shotcrete production and make those records available to the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer.

3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

03 36 00-7 SHOTCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS
A. Placement

1. Use suitable delivery equipment and procedures that will result in shotcrete in place meeting the requirements of this Specification. Determine operating procedures for placement in, extended distances, and around any obstructions where placement velocities and mix consistency must be adjusted.

B. Placement Techniques

1. Do not place shotcrete if drying or stiffening of the mix takes place at any time prior to delivery to the nozzle.

a. Control thickness, method of support, air pressure, and/or water content of shotcrete to preclude sagging or sloughing off. Discontinue shotcreting or provide suitable means to screen the nozzle stream if wind or air currents cause separation of the nozzle stream during placement.

b. Hold nozzle as perpendicular to surface as work will permit, to secure maximum compaction with minimum rebound.

c. In shotcreting walls, begin application at bottom. Ensure work does not sag.

d. Layering

1) Build up layers by making several passes of nozzle over work area.

2) Broom or scarify the surface of freshly placed shotcrete to which, after hardening, additional layers of shotcrete are to be bonded. Dampen surface just prior to application of succeeding layers.

3) Allow each layer of shotcrete to take initial set before applying succeeding layers.

4) Use radial templates to insure exact radii from flat bottom of skate park deck and coping. Template shall be fabricated from steel or ¾” plywood. Check every horizontal foot when applying shotcrete for conformance of intended wall radii. Brace template and place levels at arc to tangent connections to ensure no kinks will be formed. Kinks at the bottom of bowls will not be acceptable. Slumping of the shotcrete causing coping setback will not be acceptable.

e. Placement around Reinforcement

1) Hold the nozzle at such distance and angle to place materials behind reinforcement before any material can accumulate on its face. In the dry -mix process, additional water may be added to the mix when encasing reinforcement to facilitate a smooth flow of material behind the bars.

2) Test to ascertain if any void or sand pockets have developed around or behind reinforcement by probing with an awl or other pointed tool after the shotcrete has achieved its initial set, by removal of randomly selected bars, or coring or other suitable standards.

3.5 REMOVAL OF SURFACE DEFECTS IN CONCRETE

A. General

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

SHOTCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS 03 36 00-8

1. Remove and replace shotcrete which lacks uniformity, exhibits segregation, honeycombing, or lamination, or which contains any dry patches, slugs, voids, or pockets. Remove defective areas.

a. Sounding

1) Sound work with hammer for voids. Remove and replace damaged in- place shotcrete.

3.6 CONCRETE FINISH

A. Form Finish

1. Smooth form finish shall consist of a smooth, hard, uniform texture with a minimum of seams.

B. Unformed Finish / Radial Wall Finish

1. Float finish on unformed face of wall shall consist of a smooth, hard, uniform surface of smooth steel trowel. Level to a tolerance of 1/10 inch in 10 feet when tested with a 10- foot steel straightedge placed on the surface horizontally, and vertically wit h radial template with the appropriate radii. Grinding the surfaces will not be an acceptable means of achieving the intended radii. Concrete finish work shall match the approved sample poured on site.

3.7 CONCRETE JOINTS

A. Cleaning

B. The entire joint shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted prior to the application of additional shotcrete.

C. Reinforcement

D. Make joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across joints.

3.8 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Initial Curing

1. Immediately after finishing, keep shotcrete continuously moist for at least 24 hours. Use one of the following materials or methods:

a. Ponding or continuous sprinkling.
b. Cover and keep continuously wet.

B. Final Curing

1. Provide additional curing immediately following the initial curing and before the shotcrete has dried. Use one of the following materials or methods:

a. Continue the method used in initial curing.
b. Materials conforming to Specifications for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete, ASTM C 171.

C. Duration of Curing

1. Continue for the first 7 days after shotcreting or until specified strength is obtained. During the

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

03 36 00-9 SHOTCRETE FOR BIKE PARKS
curing period, maintain shotcrete above 40 degrees and in a moist condition. Prevent rapid drying at the end of the curing period.

3.9 REJECTIONS

A. Major variations in the appearance of integral colored concrete compared to manufacturer’s sample chip shall be rejected by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer. The Contractor in charge of the specific scope of work shall remove and replace rejected work for the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer’s approval at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Defects in the shotcrete including lack of uniformity, exhibits segregation honeycombing, or lamination, or which contains any dry patches, slugs, voids, or pockets shall be rejected by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer. The Contractor in charge of the specific scope of work shall remove and replace rejected work for the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer’s approval at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Radial wall finishes shall consist of smooth, hard, uniform surface of smooth trowel with a level tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet when tested with a 10- foot steel straightedge placed on the surface horizontally and vertically. Grinding the surfaces will not be an acceptable means of achieving the intended radii and uniformity shall be approved by the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer. If rejected, The Contractor in charge of the specific scope of work shall remove and replace rejected work for the Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer’s approval at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.10 CLEAN UP

A. At completion of Work, remove concrete stains from adjacent work, including but not limited to dissimilar paving types, walls, columns, railing posts, light fixtures, plant materials, to satisfaction of Resident Engineer / Skate Park Designer.

B. Efflorescence: Remove efflorescence (as soon as practical after it appears) as part of final cleaning.

C. Use least aggressive cleaning techniques possible.

D. Wear protective eye wear, gloves, and clothing suitable to work and as required by cleaner manufacturer.

E. If proprietary cleaning agents are used, pre- wet wall, test cleaning agent on a small, inconspicuous area, and check effects prior to proceeding. Begin cleaning at the top and work down. Thoroughly rinse wall afterwards with clean water. Follow cleaner manufacturer's instructions.

F. Do not use muriatic (hydrochloric) acid on colored concrete.

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

CONCRETE CURING FOR BIKE PARKS 03 37 00-1
SECTION 03 37 00

CONCRETE CURING FOR BIKE PARKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide curing material for cast-in-place concrete flatwork, and shotcrete walls (radial and angled).

1.2 RELATED INFORMATION

A. Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Forming and Accessories
B. Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing
C. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
D. Section 03 36 00 – Shotcrete

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit samples and detailed technical data of products proposed for curing use for Owner’s approval.

B. Submit certification that materials meet specification requirements.

1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials in original sealed containers with seal and labels intact. Store in a dry place. Use materials out of original containers only.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Evercrete DPS™ Deep Penetrating Sealer, manufactured by Evercrete Group, or approved non- toxic, odorless, clear, water-soluble liquid compound equivalent.

B. Curing Agent: ASTM C 309, non-staining, water, or soy based, low or no Volatile Organic compound emitting, compatible with color admixture.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 CURING

A. Protect concrete surfaces against rapid drying. Keep moist for necessary amount of time to reach concrete strength and inhibit moisture loss after placing.

B. Curing Method: Spread curing paper over surfaces, lapping ends, and sides a minimum of 4”, and maintain in place by use of suitable weights for necessary duration, then remove.

3.2 CLEANUP

A. Remove debris and trash resulting from specified work.

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

05 50 00-1 METAL FABRICATIONS FOR BIKE PARKS
SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS FOR BIKE PARKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Provide labor, materials, and equipment for the installation of Metal Work as shown on the drawings and as specified.

1.2 RELATED INFORMATION

A. Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Formwork for Bike Parks

B. Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing for Bike Parks

C. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete for Bike Parks

D. Section 03 36 00 – Shotcrete for Bike Parks

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications of Fabricators: Experienced in fabrication of miscellaneous metals.

B. Qualifications of Welders: Welding shall be done only by certified welding operators currently qualified according to AWS D1.1.

C. Qualifications of Workmen: Provide at least one person who shall be always present during execution of this portion of the Work, and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed, the referenced standards, the requirements of this Work, and who shall direct all work performed under this Section. Welds indicated may be made in shop or field with approval.

D. Reference Standards:

1. Steel: Meet requirements of AISC "Specifications of Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel," latest edition.

2. Welding: Meet requirements of AWS "Structural Welding Code," D1.1, latest edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings for all custom fabricated items under this section. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners an d accessories.

Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols.

2. Verification: Verify all measurements at the job. Show dimensions, sizes, thicknesses, gauges, finishes, joining, attachments, and relationship of work to adjoining construct ion. Where items must fit and coordinate with finished surfaces and/or constructed spaces, take measurements at site and not from drawings.

3. Coordination: Coordinate with work of Cast -In-Place Concrete Section 03 30 00 and Section

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

METAL FABRICATIONS FOR BIKE PARKS 05 50 00-2
03 36 00 - Shotcrete.

B. Samples

1. Required for all Coping and Edging of concrete work. Submit finish metal samples for final finish selection. Submit prior to delivery to site. Attach name, address of manufacturer and/or supplier to each sample.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Coordination

1. Coordinate with work of Cast -In-Place Concrete Section 03 30 00 and Section 03 36 00 - Shotcrete.

B. Storage of Materials

1. Materials which are stored at the project site shall be above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports. Protect steel from corrosion. Store other materials in a weather -tight and dry place until ready for use.

C. Protection

1. Use all means necessary to protect miscellaneous metals before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.

2. Protect any adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld splatter or sparks during field welding.

D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of and at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Examine existing conditions in which the work is to be installed. Notify Owner if conditions are unacceptable to begin work.

B. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Templates and Built -ins: Furnish all anchors, fastenings, sleeves, setting templates and layouts affecting or installed in the work of other trades.

B. Delivery: Where items must be incorporated or built into adjacent work, deliver to trade responsible for such work in sufficient time that progress of work is not delayed. Be responsible for proper location of such items.

1.8 JOB SITE SAMPLE

A. Contractor to provide fabricated, on site sample of metal item(s), complete with approved finish, for review by Owner before fabrication of total quantities. Any fabrication of project item(s) by Contractor before Owner review and approval is strictly at his own risk and expense.

B. Approved sample(s) shall be used as the standard of workmanship and shall remain on site until

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

05 50 00-3 METAL FABRICATIONS FOR BIKE PARKS
work has been completed and approved by the Owner.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. 2” ROUND STEEL PIPE COPING - O.D. 2.375, Thickness .154: ASTM A -53, Type E or S (Fy=35 ksi), Grade B or A-501 (Fy=36 ksi).

B. 2” ROUND STEEL TUBING- O.D. 2.375 Thickness .154: ASTM A-53, Type E or S (Fy=35 ksi), Grade B or A-501 (Fy=36 ksi).

C. 2”x6” RECTANGULAR STEEL TUBING - Thickness .188: ASTM A -53, Type E or S (Fy=35 ksi), Grade B or A-501 (Fy=36 ksi).

D. 6”X1/4”X1-7/8” STEEL C6 C -CHANNEL- Thickness .188: ASTM A -53, Type E or S (Fy=35 ksi), Grade B or A-501 (Fy=36 ksi).

E. WELDING RODS: E-70 series low hydrogen unless otherwise noted on drawings.

2.2 GROUT

A. Embeco ® 636 Plus Grout Non- Shrink Mortar Metallic -Aggregate Grout by Degussa Building Systems, Phone (800) 433-9517; Ferrolith ® G Redi-Mix Grout by Sonneborn Building Products.

2.3 OTHER MATERIALS

A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of miscellaneous metals, shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds and subject to the approval of the Owner.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Inspection

1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades, and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

B. Discrepancies

1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owner.

3.2 COORDINATION

A. General: Carefully coordinate with all other trades to insure proper and adequate interface of the work of other trades with the work of this Section.

B. Delivery: Ensure timely delivery of all metal fabrications which must be installed in other work so as not to delay that work.

3.3 INSTALLATION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

METAL FABRICATIONS FOR BIKE PARKS 05 50 00-4
A. General

1. Install metal fabrications in strict accordance with the Drawings, the approved Shop Drawings, and all pertinent codes, regulations, and standards.

2. Obtain Owner’s review prior to site cutting or adjusting which are not part of scheduled work.

3. Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion or defects.

4. Align all metal fabrications as shown on the Drawings, and where vertical or horizontal members are shown, align them straight, plumb and level within a tolerance of one in 500.

5. Make provisions for erection stresses by temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment.

6. Replace items damaged in course of installation.

7. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.

8. After installation, grind, and touch-up field welds.

3.4 WORKMANSHIP

A. Layout

1. Set all work plumb, true, rigid, and neatly trimmed out. Miter corners and angles of exposed molding and frames unless otherwise noted.

B. Fitting

1. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints.

C. Labor

1. Employ only workmen specifically skilled in such work.

3.5 FABRICATION

A. Shop assembles in largest practicable dimensions, making members true to length so assembling may be done without fillers.

B. Provide all surfaces free of file marks, dents, hammer marks, wire edges or any unsightly surface defects.

C. Steel Pipe Coping

1. Roll pipe to conform to top radius curve of each bowl and ledge as shown on drawings. Refer to drawings for relational tolerance to concrete surface and other steel.

3.6 ATTACHMENTS AND REINFORCEMENTS

A. Do all cutting, shearing, drilling, punching, threading, tapping, etc., required for site metalwork or for attachment of adjacent work. If applicable, drill or punch holes; do not use cutting torch.

3.7 OTHER CONNECTORS

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

05 50 00-5 METAL FABRICATIONS FOR BIKE PARKS
A. Make all permanent connections in ferrous metal surfaces using welds where at all possible; do not use bolts or screws.

3.8 WELDING

A. Preparation

1. Remove all rust, paint, scale, and other foreign matter. Wire brush all flame- cut edges. Clamp members as required and alternate welds, all as necessary to prevent warping or misalignment.

B. Exposed Welds

1. Uniformly grind smooth (no tolerance) all welds normally exposed to view and feel in the finished work.

C. Faulty and Defective Welding

1. Chip out and replace all welding showing cracks, slag inclusion, lack of fusion, bad undercut or other defects ascertained by visual or other means of inspection. Replace and re-weld at no cost to Owner.

D. Field Welding

1. Procedure

a. Comply with AWS code of manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work.

2. Protection

a. Protect all adjacent surfaces from damage due to weld sparks, spatter, or tramp metal.

3.9 SURFACE TREATMENT AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS

A. Cleaning

1. Thoroughly clean all mill scale, rust, dirt, grease, and other foreign matter from ferrous metal prior to any galvanizing and painting.

2. Conditions which are too severe to be removed by hand cleaning, shall be cleaned using appropriate methods for solvent cleaning, power tool cleaning and brush-off blast cleaning.

B. Exterior Ferrous Metal

1. Grind smooth all welds, burrs, and rough surfaces. Clean and hot - phosphate treat completed assembly. Hot phosphate treatment not required on items which are not exposed in the finish work or on those items where size prohibits such treatment.

2. For CNC fabricated metal components, provide Cold Galvanized treatment with finish to match the plans & drawings.

3. Hot Dip Galvanize or provide Pre- Galvanized material for all straight pieces of pipe, tubing, c - channel, fabricated assemblies and ferrous metal items.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

METAL FABRICATIONS FOR BIKE PARKS 05 50 00-6

4. Hot Dipped products should be of reasonable size as to facilitate shipping as required. Typical maximum length up to 20feet. Joints between Hot Dipped products shall be welded on site, cleaned, and treated with Cold Galvanizing paint to match finish and sheen of Hot Dipped product.

5. Indicate on Shop Drawings where treatment is proposed to be omitted, if any.

3.10 CLEAN-UP

A. Keep all areas of work clean, neat, and orderly always. Keep paved areas clean during installation.

B. Clean up and remove all debris from the entire work area prior to Final Acceptance to standards of Owner.

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

09 90 00-1 PAINTING (METAL FABRICATIONS) FOR BIKE PARKS SECTION 09 90 00

PAINTING (METAL FABRICATIONS) FOR BIKE PARKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. Requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to, the General, Special, and Technical Provisions, apply to work in this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish materials, labor, transportation, services, and equipment necessary to install all Painting for the Skate Park as indicated on scope of work contract and shown on drawings and as specified herein.

B. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of miscellaneous exposed exterior items and surfaces.

C. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, Contractor or Skate Par k Designer shall select from standard colors and finishes available.

1. Painting includes field painting of exposed galvanized steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Contractor to prime metal surfaces only if specified on plans.

D. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.

1. Finished metal surfaces include the following if used:

a. Stainless steel.
b. Bronze and brass.
c. Iron

2. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code- required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

E. Related Work

1. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Comply with the applicable reference specifications as specified in the GENERAL PROVISIONS and in accordance with applicable laws, codes and regulations required by the City or County. Comply with the current provisions of the following Codes and Standards.

1. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

PAINTING (METAL FABRICATIONS) FOR BIKE PARKS 09 90 00-2

2. IBC – International Building Code

3. SSPC – Society for Protective Coatings: “Steel Structures Painting Manual,” latest edition.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.

1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85- degree meter.

2. Eggshell refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60- degree meter.

4. Semi-gloss refers to medium- sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60- degree meter.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers.

1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use.

3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated.

1. After color selection, Contractor will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.

C. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.

1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.

2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application.

3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for Skate Park Designer review of color and texture only:

a. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4- inch-square samples of flat metal and two 8- inch- long samples of solid metal for each color and finish.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

09 90 00-3 PAINTING (METAL FABRICATIONS) FOR BIKE PARKS A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced Applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material.

2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).

3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.

4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.

5. Thinning instructions.

6. Application instructions.

7. Color name and number.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

C. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C).

C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in the paint schedules.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Material Compatibility: Provide fillers and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another, and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying the manufacturer’s product identification will not be acceptable.

1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

PAINTING (METAL FABRICATIONS) FOR BIKE PARKS 09 90 00-4 materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

C. Colors: Provide color selections made by Skate Park Designer.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements.

1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.

2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within an area.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.

B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.

1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer’s written instructions for each substrate condition and as specified.

1. If specified, provide barrier coats over incompatible primer, or remove and re-prime.

2. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.

a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Coun cil's (SSPC) recommendations.

a. if applicable, touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.

Wire- brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

09 90 00-5 PAINTING (METAL FABRICATIONS) FOR BIKE PARKS D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.

2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.

3. If specified, provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.

4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, covers, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.

5. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.

2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been galvanized or shop primed and touch-up painted.

3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Allow enough time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

PAINTING (METAL FABRICATIONS) FOR BIKE PARKS 09 90 00-6

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted.

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high- pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.

3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.

D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Fillers: Apply fillers at a rate to ensure complete coverage of pores filled.

F. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

G. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site.

B. After completing painting, clean paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, or replacing, and repainting, as approved by City or County and/or Contractor.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.

1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal.

1. Semigloss, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust -inhibitive primer, if specified on plans.

a. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic -latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm).
1) Sherwin Williams: Acrolon 218 HS Acrylic Polyurethane

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

09 97 26-1 CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS FOR BIKE PARKS
SECTION 09 97 26

CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS FOR BIKE PARKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Under these items, the Contractor shall apply a color seal coat system and painted lines to the asphaltic pavements in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and at the direction of the Engineer.

1. Tennis court and basketball court layouts shall conform to the Drawings as indicated.

2. Each tennis court and basketball court color seal coat system applied and accepted shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and incidental expenses necessary to complete the work, including preparation of surfaces, patching mix, resurfacer coats, intermediate coats, wearing coats and painted lines, in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

3. Painted tennis court lines and basketball court lines applied and accepted shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and incidental expenses necessary to complete the work, including preparation of the surface and the application of painted court lines and numbers, in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 32 12 16 – Asphalt Paving for Bike Parks

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit complete details of the color seal coat system proposed to be used for approval. The specifications and information (products or systems, manufacturer's names, product description, technical and laboratory data, mixing information, methods of applic ation, rates, and all other data) as may be required to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the color seal coat system proposed for use meets the requirements of these specifications.

B. Submit three (3) color paint chips/samples for each color paint required for approval. Final color selection shall be made by the Engineer after review with the Owner.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All materials shall be manufactured by a nationally recognized producer of these products and installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s current printed recommendations.

B. Include on Label and all Containers:

1. Manufacturer’s name

2. Type of coating

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS FOR BIKE PARKS 09 97 26-2

3. Manufacturer’s stock number

4. Color (if applicable)

5. Instructions for reducing (where applicable)

6. Applicable Federal specification number

C. The contractor shall furnish a technical advisor, who shall be fully knowledgeable of all equipment operations and application and cleaning techniques, to oversee painting and color seal coat operations.

D. Regulatory Requirements

1. All paint coatings shall be certified lead- free and comply with current State and Federal VOC regulations/restrictions.

2. All paint coatings in public and fire protected areas shall have a Flame Spread Classification in compliance with State Building Codes and/or Regulations.

1.6 USE OF PREMISES

A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine paint operations to areas indicated on the Drawing for color seal coat system, and court lines.

2. Access to Site: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of access routes. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

1.7 PAINT SUBSTITUTION

A. A written request for paint substitution, along with manufacturer’s data sheets shall be submitted for approval a minimum of two (2) weeks prior to the intended date of paint application. All paint substitutions must be approved in writing prior to ordering and delivery.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.

B. Store materials at temperatures between 45 and 90 degrees Fahrenheit in a well-ventilated area, out of direct sunlight. Protect from freezing.

C. Comply with health and fire regulations.

D. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.

E. Comply with manufacturer’s current specifications.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 COLOR SEAL COAT SYSTEM

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

09 97 26-3 CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS FOR BIKE PARKS
A. Materials: The color seal coat system consists of multiple resurfacer coats, two (2) intermediate coats and two (2) wearing coats. Patching mix shall be installed as necessary and as described under Item

3.02D.

B. Patching Mix: (also known as Leveling Mixture) The patching mix shall be combined in the following proportions:

-2 gal. Silica Sand

-2 gal. Asphaltic Emulsion Resurfacer (non-asbestos) - undiluted - -1/2 gal. Asphaltic Emulsion Tack Coat - undiluted or

-“Acrylic Patch Binder 920-39" as manufactured by California Products Corp

C. Resurfacer Coats (also known as Filler Coat)

1. Resurfacer coats shall consist of a mixture of black fibrated asphalt emulsion resurfacer and No. 40- 60 mesh Silica sand. The resurfacer shall be "Acrylic Resurfacer 920- 29" as manufactured by California Products Corp.; "Laykold Resurfacer" as manufactured by Advanced Polymer Technology; or approved equal.

2. The sand shall be mixed with the resurfacer at the rate of 600 pounds of sand to 55 gallons of undiluted resurfacer, or at such other rate as the manufacturer shall require to meet job conditions. Water shall be added per manufacturer's specifications.

D. Intermediate Coats

1. The intermediate coats shall be full color acrylic filler coatings consisting of colored acrylic latex emulsion compounded with Silica sand. The intermediate coats shall be "DecoColor Plus with sand 920- 37" as manufactured by California Products Corp.; Laykold "Cushioncoat" as manufactured by Advanced Polymer Technology; or approved equal.

2. Sand shall be No. 80-100 mesh Silica sand. Sand and water shall be added per manufacturer’s specifications.

E. Wearing Coats

1. The wearing coats shall be full color acrylic latex emulsion. The wearing coats shall be either "Plexicrome Acrylic Finish Coat" or "DecoColor MP 920- 27" as manufactured by California Products Corp.; "Laykold Colorcoat" as manufactured by Advanced Polymer Technology; or approved equal.

a. Water shall be added per manufacturer's specifications.

F. Colors: Colors for intermediate and wearing coats shall be standard "tan" and a “blue” as selected and approved by Owner and Engineer.

2.2 PAINTED COURT LINES ON COLOR SEAL COAT

A. Line paint to be installed on the color seal coat shall be equal to Fed. Spec. TT-P19a. The paint shall be a 100% acrylic emulsion. The line paint shall be thinned with water only. The paint shall be suitable for application by brush, spray, or roller.

B. The paint shall be equal to:

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS FOR BIKE PARKS 09 97 26-4

1. "Striping Paint 920- 22" as manufactured by California Products Corporation, Cambridge, MA, Phone: (800) 225-1141.

2. Laykold Line Paint as manufactured by Advanced Polymer Technology, Phone: (724) 452-1330

3. Or approved equal.

C. Line color shall be white.

2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS:

A. Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finish specified shall be of commercial quality.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Applicators shall be approved and authorized by the respective product manufacturers.

B. Field Samples: The initial application area of each coating system color shall be prepared for the Engineer’s approval of color, texture, and workmanship. Do not proceed with subsequent areas until initial application is approved.

C. Thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report in writing any condition that may potentially affect proper application. Do not commence work until such defects have been corrected. Beginning of finish installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

D. Prepare all surfaces in accordance with product/coating manufacturer’s recommendations and the requirements in this Specification.

E. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by the work of this Section.

F. Provide drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or drippings from disfiguring other surfaces.

G. Do not apply finishes in areas where dust is being generated.

H. No painting shall be done when the temperature is below 55° Fahrenheit or if rain is expected within 24 hours. Painting shall also conform to the Dew Point Chart as indicated below.

I. Dew Point: Temperature at which moisture will condense on surface. No coatings should be applied unless surface temperature is a minimum of 5 degrees Fahrenheit above the dew point. Temperature must be maintained during curing. To calculate the proper surface temperature, use the chart below as follows:

Example: If air temperature is 70 degrees Fahrenheit and relative humidity is 65%, the dew point is 57 degrees Fahrenheit. No coating should be applied unless the surface temperature is 62 degrees Fahrenheit minimum.

The following chart shall serve as a guide in finding the minimum allowable temperature for paint application under the various items of this contract.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

09 97 26-5 CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS FOR BIKE PARKS

PERCENT RELATIVE HUMIDITY

DEW POINT CHART (FAHRENHEIT)

AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE IN DEGREES F

20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
90 18 28 37 47 57 67 77 87 97 107
85 17 26 36 45 55 65 75 84 95 104
80 16 25 34 44 54 63 73 82 93 102
75 15 24 33 42 52 62 71 80 91 100
70 13 22 31 40 50 60 68 78 88 96
65 12 20 29 38 47 57 66 76 85 93
60 11 19 27 36 45 55 64 73 83 92
55 9 14 25 34 43 53 61 70 80 89
50 6 15 23 31 40 50 59 67 77 86
45 4 13 21 29 37 47 56 64 73 82
40 1 11 18 26 35 43 52 61 69 78
35 -2 8 16 23 31 40 48 57 65 74
30 -6 4 13 20 28 36 44 52 61 69

3.2 COLOR SEAL COAT SYSTEM

A. Restrictions

1. Before the color seal coat system is applied, the asphaltic surface to receive the system shall have cured for a minimum of thirty (30) days.

2. The surface temperature shall be taken using a surface thermometer. The Contractor shall take readings every sixty (60) feet in all directions. If the average surface temperature is below fifty- five degrees Fahrenheit (55° F.) application will not be permitted. If the average surface temperature is above eighty degrees Fahrenheit (80° F.), the surface shall be waterfogged before application will be permitted.

B. Surface Cleaning and Preparation

1. The surface shall be cleaned of all dirt, loose sand, and stone. The Contractor shall power wash the surface clean to the satisfaction of the Engineer prior to applying the color seal coat system.

2. Before application of each coat, the surface shall be blown free of all dirt and foreign matter and shall be free from standing water and oils.

C. Application of Materials

1. All painted areas of color seal coat shall be carefully laid out as indicated on the Drawings and defined on the surface by chalk markings before being painted.

2. All materials shall be mixed at the site unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. If the Contractor is granted permission to mix any material off the site he shall arrange with the Engineer to have a representative of the Engineer present during the mixing operations. The mixed materials shall be homogeneous, segregation before or during application will not be permitted.

3. All materials shall be applied by approved hand or mechanical squeegees. Each completed application shall be smooth, even textured, and free from ridges, valleys, and tool marks.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS FOR BIKE PARKS 09 97 26-6

4. All painting shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Precautions shall be taken to prevent tracking by tires of the Contractors equipment and/or tracking by workers. Containers and brushes shall be protected in warm weather, to prevent damage to paint and brushes.

5. After application of each coat, the paint shall be protected from tires of the Contractor’s equipment and/or tracking by workers for a time at least equivalent to the drying time of the paint.

D. Resurfacer Coats (also known as Filler Coats)

1. The purpose of the resurfacer coats is to fill the surface voids of the asphalt pavement. To this end the resurfacer coat material shall be applied in multiple coats until the surface of the asphalt is free of voids and no telegraphing of the aggregate in the asphalt is visible. A minimum of two coats shall be applied. However, the Contractor shall apply as many additional coats as may be required to fulfill the above requirements. The resurfacer may be diluted with water in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications to obtain workability.

2. The application of the resurfacing coat shall be parallel in one direction of the courts; a second application may be made at ninety (90) degrees to the first coat.

3. Prior to the application of the resurfacer coats, the entire area shall be flooded with water and allowed to drain. Any areas holding over one-sixteenth inch (1/16") (thickness of a nickel) depth of water shall be leveled with a PATCHING MIX and allowed to thoroughly cure. Patching mix shall be applied in a maximum of (1/4") one- q uarter inch lifts. A maximum of (1/2") one- half inch total patch (2 lifts) shall be allowed. This process of water flooding and leveling shall be repeated until all depressions over one-sixteenth inch (1/16") have been eliminated.

E. Intermediate Coats

1. Two intermediate coats shall be applied. The total amount of material to be applied shall be 0.10 to 0.16 gallons per square yard based on the material prior to any dilution. The acrylic resurfacer may be diluted as recommended by the manufacturer to obtain workability.

F. Wearing Coats

1. Two wearing coats shall be applied perpendicular to each other. The total amount of material to be applied shall be 0.18 to 0.30 gallons per square yard prior to any dilution. The material may be diluted as recommended by the manufacturer to obtain workability.

2. Sand shall not be added to the wearing coats.

3.3 PAINTED COURT LINES OVER COLOR SEAL COAT

A. Surface Cleaning and Preparation

1. The surface shall be cleaned of all dirt, loose sand, and stone. The Contractor shall power wash the surface clean to the satisfaction of the Engineer prior to applying the line paint over color seal coat.

2. Before application of each coat of line paint, the surface shall be blown free of all dirt and foreign matter and shall be free from standing water and oils.

B. Paint Application

1. All painted lines shall be carefully laid out as indicated on the Drawings and defined on the

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

09 97 26-7 CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS FOR BIKE PARKS
surface by chalk markings before being painted. Line widths and dimensions shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Two (2) coats of line paint shall be applied. At least two (2) hours shall elapse between the painting of the first and second coats. All painted lines shall be accurately painted within the limits shown on the plans. Lines shall be clear and distinct with sharply defined edges.

3.4 INSPECTION

A. Each coat is subject to inspection. Do not apply additional coats until completed coat has been approved by the Engineer.

B. Only inspected coats of paint will be considered in determining number of coats applied.

C. Guarantee Inspection: At the guarantee inspection if the color seal coat is found to be peeling or fading due to improper installation the contractor shall be responsible to re-apply at his own expense.

D. Refinish entire section where portion of finish has been damaged or is not acceptable.

3.5 TOUCH-UP PAINTING

A. All touch up painting must be identical in color and finish to the originally prepared field- applied finish. Apply in strict accordance with paint manufacturer’s recommendations and these specifications.

3.6 PROTECTION/CLEAN-UP

A. Protect work completed until acceptance of project. Repair or touch- up color seal coat and/or court lines if defaced or damaged prior to acceptance.

B. As work proceeds, maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris related to this work. Repair damage to other areas as a result of painting and color seal coat operations.

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

EARTHWORK FOR BIKE PARKS 31 00 00-1
SECTION 31 00 00

EARTHWORK FOR BIKE PARKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. Requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to, the General, Special, and Technical Provisions, apply to work in this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein.

B. Soils Report: The recommendations within the project’s soils report shall be incorporated into this specification. In the event of a conflict between the Geotechnical Report and these specifications and the project plans, immediately consult the project’s Civil Engineer or Project Manager. To prepare an accurate bid, it is suggested that bidders and their geotechnical consultant perform an independent evaluation of the subsurface conditions in the project areas. The independent evaluations may include, but not be limited to, review of other Geotechnical Reports prepared for the adjacent areas, site reconnaissance, and additional exploration and laboratory testing.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish materials, labor, transportation, services, and equipment necessary to perform all earthwork operations related to the Skate Park as indicated on the Drawings complete as shown and as specified herein.

B. The work of this Section includes all earthwork required for construction of the work. Such earthwork shall include, but not be limited to, the loosening, removing, loading, transporting, depositing, and compacting in its final location of all materials wet and dry, as required for the purposes of completing the work specified in the Contract Documents, which shall include, but not be limited to, the furnishing, placing, and removing of sheeting and bracing if necessary to safely support the sides of all excavation; all pumping, ditching, draining, dewatering, and other required measures for the removal or exclusion of water from the excavation; the supporting of structures above and below the ground; all backfilling around structures and all backfilling of trenches and pits; the disposal of excess excavated materials; alluvial removals, selective grading of expansive soils, soil importing, borrow of materials to make up deficiencies for fills, and all other incidental earthwork, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. Related Work

1. Section 31 23 13 – Sub-Grade Preparation for Bike Parks

1.3 REFERENCES

A. with the applicable reference specifications as specified in the General Provisions. Comply with the applicable reference specifications as specified in the GENERAL PROVISIONS and in accordance with applicable laws, codes and regulations required by the Owner’s Representative. Work shall comply with the rules and regulations of local, state, and federal agencies having jurisdiction.

Nothing contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to such rules, regulations, and codes.

B. Comply with the current provisions of the following Codes and Standards

1. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

31 00 00-2 EARTHWORK FOR BIKE PARKS

2. Standard Specifications (as specified in the General Provisions)

3. Latest Uniform Standards issued by the City or County.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals, including samples of materials, shall be in accordance with the GENERAL PROVISIONS.

B. Samples: Submit a one-half cubic foot sample of proposed import soils (if required) per the project’s soil report for Owner's Representative's review and approval, identify location and source of import soil.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: All soils testing and inspection during earthwork operations, other than agricultural suitability and chemical analysis of proposed soils, will be done by a testing laboratory of the ENGINEER’s choice at the contractor’s expense except as specifie d in Paragraph 1.5.C below. Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling the tests and inspections and all tests performed on project soil will be given to the Owner’s Representative for review.

B. Where soil material is required to be compacted to a percentage of maximum dry density, the maximum dry density at optimum moisture content will be determined in accordance with the latest version of ASTM D 1557. In-place field density tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556, (sand cone) and/or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 (nuclear gauge). The number and location of field density tests will be determined by the ENGINEER.

C. In case the tests of the fill or backfill show non -compliance with the required density, the CONTRACTOR shall accomplish such remedy as may be required to ensure compliance.

Subsequent testing to show compliance shall be by a testing laboratory selected by the ENGINEER and shall be at the CONTRACTOR’s expense. All imported fill material not specified in the contract shall be tested at the CONTRACTOR’s expense and approved by the ENGINEER.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions: The existing topographic conditions are shown on the drawings for reference only. Upon beginning the earthwork, Contractor represents that he has inspected the site and satisfied himself as to actual grades and levels and the true conditions under which the work is to be performed. Promptly notify the Owner’s Representative of unexpected subsurface conditions. The Contractor is required to submit a "Site Acceptance" letter before earthwork operations begin.

B. Soil Classification: Excavated materials are not classified as to type.

1.7 PROTECTION

A. Protection

1. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheeting, underpinning, or other methods, as required to prevent cave- ins or loose dirt from entering excavations. Barricade open excavations and post warning lights at work adjacent to public streets and walks.

2. Cover holes and trenches when work is not in progress. Fence or barricade changes of plane more than 45 degrees horizontally and more than 3 feet vertically.

3. Maintain benchmarks, monuments, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

EARTHWORK FOR BIKE PARKS 31 00 00-3

4. Protect existing berms and slopes from disruption. If slopes are disturbed, return to existing conditions at no additional cost to the Owner.

5. Underpin adjacent structure(s), including utility service lines, which may be damaged by excavation operations.

6. Protect existing natural areas and landscape improvements from damage.

7. Promptly repair damage to adjacent facilities caused by earthwork operations. Cost of repair at Contractor's expense.

PART 2 – MATERIALS

2.1 SUITABLE FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIAL REQUIREMENT

A. General: Fill, backfill, and embankment materials shall be suitable selected or processed clean, fine earth, rock, or sand, and free from grass, roots, brush, or other vegetation; contamination; or deleterious material. The size, gradation, and properties of the materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Soil Report and these specifications.

B. Suitable materials may be obtained from onsite excavations, may be processed onsite materials, or may be imported provided these materials meet all the requirements in the Contract Documents. If imported materials are required to meet the requirements of this Section or to meet the quantity requirements of the project, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the imported fill materials and the required conformance reports of test results at no additional expense to the AGENCY, unless a unit price item is included for imported materials (including the appropriate required testing reports) in the bidding schedule.

2.2 FILL FOR MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE WORK

A. General Landscape Construction

1. Mound Construction: Fill material like existing on-site soil with all rocks, etc., over 4" in diameter removed prior to placement. No rocks larger than 2" diameter are allowed on top 6" of mound.

2. Miscellaneous Landscape Filling: Fill material like existing on-site soil with all rocks, etc. over 2" in diameter removed prior to placement.

3. Remove and dispose of rocks, etc. removed during soil processing offsite.

4. Imported fill material shall be inspected, tested, and approved by the Owner’s Representative prior to use in work. Copy of tests will be given to the City or County.

2.3 PLANTING SOIL FOR PLANT BACKFILL

A. Native soil shall be tilled and free of noxious weeds and chemicals. Soil must be approved as growing medium from Soils Lab Report with any supplementary additives as directed by Soils Lab Report. Copy of Soils Lab Report will be given to the Owner’s Representative.

2.4 USE OF FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIAL TYPES

A. The CONTRACTOR shall use the types of materials as designated on the Drawings and herein for all required fill, backfill, and embankment construction hereunder.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

31 00 00-4 EARTHWORK FOR BIKE PARKS
B. Where these Specifications conflict with the requirements of any local agency having jurisdiction, or with the requirements of a material manufacturer, the ENGINEER shall be immediately not ified. In case of conflict therewith, the CONTRACTOR shall use the more stringent requirement, as determined by the ENGINEER.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Establish extent of grading and excavation by area and elevation. Designate and identify datum elevation and project engineering reference points. Set required lines, levels, and elevations.

B. Do not cover or enclose work of this Section before obtaining required inspections, tests, approvals, and location recording.

3.2 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Before starting grading and excavation, establish the location and extent of underground utilities in the work area. Exercise care to protect existing utilities during earthwork operations. Perform excavation work near utilities by hand and provide necessary shoring, sheeting, and supports as the work progresses.

B. Maintain, protect, relocate, or extend, as required, existing utility lines to remain which pass through the work area. Pay costs for this work, except as covered by the applicable utility companies.

C. Protect active utility services uncovered by excavation. Notify respective utility companies of damage caused to active utilities immediately.

D. Remove abandoned utility service lines from areas of excavation. Cap, plug, or seal abandon ed lines and identify termination points at grade level with markers.

E. Accurately locate and record abandoned, and active utility lines rerouted or extended on project record documents.

3.3 SITE GRADING – GENERAL

A. Perform grading within contract limits, including adjacent transition areas, to new elevations, levels, profiles, and contours indicated. Provide uniform levels and slopes between new elevations and existing grades.

B. Obtain approval of scarified subgrade surfaces by Owner's Representative prior to filling operations. Scarify, dry, and compact soft and wet areas; remove and replace unsuitable subgrade materials with an approved fill material. Take corrective measures before placing fill materials.

C. Thoroughly scarify existing soil surface to a depth of 10" and verify scarification with Owner's Representative prior to placing fill material in mounded areas.

D. Spread approved fill material uniformly in layers not greater than 12" of loose thickness over entire fill zones of planting areas.

1. Lift thickness requirements may be modified by Owner’s Representative to suit equipment and materials or other conditions when required to assure satisfactory compaction.

2. Place and compact each layer of fill before placing additional fill material. Repeat filling until proposed grade, profile or contour is attained.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

EARTHWORK FOR BIKE PARKS 31 00 00-5

3. Suspend fill operations when satisfactory results cannot be obtained because of environmental or other unsatisfactory site conditions. Do not use over-saturated fill materials. Do not place fill material on over-saturated subgrade surface.

4. Grade surfaces to assure positive drainage and to prevent ponding and pockets of surface drainage. Install drainage swales as indicated on the Drawings.

5. Protect finish graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and damaged areas.

E. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, the completed site grading does not reflect the Contract Documents, an independent surveyor may be hired to verify the grades. If the grades are correct, the Owner will pay for the survey. If the grades are incorrect, the cost of the survey will be deducted from the Contract price.

3.4 BACKFILLING / FILLING FOR PAVING & WALLS

A. Before filling, remove debris, large rocks, formwork, and loose material.

B. Proof-roll areas to receive fill with rubber-tired roller of sufficient weight. Weak areas or areas where excessive pumping is noted shall be removed, and if required by Owner’s Representative, replaced with select fill.

C. Prior to placing fill, scarify surface to a depth of 6 inches. Moisture content of loosened material shall be such that first layer of fill will readily bond to surface.

D. Top 6 inches shall be free from rocks larger than 3 inches diameter.

E. Place in maximum 8-inch lifts and compact per ASTM D 1557 at optimum moisture content ( -1% to +3%). This lift and compaction requirement does not apply to planting areas.

F. Moisten fill to allow drying to correct moisture content before compaction. Do not place fill on subgrade that is over-saturated.

G. Allowing for total thickness of finish paving and base material, fill under paving to bring subgrade to proper elevation.

H. Soft areas that develop under construction operations shall be scarified, aerated, or moistened.

Compact to full depth required to obtain specified density for each layer.

3.5 EXCAVATING

A. It is the Contractor's responsibility to investigate the likelihood of caliches or hard rock exc avation.

The Owner will not provide any additional compensation to the Contractor for hard rock or caliches excavation.

3.6 FINISH GRADING

A. Grade uniformly with rounded surfaces at tops and bottoms of abrupt changes in plane. Hand grade steep slopes, areas that are inaccessible for machine work and areas around existing plants.

B. Slope graded surfaces to drain water away from structures, walls, etc.; minimum slope is 1/4 inch per foot.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

31 00 00-6 EARTHWORK FOR BIKE PARKS
C. Grade areas to elevation and slopes indicated without depressions causing pocketing of surface water or humps, producing localized runoff and erosion. Ponding of water on site is not allowed.

Finish surfaces to be not more than 0.10 foot above or below established grade elevation unless approved in writing by Owner's Representative.

D. See Section on Soil Preparation and Soil Mixes for additional fine grading requirements.

3.7 DRAINAGE

A. Always provide drainage of the working area.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS

A. Refer to Construction and Demolition Waste Management Specifications for actions required regarding the disposal and diversion of all excess / waste materials, including excess excavated.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of earthwork operation, clean areas within contract limits, remove tools and equipment.

B. Provide site clear, clean, free of debris and suitable for site work operations.

C. Remove and dispose of properly off site all rocks and other debris from grading operations at approved recycling centers, refer to Construction and Demolition Waste Management Specifications for actions required with regards to the disposal and diversion of all excess/ waste materials.

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

SELECTIVE CLEARING FOR BIKE PARKS 31 10 00-1
SECTION 31 10 00

SELECTIVE CLEARING FOR BIKE PARKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Included: Perform selective clearing of trees and complete as shown, and as specified.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork for Bike Parks

1.2 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Existing Plants to Remain, refer to Common Work Results for Existing Conditions .

B. Work Schedule: Proceed and coordinate with the work as the site becomes available, consistent with seasonal limitations for clearing and transplanting.

1.3 SELECTION AND TAGGING OF TREES

A. Owner’s Representative will select and tag at the site, those trees to be saved and removed.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (CONTRACTOR'S OPTION)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 TREES TO BE CLEARED (IF APPLICABLE)

A. General: Refer to drawings for locations.

B. Special Conditions: Clear trees in areas only at the direction of the owner’s representative.

C. Stump Removal: Grind or remove tree stumps to a minimum depth of two (2) ft. below proposed finish grade.

D. Disposal: Dispose of cleared trees off the site unless otherwise directed by Owner’s Representative.

3.2 CLEAN-UP

A. Keep all areas of work clean, neat, and orderly always.

B. Clean up and remove all debris from the entire work area prior to Final Acceptance.

C. Work Schedule: Proceed and coordinate with the work as the site becomes available, consistent with seasonal limitations for clearing and transplanting.

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

31 23 00-1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION FOR BIKE PARKS
SECTION 31 23 00

SUBGRADE PREPARATION FOR BIKE PARKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. Requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to, the General, Special, and Technical Provisions, apply to work in this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish materials, labor, transportation, services, and equipment necessary to perform all sub-grade preparation work for the Skate Park as indicated on the Drawings complete as shown and as specified herein.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork for Bike Parks

2. Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Formwork for Bike Parks

3. Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing for Bike Parks

4. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete for Bike Parks

5. Section 03 37 13 – Shotcrete for Bike Parks

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor to provide data indicating the total of post -industrial and post -consumer recycled aggregate base content throughout the Skate Park equaling the recommendations of the Geotechnical Engineer’s Report

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Comply with the Geotechnical Engineer’s Report and applicable reference specifications as specified in the GENERAL PROVISIONS and in accordance with applicable laws, codes and regulations required by Owner’s Representative.

B. Comply with the current provisions of the following Codes and Standards:

1. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.

2. Latest Uniform Standard Specifications issued by the City or County.

PART 2 – MATERIALS

2.1 SUITABLE MATERIALS

A. General: Fill, backfill, and embankment materials shall be suitable selected or processed clean, fine earth, rock, or sand, and free from grass, roots, brush, or other vegetation; contamination; or

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

SUBGRADE PREPARATION FOR BIKE PARKS 31 23 00-2
deleterious material. The size, gradation, and properties of the materials shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the Geotechnical Engineer’s Report.

B. Aggregate base materials under pavements shall be crushed aggregate base material with a recycled content per recommendations of the Geotechnical Engineer’s Report.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. Excavate and shape subgrade to line, grade, and cross-section shown on the Drawings.

B. Subgrade is that area on which pavement, surfacing, base, sub- base, or a layer of other material which may be specified, is to be placed.

C. Plow or scarify subgrade to a depth of below the final subgrade elevation per recommendations of the Geotechnical Engineer’s Report and by harrowing, dry rolling and breaking clods, the earth shall be brought to finely divided condition. Remove boulders, hardened material, or rock encountered.

The earth shall be uniform for the full depth and width of the subgrade.

D. Water loose earth to a uniform depth per recommendations of the Geotechnical Engineer’s Report.

E. Harrow the earth to mix the wet earth with the dry beneath, until the whole mass of loose material is at the proper state of moisture for compaction.

F. The finished subgrade, immediately prior to placing subsequent material thereon, shall be in accordance with the Standard Specifications and per recommendations of the Geotechnical Engineer’s Report.

G. The finished surface of the subgrade, at any point, shall not vary more than recommendations of the Geotechnical Engineer’s Report.

H. The Owner will not provide any additional compensation to the Contractor for hard rock or caliches excavation. Refer to the recommendations of the Geotechnical Engineer’s Report for test boring information and analysis.

3.2 BASE

A. Base shall be readily compacted and spread with equipment that will provide a uniform layer conforming to the planned section.

3.3 CLEANUP

A. Upon completion of the subgrade preparation and base, remove surplus construction materials, earth, and debris so that the job site is left in a neat and orderly condition.

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

31 32 00-1 SOIL STABILIZATION SYSTEM FOR BIKE PARKS
SECTION 31 32 00

SOIL STABILIZATION SYSTEM FOR BIKE PARKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Work included in this section.

1. Soil Stabilization System with stabilizer binder additive.

2. This work consists of furnishing and placing soil binder with soil where indicated on the plans or as designated.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Soil stabilizer binder additive mix for use with native or imported soils for the purpos e of erosion & dust control and conditioning of bicycle track systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Products; Min. 4’ x 4’ x (depth noted on the plans) site constructed soil sample with binder for approval prior to installation.

B. Soil binder Materials and Safety Data Sheets.

1.4 TESTS

A. Perform compaction testing on installed product to confirm installed product complies with the manufacturer's recommended parameters.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Do not install soil stabilizer system during rainy conditions.

1.6 EXCESS MATERIALS

A. Provide owner’s authorized rep. with the following excess materials for use in future soils repair:

1. 1 — 40 lb. bag of the Binder/Stabilizer additive.

2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 SOILTAC SOIL BINDER BY SOILWORKS

A. Contact information:

1. Phone: 480-545-5454

2. Address: 7150 E. Camelback Rd., #444
Scottsdale, AZ 85251 USA

B. Material for soil binder shall consist of a dry granular formula containing anionic polyacrylamide

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

SOIL STABILIZATION SYSTEM FOR BIKE PARKS 31 32 00-2
polymer. Formulas containing neutral polyacrylamide polymers or cationic polyacrylamide polymers shall not be used. The molecular weight of the polymer shall be between 12 and 20 mg/mole.

C. The material used for soil binder shall not contain any mineral filler, clays, or other substances which may inhibit germination or growth of plants. Water & wood cellulose fiber shall conform to manufacturer’s recommendations. Where recommended by the manufacturer, the wood cellulose fiber used with the soil binder application may contain recycled wood fibers.

2.2 STABILIZER BINDER

A. Non-toxic, organic binder that is a colorless and odorless concentrated powder or liquid that binds site soils together to produce a firm and flexible surface.

B. Product: Soiltac by Soilworks or approved equal.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 MIXING AND BLENDING OF SOIL BINDER

A. Application of soil binder shall be done hydraulically in accordance with the following:

1. Application guidelines:

Soil binder/acre Water/acre Fiber/acre
20 lbs. 1000 gallons 900 lbs.

B. Mixing Procedure:

1. Fill tank with a minimum of one-third of the required volume of water.

2. Run agitators at high speed while the soil binder is slowly added to the water.

3. Add wood cellulose fiber. Agitate until homogenous, non-lumpy slurry is formed.

4. Agitate for a minimum of ten minutes prior to application. Spray onto mulch or soil using a nozzle that will disperse the spray into slurry that will uniformly cover the surface.

C. Measurement:

1. Soil binder will be measured as the actual number of acres or the actual number of pounds that are applied and accepted. The quantity of soil binder shall include water, fiber and soil binder applied in accordance with the foregoing requirements, completed and accepted.

• Pay Item Pay Unit
• Soil binder Acre
• Soil binder Pound

2. Water, mixing and application will not be measured and paid for separately but shall be included in the work.

3.2 PLACEMENT OF BLENDED STABILIZED SOIL MIXTURE

A. Installation of stabilized soil mixture shall consist of thoroughly mixing and blending the binder with

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

31 32 00-3 SOIL STABILIZATION SYSTEM FOR BIKE PARKS
the specified surface material. Correct and thorough blending of the products is fundamental to a favorably finished product.

B. Blended material shall be installed loosely and framed in some fashion to prevent the migration of material.

C. The material shall be graded in a manor to ensure drainage and prevent puddling. Ideally the finish grade will have a slight crown to further enhance drainage.

D. Water shall be added to the blended product to achieve compaction. It is necessary for the product to reach a compaction of at least 90 % to insure the desired performance. The use of a vibratory roller, or a vibratory plate is generally required to attain compaction.

E. If the installation requires a depth of greater than three inches it will be necessary to use multiple lifts.

F. Upon installation of the product a sufficient drying time is required for the product to cure. This period is critical in that the re-introduction of moisture will degrade the finish product.

G. After compaction a light brooming of the surface will provide a small amount of lose material to give that natural look.

H. Smooth final finished grade to the finish condition noted on the approved plans.

3.3 MAINTENANCE

A. Remove debris, such as paper, grass clippings, leaves or other organic material by mechanically blowing or hand raking the surface as needed. During the first year, a minor amount of loose material will appear on the surface (1/16 to 1/4 inch). If this material exceeds 1/4 of an inch, redistribute the material over the entire surface. Water thoroughly to the depth of 1.” Compact with power roller of no less than 1000 lbs. This process should be repeated as needed. If cracking occurs, simply sweep loose material into the cracks, water thoroughly and hand tamp with an 8” to 10” hand tamp plate.

3.4 REPAIRS

A. Refer to manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Typical repair consists of:

1. Excavate damaged area to the depth of the stabilized aggregate and square up side walls.

2. If area is dry, moisten damaged portion slightly.

3. Pre-blend the dry required amount of binder product with the proper amount of aggregate in a concrete mixer or similar.

4. Add water to the pre-blended material and thoroughly moisten mix with 25 to 35 gallons per ton of pre-blended material or to approximately 10% moisture content.

5. Apply moistened pre-blended mixture to excavated area to finish grade. Compact with an 8” to 10” hand tamp or with 1000 lb. roller for high traffic areas. Keep traffic off repair areas for 12 to 48 hours after repair has been completed.

END OF SECTION

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

ASPHALT PAVING FOR BIKE PARKS 32 12 16-1
SECTION 32 12 16

ASPHALT PAVING FOR BIKE PARKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following:

1. Bituminous concrete paving

2. Repairs to existing pavements as indicated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Information: Provide manufacturer's data showing installation and limitations in use. Supply Certificates of Compliance for all materials required for fabrication and installation. Work includes but is not limited to the following items:

1. Bituminous Concrete - mix data.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Unless otherwise specified, work and materials for construction of the bituminous concrete paving shall conform to the applicable portions herein and as noted on the Drawings.

B. Paving work, base course etc., shall be done only after excavation and construction work which might injure them has been completed. Damage caused during construction shall be repaired before acceptance.

C. Repair and replace existing paving areas damaged and removed during this Project. Workmanship and materials for such repair and replacement shall match those employed in existing work, except as otherwise noted.

D. Pavement subbase shall not be placed on a muddy or frozen subgrade.

E. Existing pavement under state or local jurisdiction shall, if damaged or removed during the course of this project, be repaired or replaced under this section of the specification in conformance with applicable codes, standards, and practices.

F. Codes and standards: Perform site improvement work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Qualifications of workers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are trained in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

H. Layout and Grading: After staking and laying out the work, and before beginning final construction,

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

32 12 16-2 ASPHALT PAVING FOR BIKE PARKS
obtain the Owner’s Representative’s approval of layout and grades. Contractor shall make mi nor adjustments as determined by the Owner’s Representative.

I. The Contractor and his Subcontractors shall inspect all sub- bases for unstable, unsuitable, or improperly prepared areas. Do not begin work over unacceptable areas. Beginning work means the Contractor and his Subcontractors accept the subbase, previous work and conditions and shall be held responsible for any corrections required to properly implement the Construction Documents.

1.5 ACCESSIBILITY COMPLIANCE

A. Special attention is to be given to compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and the requirements of the Massachusetts Architectural Access Board (MAAB).

1. Slopes: The cross pitch (perpendicular to travel) for walkways shall be constructed at 1.5% (2% maximum, 1% minimum). The longitudinal slope (parallel to travel) for walkways shall not exceed 4.5%. The slope of handicapped curb cuts shall be constructed at 7% (8% maximum).

2. Verify slopes with a 2- foot electronic “Smart Level”. Pedestrian pavements that do not meet these requirements shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

3. A 5’-0” minimum level (1.5% pitch) area shall be provided at entrances to buildings, which are at an exterior grade continuous with the interior floor grade. Puddling of water at the entrances shall not be allowed.

B. These requirements supersede the grades shown on the plans. If these requirements cannot be met with the grades shown on the plans, notify the Owner’s representative immediately for direction.

C. The location and construction of handicapped curb cuts shall be reviewed and approved by the Municipal Engineer prior to construction.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: The Subcontractor shall verify site conditions to assure that the requirements for installation procedures conform to the following:

1. Paving shall not be placed when the ambient temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit or when there is frost in the base or any other time when weather conditions are unsuitable for the type of material being placed.

2. After final rolling of bituminous pavement, no vehicular traffic of any kind shall be permitted until it has cooled and hardened for at least 24 hours.

B. Site Information: Data on indicated grades, utilities and other existing conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy.

C. Existing Utilities: Locate existing utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during installation of site improvements.

D. Protection: The Contractor shall use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation. In the event of damage, make all repairs and replacements necessary to approval of the Owner’s Representative and at no additional cost to the Owner. All work shall be executed in such a manner as to prevent any damage to existing streets, curbs, paving to remain, existing plant materials, and adjoining properties.

E. The Contractor shall remove all debris, construction equipment and scrap material from areas within

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

ASPHALT PAVING FOR BIKE PARKS 32 12 16-3
the limit of work prior to inspection for acceptance.

F. The Drawings indicate, in general, the alignment and finished grade elevations. The Owner’s Representative, however, may make minor adjustments in grades and alignment as are found necessary.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 BASE COURSE

A. Gravel: Refer to Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork for Bike Parks.

B. Submit to the Owner’s Representative a sieve analysis by an independent recognized testing laboratory of the material he intends to utilize. No material shall be placed until approved by the Owner’s Representative in writing.

2.2 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE

A. Bituminous Concrete: Standard plant -mixed, hot-laid paving material for road work, consisting of clean, crushed rock aggregate, mineral filler, and asphalt.

1. Binder or bottom course paving for roadways and parking lots and sidewalks shall have maximum aggregate size passing 1 in. sieve.

2. Top or wearing course paving for roadways and parking lots shall have maximum aggregate size passing 5/8 in. sieve.

3. Top or wearing course paving for sidewalks shall conform to composition for "Dense Mix".

2.3 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

A. Bituminous material for prime coat shall be one of the following:

B. Cut-back asphalt (rapid-curing type) conforming to AASHTO M81, Grade RC-70 or

C. Emulsified asphalt rapid-setting type conforming to AASHTO M140, Grade RS-1.

D. Bitumen shall be a rapid-setting type emulsified asphalt conforming to AASHTO M 140, Grade RS -

1. E. Bituminous crack sealer shall be a hot -applied bituminous sealer conforming to Fed. Spec. SS -S- 1401.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 GRADING

A. Areas to be paved will be compacted and brought approximately to subgrade elevation before work of this section is performed. Final fine grading, filling, and compaction of subgrade to receive paving, as required to form a firm, uniform, accurate, and unyielding subgrade at required elevations and to required lines, shall be done under this Section.

1. Refer to Section 31 00 00, Earthwork for Bike Parks for grading requirements and procedures.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

32 12 16-4 ASPHALT PAVING FOR BIKE PARKS
B. Existing subgrade material which will not readily compact as required shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials. Additional materials needed to bring subgrade to required line and grade and to replace unsuitable material removed shall be material conforming to this Section.

C. Subgrade of areas to be paved shall be re- compacted as required to bring top 8 in. of material immediately below gravel base course to a compaction of at least 90% of maximum density, as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Subgrade compaction shall extend for a distance of at least 1 ft. beyond pavement edge.

D. Excavation required in pavement subgrade shall be completed before fine grading and final compaction of subgrade are performed. Where excavation must be performed in completed subgrade or subbase subsequent backfill and compaction shall be performed as directed by the Owner’s Representative and as specified in other Division 2 Sections. Completed subgrade after filling such areas shall be uniformly and properly graded.

E. Areas being graded or compacted shall be kept shaped and drained during construction. Ruts greater than or equal to 2 in. deep in subgrade, shall be graded out, reshaped as required, and re-compacted before placing pavement.

F. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade.

G. Disposal of debris and other material excavated and/or stripped under this section, and material unsuitable for or in excess of requirements for completing work of this Section shall be legally disposed of off-site.

H. Prepared subgrade will be inspected by the Owner’s Representative. Subgrade shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative before installation of paving base course. Disturbance to subgrade caused by inspection procedures shall be repaired under this Section of the specification.

3.2 BASE COURSE

A. Aggregate and reclaimed base course for paving and the spreading, grading, and compaction methods employed shall conform to standard requirements for usual base course of this type for first class road work.

B. Compaction of base course shall be to 95% of maximum density as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Stone greater than 2-1/2 in. shall be excluded from course.

C. Width of base course shall be greater than the width of pavement surface, if continuous lateral support is provided during rolling, and shall extend at least 2 x base thickness beyond edge of the course above, if not so supported.

D. Aggregate and reclaimed material shall be applied in lifts less than or equal to 6 in. thick, compacted measure. Each lift shall be separately compacted to specified density, using a minimum of four coverages of tires of a ten wheel truck, having a gross weight of 70,000 lb. or using an approved equivalent.

1. Material shall be placed adjacent to wall, manhole, catch basin, and other structures only after they have been set to required grade and level.

2. Rolling shall begin at sides and progress to center of crowned areas, and shall begin on low side and progress toward high side of sloped areas. Rolling shall continue until material does not creep or wave ahead of roller wheels.

3. Surface irregularities which exceed 1/2 in. using a 10 ft. long straightedge shall be replaced and

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

ASPHALT PAVING FOR BIKE PARKS 32 12 16-5
properly compacted.

E. Subgrade and base course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated. Less select materials shall not be permitted to become mixed with gravel. Materials spilled outside pavement lines shall be removed and area repaired.

F. Portions of subgrade or of construction above which become contaminated, softened, or dislodged by passing of traffic, or otherwise damaged, shall be cleaned, replaced, and otherwise repaired to conform to the requirements of this specification before proceeding with next operation.

3.3 BITUMINOUS PAVING

A. Bituminous paving mixture, equipment, methods of mixing and placing, and precautions to be observed as to weather, condition of base, etc.

B. Bituminous binder and wearing surface courses shall each be applied individually, in single lifts of full thickness indicated on the Drawings.

C. Work shall not be performed during rainy weather or when temperature is less than 40°F.

D. Adjacent work, including concrete, shall be protected from stain and damage during entire operation.

Damaged and stained areas shall be replaced or repaired to equal their original condition.

E. Existing paved surfaces to be overlaid with new bituminous concrete shall be cleaned of foreign and objectionable matter with blowers, power brooms, or hand brooms immediately before applying bituminous pavement. Cracks shall be cleaned and bituminous crack sealer applied to fully seal pavement.

F. The surface of the pavement to be resurfaced shall receive a bituminous prime coat before laying bituminous binder course. Prime coat shall be applied at rate which will leave Bituminous residue of 5 to 7 gal./100 sq. yd. after evaporation of vehicle. Base surface shall be dry and clean when prime coat is applied. Bituminous paving material shall not be placed until vehicle has completely evaporated from prime coat. Adjoining new paving shall be placed before prime coat has dried or dusted over.

G. Deliveries shall be timed to permit spreading and rolling all material during daylight hours, unless artificial light, satisfactory to Owner’s Representative, is provided. Loads which have been wet by rain or otherwise will not be accepted. Hauling over freshly laid or rolled material will not be permitted.

H. Placing and rolling of mixture shall be as nearly continuous as possible. Rolling shall begin as soon after placing as mixture will bear the operation without undue displacement. Delays in rolling freshly spread mixture will not be permitted. Rolling shall proceed longitudinally, starting at edge of newly placed material and proceeding toward previously rolled areas. Rolling overlap on successive strips shall be greater than or equal to 1/2 width of roller rear wheel. Alternate trips of roller shall be of slightly different lengths. Corrections required in surface shall be made by removing or adding materials before rolling is completed. Skin patching of areas where rolling has been completed will not be permitted. Course shall be subjected to diagonal rolling, crossing lines of the first rolling while mixture is hot and in compactable condition. Displacement of mixture or other fault shall be corrected at once by use of rakes and application of fresh mixture or removal of mixture, as required. Rolling of each course shall be continued until roller marks are eliminated. Roller shall pass over unprotected edge of course only when paving is to be discontinued for sufficient time to permit mixture to become cold.

I. In places not accessible to roller, mixture shall be compacted with hand tampers. Hand tampers shall

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

32 12 16-6 ASPHALT PAVING FOR BIKE PARKS
weigh at least 50 lb. and shall have a tamping face less than or equal to 100 sq. in. Mechanical tampers capable of equal compaction will be acceptable in areas in which they can be employed effectively.

J. Portions of pavement courses which become mixed with foreign material or are in any way defective shall be removed, replaced, replaced with fresh mixture, and compacted to density of surrounding areas. Bituminous material spilled outside lines of finished pavement shall be immediately and completely removed. Such material shall not be employed in the work.

K. Joints shall present same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of the course.

Continuous bond shall be obtained between portions of existing and new pavements and between successive placements of new pavement. New material at joints shall be thick enough to allow for compaction when rolling. Compaction of pavement, base, and subgrade at joints shall be such that there is no yielding of new pavement relative to existing pavement when subjected to traffic.

L. Contact surfaces of previously constructed pavement (if greater than or equal to seven days since binder placed), manholes, and similar structures shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with a thin uniform coating of bitumen immediately before fresh mixture is placed. Tack coat shall be applied at rate which will leave asphaltic residue of 5 to 7 gal./100 yd.2 after evaporation of vehicle. Base surface shall be dry and clean when tack coat is applied. Bituminous paving material shall not be placed until vehicle has completely evaporated from tack coat. Adjoining new paving shall be placed before tack coat has dried or dusted over.

M. Earth or other approved material shall be placed along pavement edges in such quantity as will compact to thickness of course being constructed, allowing at least 1 ft. of shoulder width to be rolled and compacted simultaneously with rolling and compacting surface. Pavement edge shall be trimmed neatly to line before placing earth or other approved material along edge.

1. After final rolling, vehicular traffic shall not be permitted on pavement until it has cooled and hardened, and in no case less than six hours.

N. Variations in smoothness of finished surface shall be less than or equal to the following tolerances when tested with a 10 ft. straightedge, applied both parallel to and at right angles to centerline of paved area.

1. For roadway and parking pavement surface course - 1/4 in. in 10 ft.

2. For sidewalk pavement surface course - 1/4 in. in 10 ft.

3. At joint with existing pavement, and at other locations where an essentially flush transition is required, pavement elevation tolerance shall not exceed 0.01 ft.

4. At other areas pavement elevation tolerance shall not exceed + 0.05 ft.

5. Irregularities exceeding these amounts or which retain water on surface shall be corrected by removing defective work and replacing with new material conforming to this Section.

O. The Contractor shall check the final surface for depressions by applying water in the presence of the Owner’s Representative or Engineer. Minor depressions (less than 1/8" in depth) need not be corrected, however, in cases where the variation in the surface course exceeds 1/8", the entire area affected shall be removed and replaced with new surface course at the expense of the Contractor.

3.4 REPAIRS TO EXISTING PAVEMENT

A. Subgrade shall be prepared in strict accordance with paragraphs above.

City of Carlsbad

VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK

ASPHALT PAVING FOR BIKE PARKS 32 12 16-7
B. Base course shall be replaced in strict conformance with paragraphs above.

C. Bituminous concrete paving mixture, equipment, and methods of mixing and placing shall conform with the paragraphs above.

END OF SECTION

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 1 of 7

CARLSBAD VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK (NORTH BUILDING A)
SECTION 13 34 23 - PRE-ENGINEERED ROMTEC BUILDING
Specification Date: 6/4/2025
SECTION 1: BUILDING PACKAGE OVERVIEW

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Owner will provide a pre-engineered Romtec building package for onsite installation by the building installer and/or contractor (see definitions and scope of work in sections below).

B. The following is an overview of the scope and products included in the Romtec building package.

1.2 OVERVIEW
A. Building package design, engineering, and furnishing all specified building package components shall be provided by Romtec, Inc.

B. The building and its concrete footings, foundation, and slab shall be engineered by Romtec to meet site specific conditions including wind and snow loading, local frost depth, and ground conditions.

C. Building shall be designed to meet local codes and permitting authority approvals for permanent structures.

D. The reviewing authority reserves the right to review or reject all submittals at its sole discretion.

E. All work and materials shall comply with the latest industry building codes and regulations for the state where the project is located.

F. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) will be followed in design, manufacture, and construction.

1.3 DESIGN & SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTATION
A. Romtec’s work shall include the design of the architectural, mechanical, structural, and electrical components that will be required for this building.

B. The building will be designed as a complete building package to be delivered to the job site for construction on- site by the building installer and/or contractor.

C. Romtec shall submit the packaged restroom building preliminary Scope of Supply and Design Submittal (SSDS), including the building plan view and elevation drawings.

D. Romtec will provide complete submittal documentation in the Romtec’s standard electronic submittal format for review.

E. The preliminary SSDS will be reviewed by relevant parties and returned to Romtec with any required revisions to the terms, product data sheets, and/or building plan view and elevation drawings noted as comments.

F. Romtec shall make any required corrections or revisions and resubmit the preliminary SSDS until the preliminary SSDS is approved by the relevant parties.

G. Once the preliminary SSDS has been approved, Romtec will provide full sealed plan sets stamped by an engineer licensed in the state that the building is located for review by the permitting authority.

H. Up to three (3) wet-stamped sets of the plans and structural calculations shall be provided by Romtec before any additional fees apply. Standard plan set size is 11” x 17”.

I. Permitting authority will review the full sealed plan set and return with any required revisions or corrections noted as comments.

J. Romtec shall provide one full round of sealed plan revisions in response to permitting authority comments before any additional fees are allowed.

K. The following sections shall be included in Romtec’s preliminary Scope of Supply and Design Submittal.

Incomplete submittals will be rejected and returned for revision.

1. INTRODUCTION

2. BUILDING DESIGN,
(a) SUPPLIED ITEMS
(b) EXCLUDED ITEMS
(c) PLAN VIEW AND ELEVATION DRAWINGS

3. PRODUCT DATA

4. WARRANTY & LIMITATIONS
Note: Overall site plan is not part of Romtec’s scope.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Romtec’s freight shall be based on delivering the product on a 48’ to 53’ flatbed or van truck and trailers, or as close to those dimensions as can legally access the site. Overall dimensions of the truck and trailers are: 70’ overall length, 102” wide and 168” high.

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 2 of 7
B. Romtec shall deliver organized building package components in stages as shrink-wrapped pallets that correspond to a typical sequence of construction. A bill of material stating the stages of palletized components shall be included with every delivery. All stages as applicable.

1. Stage 1 pallets shall include structural components such as block, frames, vents, beams, connectors, trusses, etc.

2. Stage 2 pallets shall include second stage structural components such as filler wall material, windows, skylights, roofing, etc.

3. Stage 3 pallets shall include structural finish components such as siding material, tile, doors etc.

4. Stage 4 pallets shall include plumbing and electrical fixtures and other finish materials such as toilets, sinks, drinking fountains, electrical fixtures, accessories, etc.

C. Romtec shall coordinate the delivery with the receiving entity (owner, building installer, and/or contractor) as appropriate.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. The building package and all associated components provided by Romtec shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of not less than one (1) year from the date of acceptance. Acceptance is the date of delivery of the building package, or, if delivery is delayed for any reason beyond Romtec’s control, the date that the building and all its associated components were ready to deliver.

B. Romtec shall pass through to owner all relevant manufacturers’ warranties for individual products and components of the building package.

SECTION 2: BUILDING PACKAGE PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Romtec, Inc.,
18240 North Bank Road, Roseburg, OR 97470
Tel: 541-496-3541; Fax: 541-496-0803; Email: [email protected] Web: www.Romtec.com

2.2 BUILDING DESCRIPTION
A. Refer to plans for quantities, dimensions, locations, and installation methods for the materials and items described in this section.

B. Building dimensions shall match what is indicated on drawings.

C. Romtec will supply the building package products to owner.

D. Owner will supply the Romtec building package products to building installer and/or contractor.

2.3 PLUMBING FIXTURES & ACCESSORIES
A. Toilet shall be wall mount, top supply, stainless steel fixtures.

1. Flush valve shall be a chrome, manual lever with ADA compliant metal oscillating non-hold-open handle.

B. Lavatory shall be 18 in. x 22 in. wall hung stainless steel fixtures.

1. Faucets shall be deck mounted single hole single supply metering, sink faucet.

2. Concession room hand wash sink faucet shall be a 2.2gpm, pivot action lever style faucet.

C. Grab bars shall be stainless steel.

D. Mirror shall be 18” x 36”, framed with one-piece, roll-formed stainless steel with ¾” face and neatly mitered corners.

E. Koala Kare Products, KB112-01CT countertop surface mounted baby changing station.

F. Foor mount, Mustee 24” x 24” mop service basin 63m with 63.600A service sink faucet, holder and guard.

G. Regency 16-guage 304 stainless steel, three compartment sink with galvanized legs and 17” drainboards.

1. Regency adjustable flanged foot.

2. Pre-rinse unit B-0133-B with add-on B-0155-LN faucet and 10” swing nozzle 061X.

H. Woodford model B67 box type backflow protected freezeless wall hydrant.

I. Woodford model 24 anti-siphon protected wall faucet.

J. ADA All Gender restroom signage.

K. All Gender restroom signage.

L. California Title 24 all gender restroom door symbol signage.

M. Trash receptacles and all dispensers to be supplied by City.

2.4 ELECTRICAL
A. Interior and exterior light fixtures and controls.

1. Interior surface mount, 48” LED light fixtures.

2. Wafer LED recessed downlight, WF6 6” LED switchable white color temperature.

3. Acuity Controls, WCR PDT 16 Sensor switch.

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 3 of 7

4. nLight nDTC touch screen digital time clock.

5. nLight nIO PC Kit outdoor photocell interface kit.

6. nLight nPODMA wallpod: on/off & on/off+raise/lower.

7. NLight nPP16 EFP power/relay pack.

8. Sensor switch, WSXA Series wall switch sensor.

B. Global Industrial air curtain for concession room door.

C. In Sink Erator, quiet series, Evolution Excel food waste disposer.

D. Commercial electric water heater, DEN-40 40-gallon capacity.

E. Mechanical exhaust package with inline fans.

F. Panasonic, CU-2E18SBU-5 multi system outdoor unit with mounting rack.

G. Panasonic, CS-ME7RKUA multi split indoor unit.

H. Thru-wall, Murdock Super Secur, Fastaire model HD-03 hand dryers.

I. Main breaker panel.

1. Siemens breaker Panel shall be 200 Amp, single-phase.

Note: Breaker panel shall be sized to accept only the loads of the Romtec electrical fixture package. Romtec should modify the main breaker panel as needed to be most efficient based on any design changes.

2.5 STRUCTURE
A. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU).

1. Walls shall be constructed of 8"W x 16"L x 8"H smooth-face mortar joint concrete masonry units (concrete blocks).

2. Blocks shall be manufactured to ASTM C90 designation for load bearing concrete masonry units.

3. Block color to be Gray.

B. Exterior wall finish shall be Artisan shiplap siding above Princeton Thin stone veneer.

1. Siding shall be mounted over OSB sheathing supplied by building supplier.

C. Interior walls of the Office shall have insulation finished with smooth, white FRP panels.

D. Overhead Door 651 Series, stainless steel rolling counter door system.

1. QuikServ self-closing window with screen.

2. Wall mount, stainless steel counters.

E. Door system components

1. Doors shall be Steelcraft® SL18 standard laminated honeycomb core and 18-gauge galvanized steel.

2. Door frame shall be pre-welded Steelcraft® 3-Sided flush frame, 16-gauge galvannealed A-60 steel.

3. Doors and frames to be primed and painted on-site by installer.

4. Masonry door clips (3/16” dia.) for door frame shall be fitted between the doorframe and concrete blocks to bond frame to wall. Door clips allow full internal grouting of the frame during installation.

5. Hinges shall meet ANSI A5112 with non-removable pin and two ball bearings.

6. Door closure shall be LCN-4111, grade 1, heavy duty closure with cast iron body, full complement bearing,

7. Doors to have aluminum alloy 6063, T5 temper synthetic rubber polymer blend neoprene sweeps, model 200NA, anodized aluminum finish.

8. Restroom doors to have lever handle locks with thumb turn deadbolt lock with occupancy indicator.

9. All other door locks shall be ND series grade 1 cylindrical locks.

10. Restroom doors and mechanical room doors to have 18” x 18” louvered vents.

11. Exterior office door and exterior concession room door to have peep hole.

12. Restroom doors to have magnetic locking system.
(i) Magnet locks, Hager 2942
(ii) Hager 2903, Provides constant power for fall safe and fall secure locking devices. (iii) Exit switch, Hager 2977
(iv) PIR egress sensor, Hager 2-679-0612
(v) Intermatic digital in-wall timer, ST01 Series.

2.6 ROOFING
A. Roof system.

1. Glulam beam shall be 24F-V4 and architectural grade.

2. Tongue & groove decking shall be 2x6 V-edge deck boards, select deck Douglas fir.

B. Velux model FS, deck mount, 24” x 24” skylights.

C. Roofing shall be Fabral, 22-gauge, Stand ‘N Seam roof panels, with 16 in. coverage width.

1. Roofing package shall include inside and outside foam closures, matching trim (eaves, gables, and ridge) and fasteners, sheet metal flashing (all sides), and 30# felt (under metal).

2. Roofing color to be Charcoal.

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 4 of 7
SECTION 3: BUILDING INSTALLER SCOPE
The installing contractor or subcontractor, hereafter designated as the building installer, is responsible for building package installation. Building installer work will generally include foundation/pad construction and building package assembly/construction.

Note: Romtec’s scope is separate from the building installer’s scope. Romtec, Inc., is the approved building package supplier, not a designated building installer.

3.1 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS
A. If required by owner and/or reviewing authority, building installer shall submit product data sheets and relevant information about the specified building installer supplied products below for review and approval.

3.2 WARRANTY
A. Building installer’s work shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of not less than one (1) year from the date of acceptance. Acceptance is the date that installation work for the building package is completed, including any relevant final punch list. If final acceptance of the completed building is delayed for reasons beyond building installer’s control, the warranty shall be one (1) year from the completion of building installer’s installation work and demobilization.

B. Building installer shall pass through to owner all relevant manufacturers warranties for individual products and components supplied by building installer.

3.3 STRUCTURE
A. Masonry (concrete) grout shall be supplied and installed by building installer.

1. Grout shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days, 9+/-1” slump, with max ½” aggregate, or as required in final approved plans.

2. Fine or coarse grout may be used in accordance with 2009 UBC.

3. All CMU block must be fully grouted and may not be wetted.

Note: If required for installation, building installer will be responsible for providing appropriate equipment and labor for notching CMU block for bond beams, cutting CMU block to make any required shapes, and/or grinding CMU block for fixture mounting.

B. Rebar for walls shall be supplied and installed by building installer.

1. All walls shall have # 4 and # 5 rebar. See final approved plans for spacing.

2. All rebar used in the building must meet ASTM A615 manufacturing standards and is to be placed per the final approved plans.

C. Interior block wall finish shall be latex epoxy paint supplied and installed by building installer.

D. Gypsum board ceiling finish shall be supplied and installed by building installer per the final approved plans.

E. Interior floors to be sealed concrete epoxy finish supplied by building installer.

1. Cove base to be integral with flooring.

F. Sealant for all exposed wood shall be supplied and installed by building installer.

G. Sealant for all exterior CMU block is required, to be supplied and installed by building installer.

H. Fiber cement siding is primed to be painted on-site by building installer.

I. Doors and frames to arrive primes to be painted on-site by building installer.

J. Rain gutters and downspouts are supplied and installed by building installer.

3.4 ELECTRICAL
A. Electrical rough-in, installation and trim shall be provided by building installer.

1. All underground and/or overhead service to building shall be as specified in the final site plan.

2. Building installer is responsible for all necessary wire, connectors, grounding, conduit, and related items to install the building package electrical components and meet all relevant national, state, and local codes.

3. Building installer shall supply and install all switches and outlets required to complete the building package installation.

3.5 CAST IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR BUILDING PACKAGE
A. All equipment, labor, trades, and materials for cast-in-place concrete shall be provided by building installer.

1. Includes all materials and labor for building package foundations/footings and interior slabs.

B. Footings for the building package are to be dug by the building installer and poured on-site to meet local code for permanent structures. A prefabricated, modular mat placed on compacted base is not an accepted equal to a site specific, site poured, engineered foundation.

C. Engineered fill shall be ¾” minus crushed aggregate around footings, foundations, and slabs, or as required in the final approved plans.

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 5 of 7
D. Slab vapor barrier shall be 6-mil continuous plastic under the concrete slab, or as required in the final approved plans.

E. The foundation shall be installed as designed with all cast in-place concrete poured to dimensions specified, or as required in the final plans.

1. Footings will be built to minimum 24” depth or greater if required by local frost depth or permitting authority.

2. Minimum compressive strength of foundation concrete shall be 3,000 psi at 28 days, 4” +/-1” slump, with max ¾” aggregate, cured in accordance with ACI 308, or as required in approved final plans.

3. Slabs shall have a fine broom finish with joints required in flat work as shown on plans.

4. Steel rebar shall be installed as specified in final plans.

F. Building installer shall supply and install concrete slab sealer.

1. Concrete slab sealer shall be a water-based, transparent curing, sealing and dust proofing compound with two (2) coats to be applied per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.6 PLUMBING
A. Plumbing rough-in, installation and trim within 10’ of the building footprint shall be provided by building installer.

1. All underground water service and sewer drain(s) from building to be as specified in final approved site plan.

2. Building water shutoff valve, drain, and all rough piping shall be as shown on final building plans. Final installation location to be determined onsite.

3. Install the building package plumbing fixtures per the final approved plans.

4. Piping shall be installed per the final approved plans with minimum pipe sizing per 2009 Uniform Plumbing Code Section 610.

B. Floor drains in the building shall be supplied and installed by building installer.

1. All floor drains shall be as shown on final approved plans.

3.7 OTHER MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT
A. Unless otherwise specified, the following products and materials are supplied by building installer (if applicable).

1. Building package installation

2. Cast-in-place concrete foundations, footings, interior slabs.

3. Concrete slab sealer

4. Mortar

5. Concrete grout

6. Rebar

7. Latex epoxy paint

8. Caulk for siding

9. Plumbing rough in, installation and trim

10. Electrical rough in, installation and trim

11. Switches & outlets

12. Typical fasteners; for example: roofing nails, staples, etc.

13. Fasteners not included in product packaging.

14. Wood sealant for all decking, glulam beams, posts, and extensions

15. All other items within the building footprint indicated on final plans or required by building codes to complete installation of the building package which are not specifically stated as supplied by owner or contractor.

3.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The building installer will coordinate with owner and/or Romtec to receive delivery of the building package onsite. This includes all equipment and labor required for off-loading of the delivered building package.

B. The building installer will assume responsibility for adequate protection and maintenance of delivered building package materials from weather, damage, and pilferage during installation work. Any failure to adequately protect building package materials that affects the warranty of those materials will be at building installer’s expense.

C. Building installer shall collect and maintain for final delivery to owner any operation & maintenance manuals included by individual product manufacturers with their respective product packaging. Any failure to collect, maintain, and/or deliver these O&M manuals to the owner that results in fees from Romtec for additional copies shall be at building installer’s expense.

SECTION 4: CONTRACTOR SCOPE ITEMS

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 6 of 7
The items in this section may be provided by the same building installer as defined in Section 3 above (typically when a single entity is acting as both the building installer and contractor), or the items in this section may be provided by a separate entity such as a general contractor or site contractor, hereafter designated as contractor (typically when the building installer is a separate subcontractor). Contractor work will generally include site preparation and grading, excavations for structures, backfill and/or structural backfill, and any site or utility work outside the building package footprint.

Items in this section are generally to be completed prior to building installer beginning its installation work described in Section 3 above.

4.1 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS
A. If required by owner and/or reviewing authority, contractor shall submit product data sheets and relevant information about the specified contractor supplied products below for review and approval.

4.2 WARRANTY
A. Building installer’s work shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of not less than one (1) year from the date of acceptance. Acceptance is the date that installation work for the building package is completed, including any relevant final punch list. If final acceptance of the completed building is delayed for reasons beyond building installer’s control, the warranty shall be one (1) year from the completion of building installer’s installation work and demobilization.

B. Building installer shall pass through to owner all relevant manufacturers warranties for individual products and components supplied by building installer.

4.3 ELECTRICAL
A. Incoming electrical utility lines to within approximately 10’ of the building shall be provided by contractor.

1. All underground and/or overhead service to building shall be as specified in the final site plan.

2. Electric meter base and all rough wiring, switches, plugs and circuit breakers shall be as shown on final plans.

3. Contractor supplies and installs the meter base and meter.

4.4 CAST IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR BUILDING EXTERIOR
A. All equipment, labor, trades, and materials shall be supplied by contractor.

1. Includes all materials and labor for exterior/entry slabs and sidewalks.

B. Refer to drawings for sidewalks and entry slabs.

1. Minimum concrete compressive strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days.

2. Remesh or rebar reinforcement shall be used in sidewalks.

3. All sidewalks shall be finished with a fine broom with control joints installed per the final approved site plan.

4.5 PLUMBING
A. Incoming plumbing to within approximately 10’ of the building shall be provided by contractor.

1. All underground water service and sewer drain(s) from building to be as specified in final approved site plan.

2. Building water shutoff valve is to be supplied and installed by contractor.

3. Contractor is responsible to ensure that incoming water pressure is sufficient to meet building package fixture demands.

4. Minimum water pressure at toilet and urinal flush valves shall be 40 psi with minimum pipe sizing as per 2009 Uniform Plumbing Code Section 610, or as required in final approved plans.

B. Water line drain valve shall be supplied and installed by contractor.

C. Sewer line backflow check valve shall be supplied and installed by contractor.

4.6 OTHER MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT
A. Unless otherwise specified, the following products and materials are supplied by contractor.

1. All items not specifically listed as supplied by owner or building installer.

2. Any item listed as supplied by “contractor” or “others”.

B. Unless specified in the plans or submittals, contractor supplies the following (if applicable):

1. Incoming electrical, water, sewer, and gas utilities.

2. Asphalt paving

3. Masonry pavers

4. Sidewalks

5. Landscaping

6. Site grading

7. Exterior/entry slabs

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 7 of 7

8. Drain valves and backflow check valves.

9. Branch circuit breakers

10. Irrigation Equipment

11. Fire alarm and fire suppression equipment.

12. Lighting equipment not attached to the building.

13. All other items exterior of the building footprint indicated on final plans or required by building codes which are not specifically stated as supplied by owner or building installer.

4.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The contractor will assume responsibility for adequate protection and maintenance of the installed building package materials after completion of installation work by building installer. Any failure to adequately protect building package materials that affects the warranty of those materials will be at contractor’s expense.

SECTION 5: OWNER’S SCOPE

5.1 ONGOING MAINTENANCE
A. Owner is responsible for ongoing maintenance of the completed restroom building after completion of work by building installer and contractor.

5.2 SITE PLAN
A. Owner (or owner’s site engineer) is responsible for providing the final approved site plan to Romtec and/or building installer.

5.3 SPECIAL INSPECTION
A. If required, special inspection(s) services shall be provided by owner.

B. If special inspection(s) are required by the permitting authority or relevant agency(ies), then Romtec, building installer, and/or contractor shall provide reasonable assistance to the owner to accommodate the special inspection(s).

5.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Owner will coordinate with Romtec, building installer, and/or contractor to receive delivery of the building package onsite.

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 1 of 7

CARLSBAD VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK (NORTH BUILDING B)
SECTION 13 34 23 - PRE-ENGINEERED ROMTEC BUILDING
Specification Date: 3/13/2024
SECTION 1: BUILDING PACKAGE OVERVIEW

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Owner will provide a pre-engineered Romtec building package for onsite installation by the building installer and/or contractor (see definitions and scope of work in sections below).

B. The following is an overview of the scope and products included in the Romtec building package.

1.2 OVERVIEW
A. Building package design, engineering, and furnishing all specified building package components shall be provided by Romtec, Inc.

B. The building and its concrete footings, foundation, and slab shall be engineered by Romtec to meet site specific conditions including wind and snow loading, local frost depth, and ground conditions.

C. Building shall be designed to meet local codes and permitting authority approvals for permanent structures.

D. The reviewing authority reserves the right to review or reject all submittals at its sole discretion.

E. All work and materials shall comply with the latest industry building codes and regulations for the state where the project is located.

F. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) will be followed in design, manufacture, and construction.

1.3 DESIGN & SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTATION
A. Romtec’s work shall include the design of the architectural, mechanical, structural, and electrical components that will be required for this building.

B. The building will be designed as a complete building package to be delivered to the job site for construction on- site by the building installer and/or contractor.

C. Romtec shall submit the packaged restroom building preliminary Scope of Supply and Design Submittal (SSDS), including the building plan view and elevation drawings.

D. Romtec will provide complete submittal documentation in Romtec’s standard electronic submittal format for review.

E. The preliminary SSDS will be reviewed by relevant parties and returned to Romtec with any required revisions to the terms, product data sheets, and/or building plan view and elevation drawings noted as comments.

F. Romtec shall make any required corrections or revisions and resubmit the preliminary SSDS until the preliminary SSDS is approved by the relevant parties.

G. Once the preliminary SSDS has been approved, Romtec will provide full sealed plan sets stamped by an engineer licensed in the state that the building is located for review by the permitting authority.

H. Up to three (3) wet-stamped sets of the plans and structural calculations shall be provided by Romtec before any additional fees apply. Standard plan set size is 11” x 17”.

I. Permitting authority will review the full sealed plan set and return with any required revisions or corrections noted as comments.

J. Romtec shall provide one full round of sealed plan revisions in response to permitting authority comments before any additional fees are allowed.

K. The following sections shall be included in Romtec’s preliminary Scope of Supply and Design Submittal.

Incomplete submittals will be rejected and returned for revision.

1. INTRODUCTION

2. BUILDING DESIGN,
(a) SUPPLIED ITEMS
(b) EXCLUDED ITEMS
(c) PLAN VIEW AND ELEVATION DRAWINGS

3. PRODUCT DATA

4. WARRANTY & LIMITATIONS
Note: Overall site plan is not part of Romtec’s scope.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Romtec’s freight shall be based on delivering the product on a 48’ to 53’ flatbed or van truck and trailers, or as close to those dimensions as can legally access the site. Overall dimensions of the truck and trailers are: 70’ overall length, 102” wide and 168” high.

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 2 of 7
B. Romtec shall deliver organized building package components in stages as shrink-wrapped pallets that correspond to a typical sequence of construction. A bill of material stating the stages of palletized components shall be included with every delivery. All stages as applicable.

1. Stage 1 pallets shall include structural components such as block, frames, vents, beams, connectors, trusses, etc.

2. Stage 2 pallets shall include second stage structural components such as filler wall material, windows, skylights, roofing, etc.

3. Stage 3 pallets shall include structural finish components such as siding material, tile, doors etc.

4. Stage 4 pallets shall include plumbing and electrical fixtures and other finish materials such as toilets, sinks, drinking fountains, electrical fixtures, accessories, etc.

C. Romtec shall coordinate the delivery with the receiving entity (owner, building installer, and/or contractor) as appropriate.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. The building package and all associated components provided by Romtec shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of not less than one (1) year from the date of acceptance. Acceptance is the date of delivery of the building package, or, if delivery is delayed for any reason beyond Romtec’s control, the date that the building and all its associated components were ready to deliver.

B. Romtec shall pass through to owner all relevant manufacturers’ warranties for individual products and components of the building package.

SECTION 2: BUILDING PACKAGE PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Romtec, Inc.,
18240 North Bank Road, Roseburg, OR 97470
Tel: 541-496-3541; Fax: 541-496-0803; Email: [email protected] Web: www.Romtec.com

2.2 BUILDING DESCRIPTION
A. Refer to plans for quantities, dimensions, locations, and installation methods for the materials and items described in this section.

B. Building dimensions shall match what is indicated on drawings.

C. Romtec will supply the building package products to owner.

D. Owner will supply the Romtec building package products to building installer and/or contractor.

2.3 PLUMBING FIXTURES & ACCESSORIES
A. Woodford model B67 box type backflow protected freezeless wall hydrant.

B. Woodford model 24 anti-siphon protected wall faucet.

2.4 ELECTRICAL
A. Interior and exterior light fixtures and controls.

1. Interior surface mount, 48” LED light fixtures.

2. Wafer LED recessed downlight, WF6 6” LED switchable white color temperature.

3. Acuity Controls, WCR PDT 16 Sensor switch.

4. nLight nDTC touch screen digital time clock.

5. nLight nIO PC Kit outdoor photocell interface kit.

6. nLight nPODMA wallpod: on/off & on/off+raise/lower.

7. NLight nPP16 EFP power/relay pack.

8. Sensor switch, WSXA Series wall switch sensor.

B. Main breaker panel.

1. Siemens breaker Panel shall be 200 Amp, single-phase.

Note: Breaker panel shall be sized to accept only the loads of the Romtec electrical fixture package. Romtec should modify the main breaker panel as needed to be most efficient based on any design changes.

2.5 STRUCTURE
A. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU).

1. Walls shall be constructed of 8"W x 16"L x 8"H smooth-face mortar joint concrete masonry units (concrete blocks).

2. Blocks shall be manufactured to ASTM C90 designation for load bearing concrete masonry units.

3. Block color to be Gray.

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 3 of 7
B. Exterior wall finish shall be Artisan shiplap fiber cement siding above Princeton Thin stone veneer.

1. Siding shall be mounted over OSB sheathing supplied by building supplier.

C. Wire weave gable vents for natural ventilation shall be supplied by building supplier.

1. Pre-assembled steel frame with 10-gauge, 1” square lock joint wire weave mesh integral insect screen.

2. Steel frame shall be powder coated RAL 8028 with undercoating.

D. Overhead Door 620 Series heavy-duty rolling service door.

E. Overhead Door 671 Series security grille system, push-up, upward-coiling, straight lattice.

1. Roll-up door to be powder coated in RAL 7045.

F. Door system components

1. Doors shall be Steelcraft® SL18 standard laminated honeycomb core and 18-gauge galvanized steel.

2. Door frame shall be pre-welded Steelcraft® 3-Sided flush frame, 16-gauge galvannealed A-60 steel.

3. Doors and frames to be primed and painted on-site by installer.

4. Masonry door clips (3/16” dia.) for door frame shall be fitted between the doorframe and concrete blocks to bond frame to wall. Door clips allow full internal grouting of the frame during installation.

5. Hinges shall meet ANSI A5112 with non-removable pin and two ball bearings.

6. Door closure shall be LCN-4111, grade 1, heavy duty closure with cast iron body, full complement bearing,

7. Doors to have aluminum alloy 6063, T5 temper synthetic rubber polymer blend neoprene sweeps, model 200NA, anodized aluminum finish.

8. Door locks shall be ND series grade 1 cylindrical locks.

9. Electrical room door to have louvered vent.

2.6 ROOFING
A. Roof system.

1. Glulam beam shall be 24F-V4 and architectural grade.

2. Tongue & groove decking shall be 2x6 V-edge deck boards, select deck Douglas fir.

B. Roofing shall be Fabral, 22-gauge, Stand ‘N Seam roof panels, with 16 in. coverage width.

1. Roofing package shall include inside and outside foam closures, matching trim (eaves, gables, and ridge) and fasteners, sheet metal flashing (all sides), and 30# felt (under metal).

2. Roofing color to be Charcoal.

SECTION 3: BUILDING INSTALLER SCOPE
The installing contractor or subcontractor, hereafter designated as the building installer, is responsible for building package installation. Building installer work will generally include foundation/pad construction and building package assembly/construction.

Note: Romtec’s scope is separate from the building installer’s scope. Romtec, Inc., is the approved building package supplier, not a designated building installer.

3.1 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS
A. If required by owner and/or reviewing authority, building installer shall submit product data sheets and relevant information about the specified building installer supplied products below for review and approval.

3.2 WARRANTY
A. Building installer’s work shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of not less than one (1) year from the date of acceptance. Acceptance is the date that installation work for the building package is completed, including any relevant final punch list. If final acceptance of the completed building is delayed for reasons beyond building installer’s control, the warranty shall be one (1) year from the completion of building installer’s installation work and demobilization.

B. Building installer shall pass through to owner all relevant manufacturers warranties for individual products and components supplied by building installer.

3.3 STRUCTURE
A. Masonry (concrete) grout shall be supplied and installed by building installer.

1. Grout shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days, 9+/-1” slump, with max ½” aggregate, or as required in final approved plans.

2. Fine or coarse grout may be used in accordance with 2009 UBC.

3. All CMU block must be fully grouted and may not be wetted.

Note: If required for installation, building installer will be responsible for providing appropriate equipment and labor for notching CMU block for bond beams, cutting CMU block to make any required shapes, and/or grinding CMU block for fixture mounting.

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 4 of 7
B. Rebar for walls shall be supplied and installed by building installer.

1. All walls shall have # 4 and # 5 rebar. See final approved plans for spacing.

2. All rebar used in the building must meet ASTM A615 manufacturing standards and is to be placed per the final approved plans.

C. Interior block wall finish shall be latex epoxy paint supplied and installed by building installer.

D. Interior floors to be sealed concrete epoxy finish supplied by building installer.

1. Cove base to be integral with flooring.

E. Sealant for all exposed wood shall be supplied and installed by building installer.

F. Sealant for all exterior CMU block is required, to be supplied and installed by building installer.

G. Fiber cement siding is primed to be painted on-site by building installer.

H. Doors and frames to arrive primed to be painted on-site by building installer.

I. Rain gutters and downspouts are supplied and installed by building installer.

3.4 ELECTRICAL
A. Electrical rough-in, installation and trim shall be provided by building installer.

1. All underground and/or overhead service to building shall be as specified in the final site plan.

2. Building installer is responsible for all necessary wire, connectors, grounding, conduit, and related items to install the building package electrical components and meet all relevant national, state, and local codes.

3. Building installer shall supply and install all switches and outlets required to complete the building package installation.

3.5 CAST IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR BUILDING PACKAGE
A. All equipment, labor, trades, and materials for cast-in-place concrete shall be provided by building installer.

1. Includes all materials and labor for building package foundations/footings and interior slabs.

B. Footings for the building package are to be dug by the building installer and poured on-site to meet local code for permanent structures. A prefabricated, modular mat placed on compacted base is not an accepted equal to a site specific, site poured, engineered foundation.

C. Engineered fill shall be ¾” minus crushed aggregate around footings, foundations, and slabs, or as required in the final approved plans.

D. Slab vapor barrier shall be 6-mil continuous plastic under the concrete slab, or as required in the final approved plans.

E. The foundation shall be installed as designed with all cast in-place concrete poured to dimensions specified, or as required in the final plans.

1. Footings will be built to minimum 24” depth or greater if required by local frost depth or permitting authority.

2. Minimum compressive strength of foundation concrete shall be 3,000 psi at 28 days, 4” +/-1” slump, with max ¾” aggregate, cured in accordance with ACI 308, or as required in approved final plans.

3. Slabs shall have a fine broom finish with joints required in flat work as shown on plans.

4. Steel rebar shall be installed as specified in final plans.

F. Building installer shall supply and install concrete slab sealer.

1. Concrete slab sealer shall be a water-based, transparent curing, sealing and dust proofing compound with two (2) coats to be applied per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.6 PLUMBING
A. Plumbing rough-in, installation and trim within 10’ of the building footprint shall be provided by building installer.

1. All underground water service and sewer drain(s) from building to be as specified in final approved site plan.

2. Building water shutoff valve, drain, and all rough piping shall be as shown on final building plans. Final installation location to be determined onsite.

3. Install the building package plumbing fixtures per the final approved plans.

4. Piping shall be installed per the final approved plans with minimum pipe sizing per 2009 Uniform Plumbing Code Section 610.

B. Floor drains in the building shall be supplied and installed by building installer.

1. All floor drains shall be as shown on final approved plans.

3.7 OTHER MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT
A. Unless otherwise specified, the following products and materials are supplied by building installer (if applicable).

1. Building package installation

2. Cast-in-place concrete foundations, footings, interior slabs.

3. Concrete slab sealer

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 5 of 7

4. Mortar

5. Concrete grout

6. Rebar

7. Latex epoxy paint

8. Caulk for siding

9. Plumbing rough in, installation and trim

10. Electrical rough in, installation and trim

11. Switches & outlets

12. Typical fasteners; for example: roofing nails, staples, etc.

13. Fasteners not included in product packaging.

14. Wood sealant for all decking, glulam beams, posts, and extensions

15. All other items within the building footprint indicated on final plans or required by building codes to complete installation of the building package which are not specifically stated as supplied by owner or contractor.

3.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The building installer will coordinate with owner and/or Romtec to receive delivery of the building package onsite. This includes all equipment and labor required for off-loading of the delivered building package.

B. The building installer will assume responsibility for adequate protection and maintenance of delivered building package materials from weather, damage, and pilferage during installation work. Any failure to adequately protect building package materials that affects the warranty of those materials will be at building installer’s expense.

C. Building installer shall collect and maintain for final delivery to owner any operation & maintenance manuals included by individual product manufacturers with their respective product packaging. Any failure to collect, maintain, and/or deliver these O&M manuals to the owner that results in fees from Romtec for additional copies shall be at building installer’s expense.

SECTION 4: CONTRACTOR SCOPE ITEMS
The items in this section may be provided by the same building installer as defined in Section 3 above (typically when a single entity is acting as both the building installer and contractor), or the items in this section may be provided by a separate entity such as a general contractor or site contractor, hereafter designated as contractor (typically when the building installer is a separate subcontractor). Contractor work will generally include site preparation and grading, excavations for structures, backfill and/or structural backfill, and any site or utility work outside the building package footprint.

Items in this section are generally to be completed prior to building installer beginning its installation work described in Section 3 above.

4.1 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS
A. If required by owner and/or reviewing authority, contractor shall submit product data sheets and relevant information about the specified contractor supplied products below for review and approval.

4.2 WARRANTY
A. Building installer’s work shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of not less than one (1) year from the date of acceptance. Acceptance is the date that installation work for the building package is completed, including any relevant final punch list. If final acceptance of the completed building is delayed for reasons beyond building installer’s control, the warranty shall be one (1) year from the completion of building installer’s installation work and demobilization.

B. Building installer shall pass through to owner all relevant manufacturers warranties for individual products and components supplied by building installer.

4.3 ELECTRICAL
A. Incoming electrical utility lines to within approximately 10’ of the building shall be provided by contractor.

1. All underground and/or overhead service to building shall be as specified in the final site plan.

2. Electric meter base and all rough wiring, switches, plugs and circuit breakers shall be as shown on final plans.

3. Contractor supplies and installs the meter base and meter.

4.4 CAST IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR BUILDING EXTERIOR
A. All equipment, labor, trades, and materials shall be supplied by contractor.

1. Includes all materials and labor for exterior/entry slabs and sidewalks.

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 6 of 7
B. Refer to drawings for sidewalks and entry slabs.

1. Minimum concrete compressive strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days.

2. Remesh or rebar reinforcement shall be used in sidewalks.

3. All sidewalks shall be finished with a fine broom with control joints installed per the final approved site plan.

4.5 PLUMBING
A. Incoming plumbing to within approximately 10’ of the building shall be provided by contractor.

1. All underground water service and sewer drain(s) from building to be as specified in final approved site plan.

2. Building water shutoff valve is to be supplied and installed by contractor.

3. Contractor is responsible to ensure that incoming water pressure is sufficient to meet building package fixture demands.

4. Minimum water pressure at toilet and urinal flush valves shall be 40 psi with minimum pipe sizing as per 2009 Uniform Plumbing Code Section 610, or as required in final approved plans.

B. Water line drain valve shall be supplied and installed by contractor.

C. Sewer line backflow check valve shall be supplied and installed by contractor.

4.6 OTHER MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT
A. Unless otherwise specified, the following products and materials are supplied by contractor.

1. All items not specifically listed as supplied by owner or building installer.

2. Any item listed as supplied by “contractor” or “others.” B. Unless specified in the plans or submittals, contractor supplies the following (if applicable):

1. Incoming electrical, water, sewer, and gas utilities.

2. Asphalt paving

3. Masonry pavers

4. Sidewalks

5. Landscaping

6. Site grading

7. Exterior/entry slabs

8. Drain valves and backflow check valves.

9. Branch circuit breakers

10. Irrigation Equipment

11. Fire alarm and fire suppression equipment.

12. Lighting equipment not attached to the building.

13. All other items exterior of the building footprint indicated on final plans or required by building codes which are not specifically stated as supplied by owner or building installer.

4.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The contractor will assume responsibility for adequate protection and maintenance of the installed building package materials after completion of installation work by building installer. Any failure to adequately protect building package materials that affects the warranty of those materials will be at contractor’s expense.

SECTION 5: OWNER’S SCOPE

5.1 ONGOING MAINTENANCE
A. Owner is responsible for ongoing maintenance of the completed restroom building after completion of work by building installer and contractor.

5.2 SITE PLAN
A. Owner (or owner’s site engineer) is responsible for providing the final approved site plan to Romtec and/or building installer.

5.3 SPECIAL INSPECTION
A. If required, special inspection(s) services shall be provided by owner.

B. If special inspection(s) are required by the permitting authority or relevant agency(ies), then Romtec, building installer, and/or contractor shall provide reasonable assistance to the owner to accommodate the special inspection(s).

5.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Owner will coordinate with Romtec, building installer, and/or contractor to receive delivery of the building package onsite.

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 7 of 7

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 1 of 7

CARLSBAD VETERANS MEMORIAL PARK (SOUTH BUILDING)
SECTION 13 34 23 - PRE-ENGINEERED ROMTEC BUILDING
Specification Date: 6/4/2025
SECTION 1: BUILDING PACKAGE OVERVIEW

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Owner will provide a pre-engineered Romtec building package for onsite installation by the building installer and/or contractor (see definitions and scope of work in sections below).

B. The following is an overview of the scope and products included in the Romtec building package.

1.2 OVERVIEW
A. Building package design, engineering, and furnishing all specified building package components shall be provided by Romtec, Inc.

B. The building and its concrete footings, foundation, and slab shall be engineered by Romtec to meet site specific conditions including wind and snow loading, local frost depth, and ground conditions.

C. Building shall be designed to meet local codes and permitting authority approvals for permanent structures.

D. The reviewing authority reserves the right to review or reject all submittals at its sole discretion.

E. All work and materials shall comply with the latest industry building codes and regulations for the state where the project is located.

F. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) will be followed in design, manufacture, and construction.

1.3 DESIGN & SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTATION
A. Romtec’s work shall include the design of the architectural, mechanical, structural, and electrical components that will be required for this building.

B. The building will be designed as a complete building package to be delivered to the job site for construction on- site by the building installer and/or contractor.

C. Romtec shall submit the packaged restroom building preliminary Scope of Supply and Design Submittal (SSDS), including the building plan view and elevation drawings.

D. Romtec will provide complete submittal documentation in the Romtec’s standard electronic submittal format for review.

E. The preliminary SSDS will be reviewed by relevant parties and returned to Romtec with any required revisions to the terms, product data sheets, and/or building plan view and elevation drawings noted as comments.

F. Romtec shall make any required corrections or revisions and resubmit the preliminary SSDS until the preliminary SSDS is approved by the relevant parties.

G. Once the preliminary SSDS has been approved, Romtec will provide full sealed plan sets stamped by an engineer licensed in the state that the building is located for review by the permitting authority.

H. Up to three (3) wet-stamped sets of the plans and structural calculations shall be provided by Romtec before any additional fees apply. Standard plan set size is 11” x 17”.

I. Permitting authority will review the full sealed plan set and return with any required revisions or corrections noted as comments.

J. Romtec shall provide one full round of sealed plan revisions in response to permitting authority comments before any additional fees are allowed.

K. The following sections shall be included in Romtec’s preliminary Scope of Supply and Design Submittal.

Incomplete submittals will be rejected and returned for revision.

1. INTRODUCTION

2. BUILDING DESIGN,
(a) SUPPLIED ITEMS
(b) EXCLUDED ITEMS
(c) PLAN VIEW AND ELEVATION DRAWINGS

3. PRODUCT DATA

4. WARRANTY & LIMITATIONS
Note: Overall site plan is not part of Romtec’s scope.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Romtec’s freight shall be based on delivering the product on a 48’ to 53’ flatbed or van truck and trailers, or as close to those dimensions as can legally access the site. Overall dimensions of the truck and trailers are: 70’ overall length, 102” wide and 168” high.

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 2 of 7
B. Romtec shall deliver organized building package components in stages as shrink-wrapped pallets that correspond to a typical sequence of construction. A bill of material stating the stages of palletized components shall be included with every delivery. All stages as applicable.

1. Stage 1 pallets shall include structural components such as block, frames, vents, beams, connectors, trusses, etc.

2. Stage 2 pallets shall include second stage structural components such as filler wall material, windows, skylights, roofing, etc.

3. Stage 3 pallets shall include structural finish components such as siding material, tile, doors etc.

4. Stage 4 pallets shall include plumbing and electrical fixtures and other finish materials such as toilets, sinks, drinking fountains, electrical fixtures, accessories, etc.

C. Romtec shall coordinate the delivery with the receiving entity (owner, building installer, and/or contractor) as appropriate.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. The building package and all associated components provided by Romtec shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of not less than one (1) year from the date of acceptance. Acceptance is the date of delivery of the building package, or, if delivery is delayed for any reason beyond Romtec’s control, the date that the building and all its associated components were ready to deliver.

B. Romtec shall pass through to owner all relevant manufacturers’ warranties for individual products and components of the building package.

SECTION 2: BUILDING PACKAGE PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Romtec, Inc.,
18240 North Bank Road, Roseburg, OR 97470
Tel: 541-496-3541; Fax: 541-496-0803; Email: [email protected] Web: www.Romtec.com

2.2 BUILDING DESCRIPTION
A. Refer to plans for quantities, dimensions, locations, and installation methods for the materials and items described in this section.

B. Building dimensions shall match what is indicated on drawings.

C. Romtec will supply the building package products to owner.

D. Owner will supply the Romtec building package products to building installer and/or contractor.

2.3 PLUMBING FIXTURES & ACCESSORIES
A. Toilet shall be wall mount, top supply, stainless steel fixtures.

1. Flush valve shall be a chrome, manual lever with ADA compliant metal oscillating non-hold-open handle.

B. Lavatory shall be 18 in. x 22 in. wall hung stainless steel fixtures.

1. Faucets shall be deck mounted single supply metering, sink faucet.

C. Grab bars shall be stainless steel.

D. Mirror shall be 18” x 36”, framed with one-piece, roll-formed stainless steel with ¾” face and neatly mitered corners.

E. Koala Kare Products, KB112-01CT countertop surface mounted baby changing station.

F. Foor mount, Mustee 24” x 24” mop service basin 63m with 63.600A service sink faucet, holder, and guard.

G. Woodford model 67 wall hydrant.

H. Woodford model 24 anti-siphon protected wall faucet.

I. California Title 24 all gender restroom door symbol signage.

J. HDPE countertops with steel frame.

2.4 ELECTRICAL
A. Interior and exterior light fixtures and controls.

1. Interior surface mount, 48” LED light fixtures.

2. Wafer LED recessed downlight, WF6 6” LED switchable white color temperature.

3. Acuity Controls, WCR PDT 16 Sensor switch.

4. nLight nDTC touch screen digital time clock.

5. nLight nIO PC Kit outdoor photocell interface kit.

6. nLight nPODMA wallpod: on/off & on/off+raise/lower.

7. NLight nPP16 EFP power/relay pack.

8. Sensor switch, WSXA Series wall switch sensor.

B. Electric water heater to be commercial grade DEN-40 with 40-gallon capacity.

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 3 of 7
C. Mechanical exhaust package with inline fans.

D. Thru-wall, Murdock Super Secur, Fastaire model HD-03 hand dryers.

E. Main breaker panel.

1. Siemens breaker Panel shall be 200 Amp, single-phase.

Note: Breaker panel shall be sized to accept only the loads of the Romtec electrical fixture package. Romtec should modify the main breaker panel as needed to be most efficient based on any design changes.

2.5 STRUCTURE
A. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU).

1. Walls shall be constructed of 8"W x 16"L x 8"H smooth-face mortar joint concrete masonry units (concrete blocks).

2. Blocks shall be manufactured to ASTM C90 designation for load bearing concrete masonry units.

3. Block color to be Gray.

B. Exterior wall finish shall be Artisan shiplap siding above Princeton Thin stone veneer.

1. Siding shall be mounted over OSB sheathing supplied by building supplier.

C. Overhead Door 671 Series, security grille system, push up, upward-coiling with straight lattice.

1. Roll-up door to be powder coated RAL 7045.

D. Door system components

1. Doors shall be Steelcraft® SL18 standard laminated honeycomb core and 18-gauge galvanized steel.

2. Door frame shall be pre-welded Steelcraft® 3-Sided flush frame, 16-gauge galvannealed A-60 steel.

3. Doors and frames to be primed and painted on-site by building installer.

4. Masonry door clips (3/16” dia.) for door frame shall be fitted between the doorframe and concrete blocks to bond frame to wall. Door clips allow full internal grouting of the frame during installation.

5. Hinges shall meet ANSI A5112 with non-removable pin and two ball bearings.

6. Door closure shall be LCN-4111, grade 1, heavy duty closure with cast iron body, full complement bearing,

7. Doors to have aluminum alloy 6063, T5 temper synthetic rubber polymer blend neoprene sweeps, model 200NA, anodized aluminum finish.

8. Restroom doors to have lever handle locks with thumb turn deadbolt lock with occupancy indicator.

9. All other door locks shall be ND series grade 1 cylindrical locks.

10. Doors to have lever locks with latch guards.

11. Restroom doors to have 18” x 18” louvered vents.

12. Mechanical room door to have louvered vent.

13. Restroom doors to have magnetic locking system.
(i) Magnet locks, Hager 2942
(ii) Hager 2903, Provides constant power for fall safe and fall secure locking devices. (iii) Exit switch, Hager 2977
(iv) PIR egress sensor, Hager 2-679-0612
(v) Intermatic digital in-wall timer, ST01 Series.

2.6 ROOFING
A. Roof system.

1. Glulam beam shall be 24F-V4 and architectural grade.

2. Tongue & groove decking shall be 2x6 V-edge deck boards, select deck Douglas fir.

B. Velux model FS, deck mount, 24” x 24” skylights.

C. Roofing shall be Fabral, 22-gauge, Stand ‘N Seam roof panels, with 16 in. coverage width.

1. Roofing package shall include inside and outside foam closures, matching trim (eaves, gables, and ridge) and fasteners, sheet metal flashing (all sides), and 30# felt (under metal).

2. Roofing color to be Dark Bronze.

SECTION 3: BUILDING INSTALLER SCOPE
The installing contractor or subcontractor, hereafter designated as the building installer, is responsible for building package installation. Building installer work will generally include foundation/pad construction and building package assembly/construction.

Note: Romtec’s scope is separate from the building installer’s scope. Romtec, Inc., is the approved building package supplier, not a designated building installer.

3.1 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS
A. If required by owner and/or reviewing authority, building installer shall submit product data sheets and relevant information about the specified building installer supplied products below for review and approval.

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 4 of 7

3.2 WARRANTY
A. Building installer’s work shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of not less than one (1) year from the date of acceptance. Acceptance is the date that installation work for the building package is completed, including any relevant final punch list. If final acceptance of the completed building is delayed for reasons beyond building installer’s control, the warranty shall be one (1) year from the completion of building installer’s installation work and demobilization.

B. Building installer shall pass through to owner all relevant manufacturers warranties for individual products and components supplied by building installer.

3.3 STRUCTURE
A. Masonry (concrete) grout shall be supplied and installed by building installer.

1. Grout shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days, 9+/-1” slump, with max ½” aggregate, or as required in final approved plans.

2. Fine or coarse grout may be used in accordance with 2009 UBC.

3. All CMU block must be fully grouted and may not be wetted.

Note: If required for installation, building installer will be responsible for providing appropriate equipment and labor for notching CMU block for bond beams, cutting CMU block to make any required shapes, and/or grinding CMU block for fixture mounting.

B. Rebar for walls shall be supplied and installed by building installer.

1. All walls shall have # 4 and # 5 rebar. See final approved plans for spacing.

2. All rebar used in the building must meet ASTM A615 manufacturing standards and is to be placed per the final approved plans.

C. Interior block wall finish shall be latex epoxy paint supplied and installed by building installer.

D. Gypsum board ceiling finish shall be supplied and installed by building installer per the final approved plans.

E. Interior floors to be sealed concrete epoxy finish supplied by building installer.

1. Cove base to be integral with flooring.

F. Sealant for all exposed wood shall be supplied and installed by building installer.

G. Sealant for all exterior CMU block is required, to be supplied and installed by building installer.

H. Siding is primed to be painted on-site by building installer.

I. Doors and frames to arrive primed to be painted on-site by building installer.

J. Rain gutters and downspouts are supplied and installed by building installer.

3.4 ELECTRICAL
A. Electrical rough-in, installation and trim shall be provided by building installer.

1. All underground and/or overhead service to building shall be as specified in the final site plan.

2. Building installer is responsible for all necessary wire, connectors, grounding, conduit, and related items to install the building package electrical components and meet all relevant national, state, and local codes.

3. Building installer shall supply and install all switches and outlets required to complete the building package installation.

3.5 CAST IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR BUILDING PACKAGE
A. All equipment, labor, trades, and materials for cast-in-place concrete shall be provided by building installer.

1. Includes all materials and labor for building package foundations/footings and interior slabs.

B. Footings for the building package are to be dug by the building installer and poured on-site to meet local code for permanent structures. A prefabricated, modular mat placed on compacted base is not an accepted equal to a site specific, site poured, engineered foundation.

C. Engineered fill shall be ¾” minus crushed aggregate around footings, foundations, and slabs, or as required in the final approved plans.

D. Slab vapor barrier shall be 6-mil continuous plastic under the concrete slab, or as required in the final approved plans.

E. The foundation shall be installed as designed with all cast in-place concrete poured to dimensions specified, or as required in the final plans.

1. Footings will be built to minimum 24” depth or greater if required by local frost depth or permitting authority.

2. Minimum compressive strength of foundation concrete shall be 3,000 psi at 28 days, 4” +/-1” slump, with max ¾” aggregate, cured in accordance with ACI 308, or as required in approved final plans.

3. Slabs shall have a fine broom finish with joints required in flat work as shown on plans.

4. Steel rebar shall be installed as specified in final plans.

F. Building installer shall supply and install concrete slab sealer.

1. Concrete slab sealer shall be a water-based, transparent curing, sealing and dust proofing compound with two (2) coats to be applied per manufacturer’s instructions.

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 5 of 7

3.6 PLUMBING
A. Plumbing rough-in, installation and trim within 10’ of the building footprint shall be provided by building installer.

1. All underground water service and sewer drain(s) from building to be as specified in final approved site plan.

2. Building water shutoff valve, drain, and all rough piping shall be as shown on final building plans. Final installation location to be determined onsite.

3. Install the building package plumbing fixtures per the final approved plans.

4. Piping shall be installed per the final approved plans with minimum pipe sizing per 2009 Uniform Plumbing Code Section 610.

B. Floor drains in the building shall be supplied and installed by building installer.

1. All floor drains shall be as shown on final approved plans.

3.7 OTHER MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT
A. Unless otherwise specified, the following products and materials are supplied by building installer (if applicable).

1. Building package installation

2. Cast-in-place concrete foundations, footings, interior slabs.

3. Concrete slab sealer

4. Mortar

5. Concrete grout

6. Rebar

7. Latex epoxy paint

8. Caulk for siding

9. Plumbing rough in, installation and trim

10. Electrical rough in, installation and trim

11. Switches & outlets

12. Typical fasteners; for example: roofing nails, staples, etc.

13. Fasteners not included in product packaging.

14. Wood sealant for all decking, glulam beams, posts, and extensions

15. All other items within the building footprint indicated on final plans or required by building codes to complete installation of the building package which are not specifically stated as supplied by owner or contractor.

3.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The building installer will coordinate with owner and/or Romtec to receive delivery of the building package onsite. This includes all equipment and labor required for off-loading of the delivered building package.

B. The building installer will assume responsibility for adequate protection and maintenance of delivered building package materials from weather, damage, and pilferage during installation work. Any failure to adequately protect building package materials that affects the warranty of those materials will be at building installer’s expense.

C. Building installer shall collect and maintain for final delivery to owner any operation & maintenance manuals included by individual product manufacturers with their respective product packaging. Any failure to collect, maintain, and/or deliver these O&M manuals to the owner that results in fees from Romtec for additional copies shall be at building installer’s expense.

SECTION 4: CONTRACTOR SCOPE ITEMS
The items in this section may be provided by the same building installer as defined in Section 3 above (typically when a single entity is acting as both the building installer and contractor), or the items in this section may be provided by a separate entity such as a general contractor or site contractor, hereafter designated as contractor (typically when the building installer is a separate subcontractor). Contractor work will generally include site preparation and grading, excavations for structures, backfill and/or structural backfill, and any site or utility work outside the building package footprint.

Items in this section are generally to be completed prior to building installer beginning its installation work described in Section 3 above.

4.1 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 6 of 7
A. If required by owner and/or reviewing authority, contractor shall submit product data sheets and relevant information about the specified contractor supplied products below for review and approval.

4.2 WARRANTY
A. Building installer’s work shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of not less than one (1) year from the date of acceptance. Acceptance is the date that installation work for the building package is completed, including any relevant final punch list. If final acceptance of the completed building is delayed for reasons beyond building installer’s control, the warranty shall be one (1) year from the completion of building installer’s installation work and demobilization.

B. Building installer shall pass through to owner all relevant manufacturers warranties for individual products and components supplied by building installer.

4.3 ELECTRICAL
A. Incoming electrical utility lines to within approximately 10’ of the building shall be provided by contractor.

1. All underground and/or overhead service to building shall be as specified in the final site plan.

2. Electric meter base and all rough wiring, switches, plugs and circuit breakers shall be as shown on final plans.

3. Contractor supplies and installs the meter base and meter.

4.4 CAST IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR BUILDING EXTERIOR
A. All equipment, labor, trades, and materials shall be supplied by contractor.

1. Includes all materials and labor for exterior/entry slabs and sidewalks.

B. Refer to drawings for sidewalks and entry slabs.

1. Minimum concrete compressive strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days.

2. Remesh or rebar reinforcement shall be used in sidewalks.

3. All sidewalks shall be finished with a fine broom with control joints installed per the final approved site plan.

4.5 PLUMBING
A. Incoming plumbing to within approximately 10’ of the building shall be provided by contractor.

1. All underground water service and sewer drain(s) from building to be as specified in final approved site plan.

2. Building water shutoff valve is to be supplied and installed by contractor.

3. Contractor is responsible to ensure that incoming water pressure is sufficient to meet building package fixture demands.

4. Minimum water pressure at toilet and urinal flush valves shall be 40 psi with minimum pipe sizing as per 2009 Uniform Plumbing Code Section 610, or as required in final approved plans.

B. Water line drain valve shall be supplied and installed by contractor.

C. Sewer line backflow check valve shall be supplied and installed by contractor.

4.6 OTHER MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT
A. Unless otherwise specified, the following products and materials are supplied by contractor.

1. All items not specifically listed as supplied by owner or building installer.

2. Any item listed as supplied by “contractor” or “others.” B. Unless specified in the plans or submittals, contractor supplies the following (if applicable):

1. Incoming electrical, water, sewer, and gas utilities.

2. Asphalt paving

3. Masonry pavers

4. Sidewalks

5. Landscaping

6. Site grading

7. Exterior/entry slabs

8. Drain valves and backflow check valves.

9. Branch circuit breakers

10. Irrigation Equipment

11. Fire alarm and fire suppression equipment.

12. Lighting equipment not attached to the building.

13. All other items exterior of the building footprint indicated on final plans or required by building codes which are not specifically stated as supplied by owner or building installer.

4.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Romtec Inc.
13 34 23 – Pre-Engineered Romtec Building Page 7 of 7
A. The contractor will assume responsibility for adequate protection and maintenance of the installed building package materials after completion of installation work by building installer. Any failure to adequately protect building package materials that affects the warranty of those materials will be at contractor’s expense.

SECTION 5: OWNER’S SCOPE

5.1 ONGOING MAINTENANCE
A. Owner is responsible for ongoing maintenance of the completed restroom building after completion of work by building installer and contractor.

5.2 SITE PLAN
A. Owner (or owner’s site engineer) is responsible for providing the final approved site plan to Romtec and/or building installer.

5.3 SPECIAL INSPECTION
A. If required, special inspection(s) services shall be provided by owner.

B. If special inspection(s) are required by the permitting authority or relevant agency(ies), then Romtec, building installer, and/or contractor shall provide reasonable assistance to the owner to accommodate the special inspection(s).

5.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Owner will coordinate with Romtec, building installer, and/or contractor to receive delivery of the building package onsite.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
270500 August 26, 2025 1

SECTION 27 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work shall consist of the design, provision, termination, testing and documentation of a complete and fully functional structured high-performance copper and optical fiber communications cabling system.

The instructions in this section are specific to communications installations and should be read in conjunction with other contract documents and Dolores Huerta Foundation ITS Communications Systems Design Standards as applicable.

B. Where there are discrepancies between the drawings and the specification, herein, and related specification’s sections, Contractor shall be responsible to providing the more onerous solution.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 27 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems B. 27 05 28 – Pathways for Communications Systems
C. 27 11 00 – Communications Equipment Room Fittings
D. 27 13 00 – Communications Backbone Cabling
E. 27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The communications cabling system installation work detailed in this section shall be carried out by a specialist installer company. The installer shall be certified by the system manufacturer (or manufacturers) in the installation and testing of the cabling system.

B. The installer shall have a proven track record in the field of telephone and data (high performance copper and optical fiber) cabling system installation. The installer shall have completed at least three previous installations of comparable size, complexity and manpower within the last three years. Each installation shall utilize components, installation practices and testing procedure equivalent to those specified in this document.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
270500 August 26, 2025 2

C. The Installer shall hold a valid State Contractors License for the duration of the project. The Installer shall be responsible for obtaining permits and other requirements for performing work on this project. All costs associated with obtaining permits and other documentation shall be included in the bid sum for the project.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Throughout this specification, the following definitions will apply:

1. Provide: Supply, furnish, deliver, install, pull, fix, dress, terminate, label, test, ground and document the components as per these specifications.

2. Entrance Facility (EF): An entrance to a building for both public and private network service cables, including wireless, mechanical and electrical services, and the entrance point at the building wall, and continuing to the entrance room or space. Also known as building entrance, demarcation point (demarc) and entrance room or space.

3. Equipment Rooms (ERs), also known as MDF (Main Distribution Frame) Rooms or BDF (Building Distribution Frame) Rooms, are special-purpose rooms that provide space and maintain a suitable operating environment for the termination of backbone and campus cabling and house centralized communications and/ or computer equipment (such as Core Switches and Servers).

4. Telecommunications Rooms (TRs), also known as IDF Closets, Telecommunications Closets or Tele/Data Rooms are floor-serving spaces that provide a connection point between backbone and horizontal distribution pathways.

5. Backbone Cables: Cables interconnecting the Equipment Room (ER) and Telecommunications Rooms (TRs).

6. Link Cables: Cables interconnecting Telecommunications Rooms (TRs).

7. Horizontal Cables: Cables interconnecting the Telecommunications Rooms (TRs) to each workstation outlet.

8. External Cables: Cables that interconnect the building to external connection point(s) and/or other building(s). These cables are considered to be Outside Plant (OSP).

9. Station Cables: Cables linking workstation outlet to active equipment.

10. Client: Dolores Huerta Foundation

11. Construction Manager at Risk: TBD

12. Architect: RODRIGUEZ ASSOCIATES
ARCHITECTS & PLANNERS, INC.

13. Consultant: Vantage Technology Consulting Group

14. Bidder: A company invited to bid for the works

15. Installer/Contractor: The Company installing the equipment as defined in this specification Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
270500 August 26, 2025 3

16. Owner’s Representative: Vantage Technology Consulting Group

1.5 MANUFACTURER’S COMPLETE SYSTEM
A. The cabling system specified in this document shall be an end-to-end solution that is sourced from a single manufacturer or partnered manufacturers. Unless explicitly noted within these specifications, this shall include patch panels, connectors, cables, patch cords, face plates and other associated components.

B. Where it is specified that a system be provided by “manufacturer xxx or equal”, a substitution of another manufacturer’s products will only be considered for a complete end -to-end solution of equal quality, as determined by the Owner’s Representative. All substitutions shall conform to the substitution requirements detailed in the specifications. In instances where these specifications do not include the statement “or equal” for a particular component or system, substitutions will not be entertained.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Prior to bidding , visit the site and determine all existing conditions affecting work. The Bidder shall examine all drawings and specifications to familiarize themselves with the type of construction to be used, and the nature and extent of work provided by other trades.

B. Verify dimensions and the correct location of hardware before proceeding with the installation of hardware, cabling and/or connections.

C. Contractor to field verify the location of all communications infrastructure and confirm it is in conformance to industry standards. This would include bend radius, pathways accessibility, pathways lengths to MDF/IDF or other conditions that would impair t he ability of the contractor from adhering to these specifications.

D. The contractor shall notify the Owners' Representative in writing via RFI immediately on discovery of construction discrepancies or other conditions detrimental to proper performance of the Work. In the event the contractor installs systems components that do not meet this specification , it will be the responsibility of the contractor to revise the installation at no cost to the owner.

1.7 PERSONNEL
A. The personnel who will be employed on the contract shall be suitably trained in the management of a project of this nature and/or in the installation and maintenance of products of the type being provided to be able to carry out all work in a competent manner.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
270500 August 26, 2025 4

B. The Installer shall provide a site manager responsible for all site -related issues. This individual shall be the single point of contact for the project team and shall carry a mobile phone so they can be contacted during the working hours of the project.

C. The Installer shall be certified by the component manufacturer(s) in the installation and testing of the cabling system and shall be able to provide a manufacturers’ extended performance warranty for the end- to-end cabling system.

1.8 LABELING AND NUMBERING SCHEME
A. Labeling of the cabling system shall be in accordance with ANSI/TIA-606-C Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure, unless otherwise directed by the Owner.

B. The contractor shall submit for approval the proposed numbering scheme prior to removal of any temporary labeling.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Installation Warranty.

1. Installer to provide a warranty for one year from Notice of Completion on all materials and workmanship installed or supplied as part of the cabling system. The warranty shall cover all labor and materials necessary to correct a failed portion of the system and to demonstrate performance within the original installation specifications after repairs are accomplished. This warranty shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Cabling System Warranty:

1. The contractor shall facilitate a 20-year system performance warranty between the manufacturer and the Owner. A component warranty shall be provided which warrants functionality of all components used in the system for 20 years from the date of acceptance. The performance warranty shall warrant the installed horizontal copper, and both the horizontal and the backbone optical fiber portions of the cabling.

C. Post Installation Series:

1. The contractor shall furnish an hourly rate with the proposal submittal which shall be valid for a period of one year from the date of acceptance. This rate will be used when cabling support is required to affect moves, adds, and changes to the system (MAC s). MACs shall not void the Contractor’s nor manufacturer’s warranty.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
270500 August 26, 2025 5

1.10 QUALITY
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete provision and installation of all components as specified herein. The Contractor shall provide all tools, equipment, fixtures, appliances, ancillary piece parts and hardware as necessary to complete the assembly and installation as required. The Owner’s Representative may conduct scheduled or unscheduled inspections of the Contractor’s work at any time during construction. All work included in the scope assigned to the contractor that is associated with this project shall be accomplished in a workmanlike manner, installed and assembled plumb, level and square.

The product shall be delivered to the Owne r finished, complete, and ready to operate according to the manufacturer’s specifications.

B. All installation work shall be completed to the standard of the samples approved by the Owner ’s Representative during the submittal process. Any products not installed to the quality detailed in these specifications and approved in the submittal process shall be reworked by the Installer to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. All equipment and components shall be installed per the manufacture r’s directions and installation instructions. Any products not installed per manufacturer guidelines shall be reworked by the Installer to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.11 STANDARDS
A. All materials provided by the Installer shall meet the requirements of the following where applicable:

1. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)

4. Intertek Electrical Testing Labs (ETL)
B. All products, services and documentation provided by the Installer shall meet the requirements of the following where applicable. Use latest edition or edition adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1. National Electric Code (NEC) – NFPA 70

2. National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code - NFPA 72

3. Relevant State Electric and Fire Codes

4. ANSI/TIA-568.0-E Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises

5. ANSI/TIA-568.1-E Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

6. ANSI/TIA-568.2-D Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components

7. ANSI/TIA-568.3-D Optical Fiber Cabling Components
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
270500 August 26, 2025 6

8. ANSI/TIA-568.4-D Broadband Coaxial Cabling and Components

9. ANSI/TIA-569-E Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

10. ANSI/TIA-606-C Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure

11. ANSI/TIA-607-C Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises

12. Manufacturer’s design and installation agreements.

13. BICSI publications:
a. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual
b. Network Design Reference Manual
c. Information Transport Systems Installation Manual
d. Customer-Owned Outside Plant Design Manual
C. All publications referred to in this document shall be the latest edition.

1.12 SUBMITTALS
A. Project References

1. Submit for approval, references for a minimum of three similar projects successfully undertaken and completed within the last three years. These projects should be a similar scale, complexity and have similar time scales as this project.

2. Provide project name and address, client contact name and telephone number and construction manager name and telephone number. Provide a brief description of each project indicating types of system installed, quantities and configurations of outlets and p roject time scales.

3. At least two of the references shall be located within 100 miles of the project and shall be available for the Owner ’s Representative and other members of the Design Team to visit and inspect the installation, should, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, this be necessary.

4. These references are intended to show that the Installer has successfully completed similar projects. Failure to produce satisfactory references may result in the bid being deemed non - compliant.

B. Product Literature/Data Sheets

1. Submit for approval manufacturer's product data sheets for each component of the telephone and data cabling systems contained within this specification and associated documentation. Certify that the data sheets depict the components to be provided by the I nstaller to make up the complete system as described in this specification.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
270500 August 26, 2025 7

2. Submit the required information for all products within a specification Section at one time unless the Owner’s Representative has given prior approval to submit information otherwise.

3. Equipment installed and not approved for installation via the submittal process will be replaced at no expense to the Owner.

C. Personnel Training

1. Prior to installation, submit for approval records regarding the management, installation, and testing personnel to be used on the project. These records shall include resumes, training certificates, previous work experience details (especially on reference projects) and other relevant information.

2. Submit records to confirm that the personnel who will be employed in an installation capacity are suitably trained in the installation and maintenance of equipment and systems of the type being provided.

3. Submit records to confirm that the personnel that will be responsible for testing the system are suitably trained in the operation of the test equipment being used in this project.

D. Shop Drawing and Cabling Diagram

1. Submit, for approval, a complete shop drawings and single line cabling diagram. The diagram shall be based on the single line drawing included in the Construction Documents and show all ER/MDF, TR/IDF and cable termination points or pass -through locations in the interior building horizontal/riser pathways and incoming/outgoing exterior pathways.

2. Single line to be coordinated with building riser diagrams and reflect for record the building conduits used cable quantities in each bundle and conduits with spare capacity.

3. Single line to show quantities and part numbers for all typical components including faceplates, patch panels, cable, equipment racks, splice cases and all other system components.

E. Test Equipment

1. Submit, for approval, details of each item of test equipment to be used to test the optical fiber and copper components. Include patch cords and other specialized components.

2. Submit for approval a written description of the cable (copper/fiber) testing procedure indicating each test to be performed, and the process of correcting any failures prior to commencement testing for approval. Any testing to copper/fiber components performed without an approved test procedure shall be retested at the contractor’s expense.

3. Contractor to provide certification of calibration dated within one (1) year of installation date. Any testing to copper/fiber components performed without calibration certification is to be retested upon certification at the contractor’s expense.

F. Component Samples and Mock-ups
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
270500 August 26, 2025 8

1. Upon request, p rovide one full size installation sample mock -up of each of the following components for approval. All samples are to be fully labeled as per these specifications. Samples are to be delivered to the Construction Manager’s office on site prior to installa tion.

2. All sample mock-ups are intended to represent the components that are to be installed as part of this project; therefore, they are to be provided with all associated components and labeling necessary to make up a complete mock -up. This will include but no t be limited to: Backbox, and 12” span of conduit as specified in the construction documents, cable, jacks, wire ties and any other components that make up an outlet location.

3. Installation shall not proceed until the Owner’s Representative has approved the samples. Once samples and other documents have been submitted, inspected by the Owner ’s Representative, and approved, they shall be retained. The samples will be used as the standards by which the quality of work on the project by the Installer shall be judged. Any installation that does not meet this standard shall be replaced or re -worked as approved by the Owner’s Representative, at no cost to the project.

4. Outlet Samples.
a. Provide a mock-up of each communications outlet, as listed below. The sample is intended to represent a typical communications outlet and shall include all associated parts to make a complete sample. Provide bushings and strain relief for the horizontal c able jacket, demonstrating how the cable shall be secured. Label the outlet and each connector as detailed in this specification.
b. Provide samples of the following outlet configurations:
1) Wall-mounted
2) Ceiling outlet
3) Floor outlet
G. As-Built Documentation

1. Following completion of the installation, submit the following record drawings, documentation , and testing records for approval.

2. As-Built Drawings
a. All drawings shall be provided in hard copy (half size) and electronic format in Autocad DWG and/or Revit RVT, as directed by the Owner, and PDF files supplied on USB flash drive or other approved media. It is the contractor ’s responsibility to acquire current architectural backgrounds for production of as-built documentation.
b. Legend Sheet: Provide a drawing identifying all symbols used within the as-built record set and any relevant notations.
c. Floor Plans: To be of identical scale to architectural document set and consist of all outlet locations, fact plate labels, major cable pathways, riser locations, splice points, Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
270500 August 26, 2025 9

consolidation box locations , conduit routings Technology Rooms (TR), Equipment Rooms (ER), and Entrance Facilities (EF).
d. Enlarged Plans: Shall be enlarged plans of each TR, ER, EF or Machine room/datacenter and conduit routing . They shall reflect Equipment Racks, Backboards, Telecommunication Grounding Busbars (TGB) locations, equipment rack elevations, wall elevations where equipment is present and cabling pathways.
e. Single line diagram as previously submitted and updated to reflect any changes since original submission.

3. Final Test Results
a. Contractor to provide testing results of all tests performed on each cable indicating tests performed, results obtained, and values measured.
b. Test results shall be all inclusive to the scope of work and include punch list items and all required retests for failed components. Incomplete submittals will be rejected without review, for re-submittal.
c. Electronic native format test results shall include the test equipment manufactures software for reading and interpreting test results. OTDR test results shall be in electronic format as well.
d. Test results to include the test equipment by name, manufacturer, model number, serial number and copy last calibration certificate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used
END OF SECTION 27 05 00
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
270526 August 26, 2025 1

SECTION 27 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE
A. This Section details product and execution requirements for Communications Grounding and Bonding.

1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications, which identifies related specification sections in this and other Divisions (if applicable).

B. Related sections in other Divisions of Work:

1. Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications , which identifies pertinent References and Standards.

B. In addition, the following apply:

1. IEEE/ANSI 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.

2. UL 467 Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment.

3. ANSI/TIA-607-D Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises.

1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications , which provides information on Definitions and Abbreviations used in this and related Sections.

B. Additional definitions (per referenced standards):

1. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) - busbar placed in convenient and accessible location and bonded by means of bonding conductor for telecommunications to building service equipment (power) ground. Also known as Promary Bonding Busbar (PBB).

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
270526 August 26, 2025 2

2. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) - interface to building telecommunications grounding system generally located in telecommunications room.

Common point of connection for telecommunications system and equipment bonding to ground and located in telecommunications room or equipment room. Also known as Secondary Bonding Busbar (SBB).

3. Telecommunications Bonding Conductor - conductor that interconnects telecommunications bonding infrastructure to building's service equipment (power) ground.

4. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) - conductor that interconnects telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) to telecommunications grounding busbar (TGB).

5. Grounding Equalizer (GE) - conductor that interconnects elements of telecommunications grounding infrastructure. Also known as Backbone Bonding Conductor (BBC).

6. Exothermic Weld - method of permanently bonding two metals together by controlled heat reaction resulting in molecular bond.

7. Irreversible Compression - permanent mechanical bond between conductors or conductor and connector using mechanical or hydraulic tool.

1.5 WORK BY OWNER
A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications , which identifies Work by Owner affecting sub-system(s) covered by this Section.

1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications , which provides general guidelines for product or installation information to be submitted by Contractor.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications, which identifies general quality assurance requirements for the Project.

1.8 GUARANTEE
A. Refer to Division 01 General Conditions and Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements for general warranty requirements.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
270526 August 26, 2025 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TELECOMMUNICATIONS BUSBARS
A. Material: Copper (aluminum not permitted)

1. 1/4" thick.

B. Pre-drilled

1. 3/8" Diameter.

2. Hole spacing per ANSI/TIA-607-D.

3. Hole pattern shall accommodate two-hole lugs.

C. Insulators and stand-off brackets shall electrically isolate busbar from wall or other mounting surface.

D. Busbars shall be listed by nationally recognized testing laboratory.

E. Size:

1. Telecommunications Main Ground Busbar (TMGB) - 20" x 4" (minimum).

2. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) - 12" x 2" (minimum).

2.2 CONDUCTORS
A. Material: Stranded copper (aluminum not permitted).

B. Bonding Conductors shall be insulated.

1. Green Jacket or Black Jacket marked with Green Tape or Green adhesive labels per NEC Guidelines.

C. Size:

1. Telecommunications Bonding Conductor (TMGB to Grounding Electrode):
a. No. 3/0 AWG

2. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB; TMGB to TGB):
a. Up to 20-meters (66-feet) - No. 2/0
b. Greater-than 20-meters - No. 3/0

3. Grounding Equalizer (GE):

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
270526 August 26, 2025 4

a. Up to 20-meters (66-feet) - No. 2/0
b. Greater-than 20-meters - No. 3/0

4. Telecommunication Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC ; Equipment/Cable Tray to TGB):
a. As shown on the drawings or required by code; No. 6 minimum

2.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Mechanical Connectors

1. Connector Body shall:
a. Be high-strength, high-conductivity cast copper alloy b. Be 2 bolt type
c. Bolts, nuts, washers and lock-washers: Silicon Bronze d. Shall be supplied as part of connector body
e. Split bolt connector types are not allowed

2. Connector shall:
a. Meet or exceed UL 467
b. Be clearly marked with catalog number, conductor size and manufacturer.

B. Compression Connectors

1. Connector Body: pure wrought copper.

2. Conductivity shall be no less than 99% by IACS Standards.

3. Connector shall:
a. Meet or exceed performance requirements of IEEE 837, latest revision. b. Be factory filled with an oxide-inhibiting compound. c. Be clearly marked with manufacturer, catalog number, conductor size and required compression tool settings.
d. Connection shall be irreversible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Permanently attach communications grounds prior to energizing communications equipment.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
270526 August 26, 2025 5

3.2 TOPOLOGY
A. Refer to the project drawings.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Provide required elements and miscellaneous hardware necessary to establish Telecommunication Grounding infrastructure as specified.

B. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Install Compression Connectors with compression, tool and die system, as recommended by manufacturer of connectors.

C. Grounding connections shall be tight and made with UL listed grounding devices, fittings, bushings, etc.

D. On the Telecommunications Bonding Conductor (TBC), Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) and Grounding Equalizer (GE), all connections shall be Compression type.

E. Locate TGBs and TMGB per drawings.

1. Coordinate TMGB location and Telecommunications Bonding Conductor routing with Owner.

F. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) shall be continuous and not interrupted by Telecommunications Grounding Busbars (TGB).

1. TGBs shall be bonded to TBB via tap off from TBB.

2. Exception is "last" TGB on TBB (e.g. furthest from TMGB).

3. Grounding Equalizer(s) (GE) shall connect to TGBs to be interconnected.

G. Insulate Busbars from their support.

H. Connections shall be bare metal to bare metal contact.

1. Clean surfaces of paint, dirt, oil, etc.

I. Connections shall be exposed and visible for inspection at all times.

1. Do not install insulation over ground connections.

J. Terminate each grounding conductor on its own terminal lug.

1. Multiple conductors on single lug not permitted.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
270526 August 26, 2025 6

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation.

3.5 TESTING
A. Test impedance to earth ground at TMGB and TGBs.

B. Maximum allowable impedance to earth ground shall be 5 Ohms.

1. Correct system installation if measured impedance is higher than maximum allowable and retest to verify impedance.

3.6 DOCUMENTATION
A. Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrode(s), busbars and backbone grounding conductors.

END OF SECTION 27 05 26
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
270528 August 26, 2025 1
SECTION 27 05 28

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cable Tray
B. Conduit/Wall Sleeves
C. Cable Support
D. Innerduct

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications
B. 27 11 00 – Communications Equipment Room Fittings
C. 27 13 00 – Communications Backbone Cabling
D. 27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cable Tray: Continuous, rigid, welded steel or stainless-steel wire mesh cable management system suspended from the wall or ceiling.

B. Conduit/Wall sleeves Support: Wall penetration/Transverse device/sleeves to support the Structured Cabling System.

C. Cable Path: the path of which any raceway, wirebasket, ladder rack or cable tray makes though a ceiling space.

1.4 REFERENCES
A. Use the latest edition or the edition adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction of the documents listed below.

1. ANSI/TIA-568.0-E Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises

2. ANSI/TIA-568.1-E Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

3. ANSI/TIA-568.2-D Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components

4. ANSI/TIA-568.3-D Optical Fiber Cabling Components

5. ANSI/TIA-569-E Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

6. ANSI/TIA-606-C Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure

7. ANSI/TIA-607-C Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises

8. National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) - sections 392.7 Grounding and 250.96 Bonding.

9. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code

10. BICSI – Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
270528 August 26, 2025 2

11. NEMA – VE-1 – Metal Cable Tray Systems

12. NEMA – VE-2 – Metal Cable Tray Installation Guidelines B. All publications referred to in this document shall be the latest edition.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA SHEETS
A. Refer to and comply with Division 1 Section “Submittal Requirements” for procedures and other submittals criteria.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data including specifications and installation instructions for each item.

1. Include methods of installation and requirements for substrate preparation.

2. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication and installation. Shop drawings to be based on architectural reflected ceiling plans and to include:

1. Include detailed layout of exact pathway in plan, and in section where pathways cross other ceiling elements in which specified clearances are compromised such as duct work.

2. Shop drawings to show relationships with high voltage and plumbing systems to confirm separation and minimum clearances.

3. Shop drawings to reflect installation height of cable pathway at Top of Tray (TOT) and Bottom of Tray (BOT) as well as finished installation of lighting and mechanical ductwork.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

E. Design Calculations: Verify loading capacities for supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABLE TRAY
A. Cable tray will consist of continuous rigid steel cable management system, to allow continuous ventilation of cables and maximum dissipation of heat, with UL Classified splices where tray acts as Equipment Grounding Conductor (EGC).

B. Provide cable tray of types and sizes indicated below, with connector assemblies, clamp assemblies, connector plates, splice plates and splice bars. Construct units with rounded edges and smooth surfaces; in compliance with applicable standards.

C. MDF/IDF:

1. Cable tray shall be made of corrosion resistant steel with rolled top edge.

2. Powder coated, color as directed Architect.

3. Products shall be manufactured as noted below or approved equal. In the following sizes:
a. widths shall be 18 inches or as shown on drawings.
b. Acceptable Products:
1) CPI. Coordinate finish in exposed ceiling areas with Architect.

D. Fittings and connectors to be of same manufacturer as wireway. No Substitutions or field fabrication of components provided by system manufacturer are allowed.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
270528 August 26, 2025 3
E. Materials and Finishes: Material and finish specifications are as follows:

1. Electro-Plated Zinc Galvanizing: Straight sections shall be made from steel meeting the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A 510, Grade 1008 and shall be electro -plated zinc in accordance with ASTM B633, Type III, SC-1.

F. Support systems:

1. All fittings shall be field formed, from straight sections, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. All splicing assemblies shall be UL/CSA approved as an Equipment Ground Conductor (EGC). When using powder coated wire basket as an EGC, the paint must be completely removed at all contact points of splice/ground bolt attachment.

3. Wire basket supports shall be center support hangers, trapeze hangers or wall brackets as manufactured by Legrand, or engineer approved equal.

4. Trapeze hangers or center support hangers shall be supported by 1/4 inch or 3/8 inch diameter rods.

5. Special accessories shall be furnished as required to protect, support and install a wire basket support system.

2.2 CABLE SUPPORT
A. Non-continuous cable support assemblies shall be used to support horizontal structured cabling, riser backbone communications cabling within the riser room, IDF Room, and Server room. Assemblies may be factory-assembled or assembled from pre -packaged kits. Assemblies shall consist of a steel angled hanger bracket holding up to six non -continuous cable supports, rated for indoor use in non -corrosive environments; UL Listed.

B. If required, support brackets may be assembled to manufacturer-recommended specialty fasteners including clamps and clips.

C. Manufacturer:

1. J-hooks assembled with 3/8” threaded rod - nVent Part # CAT32HP4Z34

2. Velcro cable wraps – Part # 31091 or approved equal

2.3 INNERDUCT
A. Provide innerduct as required by Code, diameter, and number of cells as noted on the drawings, to allow the installation of Day One and future optical fiber and to protect the cable from damage.

B. Innerduct shall be of rugged corrugated construction.

C. Innerduct shall offer minimum friction resistance and good environmental stress crack resistance.

D. Innerduct shall be of sufficient internal diameter to allow the installation the required number of cables in the same innerduct.

E. Provide white colored innerduct for use with optical fiber cables.

F. Provide a pull rope inside each innerduct to facilitate the installation of cables.

G. Manufacturer: Carlon or equal

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
270528 August 26, 2025 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR FUNCTION & GROUNDING
A. UL Classified cable trays may act as Equipment Grounding Conductors.

1. Use UL Classified splicing methods as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Ground cable pathway at end of each continuous run.

3. Ground continuous cable pathway runs every 60 feet.

4. Cable pathways that are not UL Classified will be grounded per NEC requirements and manufacturer recommendations.

5. Ground cable trays against fault current, noise, lightning, and electromagnetic interference by mounting a #6 American Wire Gage (A.W.G.), insulated copper ground conductor in each cable tray.

6. Connect each section of cable tray to the ground connector using crimp on lugs and connectors specified by manufacturer. The ground connector shall be connected to the ground bus in each Technology Room.

3.2 WALL PENETRATIONS
A. Penetrations of rated walls, floors and ceilings shall be accomplished using fire-rated pathway, such as STI EZ Path or approved equal, as specified in Section 07 06 80.

B. Fire Penetrations

1. Fire rated walls: use manufacturer’s wizard to confirm quantity and size of fire-rated sleeves required.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Cable Path / Wireway minimum clearances.

1. The cable path shall maintain clearances as provided in on the detail pages of this document set. In the event the conditions are not met, the Electrical Contractor will be required to correct the system at no cost to the Owner. Coordinate cable path location with jobs ite superintendent of other trades whose work may interfere with installation.

2. Cable path shall have minimum clearance of 12 inches above the top of the wireway, and 12” to one side after installation and 3” below to allow for the removal of ceiling tiles. This minimum clearance shall be maintained though out the length of the wireway.

3. Where crossing ductwork or structural members, this minimum clearance may be compromised for less than 48”

4. Power feeders of greater than 130 volts to ground should not be run parallel to the cable tray. Parallel runs of greater than 20 feet require a minimum separation distance between conduit and nearest point of the cable tray of 18 inches, and 9 inches for runs of less than 20 feet.

5. All power feeders crossing the path of the cable tray at right angles shall be a minimum of 6 inches in distance from the nearest point of the cable tray, in order to prevent problems with high -speed data transmissions.

6. There shall be a 12 -inch separation between the nearest point of the cable tray and the fluorescent light ballast.

7. Cable tray shall be at least 6 feet from any transformer.

B. Wet pipe, sprinkler, and other pluming shall not run parallel above the wireway without a drip pan or gutter protecting the cable.

C. No conduit, pluming, ductwork or other systems shall run up through the wirebasket / cable tray rungs.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
270528 August 26, 2025 5
D. Install wireway as indicated; in accordance with recognized industry practices (NEMA VE -2 2000), to ensure that the cable tray equipment complies with requirements of NEC, and applicable portions of NFPA 70B and NECA’s “Standards of Installation” pertaining to general electrical installation practices.

E. Securely fasten wireways to structural members. Fabricate elbows, bends, per manufacturer’s specifications.

Use appropriate connectors and any other type fittings and support to install the cable tray for best possible location in the available space.

F. All cable tray pathways are to be installed straight and level unless modified to avoid a ceiling obstacle in which case changes in elevation shall be provided by ramps or bending wire basket per the manufacturer’s instructions.

G. Breaks, gaps, jumps or angels greater than 75 degrees are not acceptable. Where changes in direction exceed 75 degrees a manufactured radiused turn shall be provided. At no time shall cable be unsupported.

H. Wireway is to be surface mounted to corridor walls or from ceiling as shown on the Telecommunication plans.

The installation of which shall not interfere with the removal of ceiling tiles, run parallel under wet piping, be installed contrary to the manufac tures installation instructions or modified when the manufacturer provides systems components to meet an installation condition.

I. Trapeze-style support shall be used along the span of the wireway where wall mounting isn’t available. The trapeze is constructed of channel stock (i.e. Unistrut) and 5/8 in. threaded rod. The trapeze support elevation should allow a minimum of 12 in. between the top edge of the cable tray and any obstacle above. Appropriate threaded rod anchors are to be selected and approved by the Project Structural Engineer. Trapeze supports shall be p laced per the manufacturer’s recommendation and at cable tray intersections and terminations.

J. Provide seismic bracing for cable wireways as required by the structural engineer and code.

K. Cable tray support shall be dedicated to cable wireways. Do not support any other item with the cable support system.

L. All conduits and pull-boxes shall be installed by the Electrical Contractor.

M. Contractor to coordinate installation of all cable pathways, conduit sleeves, and hardware support.

N. All horizontal pathways shall be bonded and grounded.

O. In all cases, horizontal pathways shall be sized for a minimum of 50% future growth.

P. Pathways must not exceed a maximum of 40% fill at any time during this installation.

Q. Non-continuous supports shall be located at intervals not to exceed 1.5 m. Non-continuous supports shall be selected to accommodate the immediate and anticipated quantity, weight, and performance requirements of cables.

R. The pulling tension for a 4 -pair balanced twisted -pair cable shall not exceed 110 N (25 lbs. - force) during installation. For multipair cable, the manufacturer’s pulling tension guidelines shall be followed.

S. Non-continuous pathways must conform to the requirements of local electrical code above the ceiling grid.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
270528 August 26, 2025 6
END OF SECTION 27 05 28

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS EXTERIOR PATHWAYS
270543 August 26, 2025 1
SECTION 27 05 43

COMMUNICATIONS EXTERIOR PATHWAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. These standards are provided to serve as a guideline for the construction project to be completed correctly per the latest district requirements. Contractors are to confirm any discrepancies between their scope of work and these specs prior to the start of any project. After the contractor accepts any bid, the contractor shall be responsible to provide their work per the Set Standards .

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Exterior communication pathway standards below are listed per Dolores Huerta Foundation and shall be adhered to with minimal disruption to existing facility pathways and underground topology. Contractors shall be responsible to provide and install any underground and exterior conduit and pull boxes without disruption to existing systems throughout the campus where work will be performed.

B. This section describes the products and execution requirements relating to furnishing and installing telecommunications handholes, exterior pull boxes, cable support ladders, conduits, sleeves, inner-duct, etc. for an exterior cabling plant or parking structures that will require work to be performed.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Basic Communications Systems Requirements

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Precast Manufacturer (if applicable): Company specializing in precast concrete structures with three (3) years of documented experience.

B. The contractor will be responsible for coordinating with other trades, the proper installation of Exterior Trenching, Conduit, Boxes and Manholes, Aerial Entrance Masts, Service Cabinets, Bonding and Grounding, Etc. per Dolores Huerta Foundation and industry standards and requirements.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/TIA 758-B – Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard.

B. ANSI/TIA 607-B - Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) For Customer Premises

C. ANSI/ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

D. ANSI/ASTM A569 - Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot-Rolled, Commercial Quality.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS EXTERIOR PATHWAYS
270543 August 26, 2025 2
E. ASTM A48 - Gray Iron Castings.

F. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strips.

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The system described here-in shall meet or exceed Dolores Huerta Foundation standards and shall meet at a minimum the work listed below.

B. Contractor to be responsible for the furnishing, installation, adjusting, and testing of a complete turnkey communication exterior pathway infrastructure systems.

C. Performance Statement: The contractor will be responsible to provide shop drawings for the main pathways must be identified. The Contractor will be solely responsible for determining all components, connections, and terminations required for a complete and operational system.

D. The major components of the system shall be as per Dolores Huerta Foundation standards. All additional hardware, subassemblies, supporting equipment, and other miscellaneous equipment required for complete, proper system installation and operation shall be provided by the Contractor with minimal or no impact to owner cost.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTSIDE PLANT CONDUIT

A. Rigid Metallic Conduit (RMC) and Fittings:

1. Rigid steel conduit hot-dipped galvanized inside and out with threaded ends meeting ANSI C80.1.

2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:

a. End Bell Fittings: Malleable iron, hot-dip galvanized, threaded flare type with provisions for mounting to form.

b. Expansion Joints: Malleable iron and hot-dip galvanized providing a minimum of 4 inches of movement. The fitting shall be watertight with an insulating bushing and a bonding jumper.

c. Expansion Joint for Concrete Encased Conduit: Neoprene sleeve with bronze end coupling, stainless steel bands, and a tinned copper braid bonding jumper.

Fittings shall be watertight and concrete-tight.

d. Conduit End Bushings: Malleable iron-type with molded-on high impact phenolic thermosetting insulation. Where required elsewhere in the contract documents, bushing shall be complete with ground conductor saddle and clamp. High impact phenolic threaded type bushings are not acceptable.

e. All other fittings and conduit bodies shall be of malleable iron construction and Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS EXTERIOR PATHWAYS
270543 August 26, 2025 3
hot-dip galvanized.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Allied, LTV, Steel duct, Wheatland Tube Co, O-Z Gedney, or pre-approved equal.

B. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (RNC) and Fittings:

1. UL listed, NEMA TC2 and TC6 Schedule 40 or 80 rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) approved for direct burial without concrete encasement.

2. Fittings: NEMA TC3 and TC9, sleeve type suitable for and manufactured especially for use with the conduit by the conduit manufacturer.

3. Plastic cement for joining conduit and fittings shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturer.

4. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Carlon (Lamson & Sessions) Type 40, Cantex, J.M. Mfg., or pre-approved equal.

C. High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit:

1. Minimum Size: 4 inches, unless noted otherwise.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Carlon, Chevron Phillips Chemical Company, or pre -approved equal.

3. Materials used for the manufacture of polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be extra high molecular weight, high-density polyethylene resin. The material shall be listed by PPI (Plastic Pipe Institute) and shall meet the following resin properties:

ASTM Test Description Values HDPE
D-1505 Density g/CM 3 < .941
D-1238 Melt Index, g/10 min Condition E > .55 grams/10 min.

D-638 Tensile Strength at Yield (psi) 3000 min.

D-1693 Environmental Stress Crack Resistance Condition
B, F 20
96 hrs.

D-790 Flexural Modulus, MPa (psi) < 80,000
D-746 Brittleness Temperature -75°C Max

4. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that generated in the manufacturer’s plant from the resin of the same raw material, including both the base resin and coextruded resin. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, voids, foreign inclusions, or other defects that may affect the wall integrity.

5. Fitting and Conduit Bodies:

a. Directional Bore and Plow Type Installation: Electrofusion or universal aluminum Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS EXTERIOR PATHWAYS
270543 August 26, 2025 4
threaded couplings. The tensile strength of the coupled pipe must be greater than 2,000 lbs.

b. For All Other Types of Installation: Coupler must provide a watertight connection. The tensile strength of the coupled pipe must be greater than 1,000 lbs.

c. E-loc type couplings are not acceptable in any situation.

d. Acceptable Manufacturers: ARCON, Carlon, or approved equal.

D. Fittings:

1. Sweeps: Factory manufactured RMC wrapped with 4 mil vinyl tape with a bend radius as follows:

a. Conduit internal diameter of 2” or less is 6 times the internal conduit diameter.

b. Conduit internal diameter of more than 2” is 10 times the internal conduit diameter.

2. End Caps (Plugs): Pre-manufactured and watertight. The tape is not an acceptable end cap or cover.

2.2 HAND HOLES

A. Type:

1. Polymer concrete

B. Dimensions:

1. As indicated in the drawings.

C. Requirements:

1. Includes polymer concrete cover cast iron cover steel checker plate covers.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers

1. Jensen

2. Old Castle Precast Christy®

3. Brooks.

2.3 TEXTILE INNERDUCT

A. The contractor shall provide and install the Flexible fabric innerduct system in each conduit identified to have copper and fiber optic cable installed.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS EXTERIOR PATHWAYS
270543 August 26, 2025 5

B. Innerduct shall have an 18 gauge solid copper core tracer wire installed into each cell to allow for detection by industry-standard toning equipment.

C. Each innerduct cell shall have a pull tape installed.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. MaxCell

2.4 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored, compounded for direct-burial service.

B. Overall Thickness: 5 mils (0.125 mm).

C. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm).

D. Orange colored tape 3-wide with 1-inch high black letters permanently imprinted with “CAUTION – BURIED COMMUNICATIONS LINE BELOW”. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.

E. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

F. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.

G. Acceptable Manufacturer: CARLON

2.5 UNDERGROUND PULL BOX AND RACEWAY COMPONENTS

A. Pull Rope 1700lb tensile strength by Carlon.

B. Bonding ribbon (in Vaults) by INWESCO Cat 12A55.

C. Bonding ribbon clamps (in Vaults) by INWESCO Cat 12A56.

D. Fargo Clamp by INWESCO Cat 12A57.

E. Ground Rod by INWESCO Cat 12A60.

F. Ground Inserts (Cast Bronze) by INWESCO Cat 12H69.

G. Manhole and Pull Boxes hardware by INWESCO products.

H. Manholes by Utility Vault (Oldcastle); Jensen, Brooks.

I. Manhole lids by Alhambra Foundry, OPW Manhole.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS EXTERIOR PATHWAYS
270543 August 26, 2025 6

J. Manhole Ladders by Alhambra Foundry – Model A – 3382 w/A3383 Support Bar.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 DUCTBANK MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

A. Make duct bank installations and penetrations through foundation walls watertight.

B. Top of duct banks shall be a minimum of 24 inches below grade unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

C. Assemble duct banks using non -magnetic saddles, spacers, and separators. Position separators to provide 3-inch minimum separation between the outer surfaces of the ducts.

D. The transition from non-metallic to galvanized rigid steel conduit where duct banks enter buildings, manholes, and handholes.

E. Where ducts enter structures such as manholes, handholes, pull boxes, and buildings, terminate the ducts in suitable end bells.

F. Slope duct runs for drainage toward manholes and away from buildings with a slope of approximately 3-inches per 100 feet.

G. After completion of the duct bank and prior to pulling cable, pull a mandrel, not less than 12 inches long and with a cross -section approximately 1/4 inch less than the inside cross -section of the duct, through each duct. Then pull a rag swab or sponge through to make certain that no particles of earth, sand, or gravel have been left in the duct.

H. Plug and seal empty spare ducts entering buildings and structures. Seal watertight all ducts in use entering buildings and structures.

3.2 TEXTILE INNERDUCT

A. Provide two (2) 3-cell innerducts per 4" conduit or as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Install innerduct per manufacturer's guidelines.

C. Cut and tie off innerduct and pull tape inside each communications vault or Entrance Room.

3.3 EXCAVATION, FILL, BACKFILL, COMPACTION

A. General:

1. The Contractor shall do all necessary excavating, securing, filling, backfilling, compacting, and restoration in connection with their work.

B. Excavation:

1. Excavations for trenches shall be excavated to proper dimensions to permit installation and inspection of work.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS EXTERIOR PATHWAYS
270543 August 26, 2025 7

2. Where excavations are carried in error below indicated levels, thoroughly compacted sand-gravel fill shall be placed in such excess excavations.

3. Excavations shall be protected against frost action and freezing.

4. Care shall be exercised in excavating so as to not damage surrounding structures, equipment, and buried utilities. In no case shall any major structural footing or foundation be undermined.

5. Excavation shall be performed in all ground characteristics, including rock if encountered.

Each bidder shall visit the premises and determine, by actual observations, borings, or other means, the nature of the soil conditions. The cost of all such inspections, borings, etc., shall be borne by the bidder.

6. In the case where the trench is excavated in the rock, a compacted bed with a depth of 3” (minimum) of sand and gravel shall be used to support the conduit unless masonry cradles or encasements are used.

7. Where satisfactory bearing soil is not found at the indicated levels, the Architect/Engineer or their representative shall be notified immediately and no further work shall be done until further instructions are given.

8. Mechanical excavation of the trench to line and grade of the conduit, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

C. Underground Obstructions:

1. The contractor is responsible for obtaining all utility locates for all trades on the project to determine obstructions indicated. The Contractor shall use great care in installing in the vicinity of underground obstruction.

D. Fill and Backfilling:

1. No rubbish or waste material shall be permitted in excavations for trench fill and backfill.

2. The Contractor shall provide the necessary sand for backfilling.

3. Dispose of the excess excavated earth as directed.

4. Soils for backfill shall be suitable for required stability and compaction, clean and free from perishable materials, frozen earth, debris, or earth with an exceptionally high void content, and free from stones greater than 4 inches in diameter. Under no circumstances shall water be permitted to rise in unbackfilled trenches after the installation has been placed.

5. All trenches shall be backfilled immediately after installation of conduit unless other protection is directed.

6. All conduits shall be laid on a compacted bed of sand at least 3” deep. Backfill around the Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS EXTERIOR PATHWAYS
270543 August 26, 2025 8
conduit with sand, spread in 6” layers, then compact each layer.

7. Use sand for backfill up to grade for all conduits located under building slabs or paved areas. All other conduits shall have sand backfill to 6” above the top of the conduit.

8. The backfilling above the sand shall be placed in uniform layers not exceeding 6” in depth.

Each layer shall be placed, then carefully and uniformly tamped, so as to eliminate the possibility of lateral or vertical displacement.

9. Install a warning tape approximately 12 inches below finished grade overall underground duct banks. The identifying warning tape shall be as specified above.

10. Where the fill and backfilling will ultimately be under a building, floor, or paving, each layer of fill shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum density as determined by AASHTO Designation T-99 or ASTM Designation D-698. The moisture content of the soil at the time of compaction shall not exceed plus or minus 2% of optimum moisture content as determined by AASHTO T-99 or ASTM D-698 test.

3.4 RESTORATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Where soil and sod have been removed, it shall be replaced as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. All areas disturbed by work shall be restored to their original condition. The restoration shall include any necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, or mulching.

END OF SECTIO 27 05 43
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
271100 August 26, 2025 1

SECTION 27 11 00

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Equipment Racks
B. Fiber Enclosures
C. Horizontal Data Copper Patch Panels
D. Vertical Management
E. Horizontal Management
F. Ladder Racks

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications
B. 27 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems C. 27 05 28 – Pathways for Communications Systems
D. 27 13 00 – Communications Backbone Cabling
E. 27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/TIA-569-E Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces B. ANSI/TIA-568.0-E Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
271100 August 26, 2025 2

C. ANSI/TIA – 568.1-E Commercial Building Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard D. ANSI//BICSI N1 -2019 Installation Practices for Telecommunications and ICT Cabling and Related Cabling Infrastructure
E. ANSI/TIA-942-A Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers F. ANSI/TIA – 606-C Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure G. ANSI/TIA – 607-D Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) For Customer Premises H. ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electric Code

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable connections.

2. Grounding: Indicate location of bonding bus bar and its mounting detail showing standoff insulators and wall mounting brackets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT RACKS
A. Provide equipment racks as shown on the Drawings. Each rack shall conform to the following specification:

1. 2-Post Racks:
a. Capacity: 1,000 lb (453.6 kg).
b. Mounting Channels: Punched on the front and rear flange with the EIA -310-D Universal hole pattern.
c. UL and Listed as a Communications Circuit Accessory.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
271100 August 26, 2025 3

d. Size:
1) 45U by 19 inches EIA
B. The rack shall be manufactured from extruded aluminum.

C. The rack shall be black in color.

D. MDF: 7’ adjustable racks (45RU)
E. IDF: 8’ adjustable rack (51RU)
F. Manufacturer: CPI

2.2 FIBER ENCLOSURES
A. Rack Mounted Optical Fiber Enclosures. Provide optical fiber enclosures, conforming to the following specification:

1. Each panel shall be suitable for installation in EIA 19" mounting frame. Rack units as shown on the drawings.

2. Configured with adapter panels as required.

3. Each adapter panel connector to accept singlemode and multimode fiber terminated on LC duplex connector

4. Allow for labeling of each individual connector.

5. Allow any individual cable to be terminated or otherwise handled without disturbing other cables.

6. Each panel shall provide fiber handling for fiber elements, including 36" fiber reserve (service loop) inside the patch panel with no bends sharper than 2" bend radius.

7. Provide blanking adapter plates to cover all unused spaces as necessary.

8. Product: Panduit with pigtail adapter plates as required.

2.3 HORIZONTAL DATA COPPER PATCH PANELS
A. Category 6A Patch Panels. Provide RJ-45 Patch Panels conforming to the following specification:

1. Suitable for mounting in standard EIA 19" racks.

2. Shall be designed for termination of UTP cable types with associated grounding/bonding.

3. Configured with 24 jacks housed in a 1U flat panel.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
271100 August 26, 2025 4

4. Provide strain relief for each cable terminated on the connector at the rear of the patch panel.

5. Allow for labeling of each individual connector.

6. Allow any individual cable to be terminated or otherwise handled without disturbing other cables.

7. Manufacturer: Belden REVconnect – RVAPPF1U24BK

2.4 VERTICAL MANAGEMENT
A. Provide side-mounted vertical cable management on both sides of each rack, as shown on the drawings.

B. Management height shall be equal to rack height and 6” and 10” wide or as noted.

C. Managements shall be double-sided allowing for cables to be routed at the front or rear of the racks.

D. Managements shall have hinged cover plates that allow the cover to open in both directions.

E. Manufacturer: CPI

2.5 HORIZONTAL MANAGEMENT
A. 19 inch EIA rack-mounted; 1U high one sided cable management panels. The cable manager shall be at least 4 inches (100 mm) deep and hold 24 patch cords per U.

B. Provide strain relief and cable management at the rear of each rack to ensure tidy routing of all feeder and horizontal cables.

C. Manufacturer: CPI

2.6 LADDER RACK
A. Provide overhead ladder rack fixed to the top of each rack and running as shown on the drawings.

B. Runway shall be ladder type with welded rungs. Stringer siderail shall conform to the minimum chemical and mechanical properties of ASTM A36 structural steel.

C. Widths shall be [18] inches or as shown on drawings.

D. Width of side rail to be [1-1/2 inch]
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
271100 August 26, 2025 5

E. Ladder type trays shall consist of two 2” longitudinal members (side rails) with transverse members (rungs) welded to the side rails. No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the bottom plane of the side rails. Each rung must be capable of supporting the maximum cable load, with a safety factor of 1.5 and a 200 pound concentrated load when tested in accordance with NEMA VE-1, section 5.4.

F. All fittings, supports, splices, etc. for the runway system shall be installed to provide a complete assembly - including fasteners, hardware, and other items required to complete the installation as indicated on the drawings.

G. Splice plates shall be the bolted type made as indicated below for each tray type. The resistance of fixed splice connections between adjacent sections of tray shall not exceed .00033 ohms. Splice plate construction shall be such that a splice may be loc ated anywhere within the support span without diminishing rated loading capacity of the cable tray.

H. All elevation transitions greater than 12” shall be made in the form of a “waterfall” or angled slope not exceeding 45 degrees. Transitions shall be of the same size and width of the adjoining ladder rack section.

I. Wall mounted vertical to horizontal transitions are to be supported by a radiused section of ladder rack as provided by the ladder rack manufacturer as shown on the design drawings. Unless otherwise noted, J. Ladder rack to be installed above and bolted to the top of equipment racks and cabinets within technology rooms unless noted otherwise.

K. Provide all necessary components, such as wall angle brackets, butt splices, rack -mounting brackets, ladder rack extensions, etc., needed to properly install ladder racks, as shown on the drawings.

L. Securely fix in place. Ladder rack shall be braced in such a way where the ladder rack is sturdy.

M. Provide cable bend management fixtures to maintain the proper bend radius as the cables drop into the rack.

Do not allow cables to be unsupported as they run from conduit or cable tray to equipment cabinets.

N. Ladder rack and associated components shall be black in color.

O. Manufacturer: CPI

2.7 UPS AND PDU
A. Electrical Contractor shall provide and install the Owner-furnished uninterruptible power supply (UPS) and battery pack in the MDF and IDF Rooms to be plugged into the power outlets above the Racks.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
271100 August 26, 2025 6

B. Electrical Contractor shall provide and install Horizontal Power Distribution Units (PDU).

C. Refer to Technology Drawing Enlarged Plans for the Rack elevation layout.

D. Manufacturer: APC
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor is responsible for all components required to complete installation as defined in manufacturers ’ installation instructions as identified in this specification even if not specifically defined herein. This would include, mounting hardware, screws, brackets, bolts, grounding wire, fittings, spacers, labels, engraving, or components required to fulfill the design intent of the installation.

B. Ensure that all waste materials are disposed of in a safe manner. Pay particular attention to waste materials produced during the termination of optical fiber cabling. Ensure that all used components and fiber cut -offs are collected in purpose-made containers and disposed of properly.

C. The Contractor shall provide and install equipment racks that are earthquake rated for Zone 4. All rack installations shall be in accordance with the Dolores Huerta Foundation Standard 902. This standard will require the use of Chatsworth Ladder Rack Elevation Kit (P/N: CPI 10506 -702) to attach the equipment rack to the ladder rack.

D. The Contractor shall provide and install the required rack configuration consisting of 2 -post racks as shown in the Telecommunications Room (TR) layout. The 7’ and 8’ 2-post adjustable racks, 19” W x 7’H, shall be the Chatsworth RMU and black color. The Low Voltage Contractor shall install, position, reposition, or remove racks and equipment as required without disruption of ongoing services. The contractor shall furnish extension cables, pow er taps, or temporary racks if needed or required on the project. Refer to the Main Communications Room (MCR) or Telecommunications Room (TR) layout for the equipment rack and ladder rack layout.

E. All equipment racks shall be augmented with horizontal and vertical wire management hardware, both front and back as required, to properly dress cables and patch cords. Refer to the Rack Elevation drawing for further details.

F. The horizontal wire organizers shall be one 2RU horizontal wire organizer per patch panel plus one (1) additional wire organizer at the top of each row of patch panels. Vertical wire managers shall also be furnished and installed using Panduit WMPVHC45E.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
271100 August 26, 2025 7

G. The number of equipment racks to be installed shall be determined by IT Representative based on the low voltage drawings.

H. All voice/data cables shall be terminated on separate patch panels in the Main Communications Room (MCR).

The cables shall be terminated and labeled sequentially on the patch panels.. Voice cables will be terminated on the equipment rack patch panel as designated by the Foundation IT.

I. Ladder rack shall be Chatsworth Products, INC. (CPI) P/N 11252 -712, black color or as specified in the low voltage drawings.

J. All structural ironwork shall be UL -certified, providing the best bonding for static and grounding. Painted structural ironwork is not allowed.

K. Ladder rack shall be of the tubular type construction. The tray shall be installed with the rungs on the topside of the tray. All attachments to drywall shall be on ¾” plywood.

L. MDF and IDF Ladder rack shall be mounted at 7’ 6” and 8’6” above the finish floor respectively. This will require the installation of a 6” (Black) spacer manufactured by the Chatsworth Ladder Rack Elevation Kit. The B-Line part number is not cataloged and requires special order. The 7’ 6” allows for the ladder rack to be positioned over the 7’ doorway.

M. Structural ladder rack, relay racks, cabinets, systems, attachments and earthquake bracing shall comply with Zone 4 earthquake, NEMA, NEC and TIA/EIA -569 standards. Floor mounting hardware shall be a 3/8” bolt, lock washer, flat washer, with anchor in the floor, quantity as required.

N. All exposed cut and sharp edges shall be trimmed and filed to a safe finish. Ladder rack ends shall be capped with a black rubber cap.

O. Relay racks shall be high strength aluminum construction with universal 5/8” - 5/8”-1/2” tapped mounting hole #12-24 thread pattern on both front and rear. Designed and seismic built to the EIA -310C Standard.

P. The ladder rack and equipment racks shall be individually grounded to the Telecoms Ground Bus Bar using the standard ground lug and #6 AWG stranded ground copper wire with “Green” jacket or insulation. Daisy chaining the ground wire between racks is not allowed.

Q. The Contractor shall install, position, reposition, or remove racks and equipment as required without disruption of ongoing services. The Low Voltage Contractor shall furnish extension cables, power taps, or temporary racks if needed.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
271100 August 26, 2025 8

3.2 EQUIPMENT RACKS
A. Provide equipment cabinets and racks, as shown on the drawings. Racks to be laid out and located according to centerlines shown on enlarged communications equipment room plans. In the event location is not available, contractor to bring it to the attention of the consulting engineer for review prior to installation.

B. Securely fix the racks in place as defined by the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Fix each cabinet and rack to the floor and supporting walls to provide stability and prevent movement of the cabinet or rack.

C. Fix adjacent racks and cabinets together though vertical wire managers and overhead ladder racks with component provided by the equipment rack, and ladder rack manufacturers.

D. Each rack shall be bonded to the adjacent rack with components as supplied by the equipment rack manufacturer and shown in the design documents.

E. Grounding and bonding shall adhere to requirements as shown in the design documentation.

F. Install the appropriate seismic transverse and longitudinal bracing per any local codes and the current NUSIG (National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines).

3.3 FIBER ENCLOSURES
A. Install fiber enclosure as shown on design documentation and enlarged plan rack elevations.

B. Provide blank inserts for all unused fiber compartments within fiber enclosure.

C. Provide keys for enclosure locks to Owner upon acceptance of systems installation.

D. Provide universal cable clamps as required for strain relief as part of fiber optic cabling installation.

3.4 PATCH PANELS
A. Install patch panels as shown on design documentation and enlarged plan rack elevations.

B. As required by manufacture r’s instructions, contractor to provide grounding wire from patch panel to equipment rack grounding buss bar and tested for fault per specification Section 27 05 26.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
271100 August 26, 2025 9

3.5 LADDER RACK
A. Install wireway as indicated; in accordance with recognized industry practices (NEMA VE -2 2018), to ensure that the ladder rack equipment complies with requirements of NEC, and applicable portions of NFPA 70E and NECA’s “Standards of Installation” pertaining to general electrical installation practices.

B. Securely fasten wireways to structural members, walls or equipment racks/cabinets as shown. Provide elbows, bends, per manufacturer’s specifications. Use appropriate connectors and any other type fittings and support to install the cable tray for best possible location in the available space.

C. All cable tray pathways are to be installed straight and level unless modified to avoid obstacles in which case changes in elevation shall be provided by angled brackets as provided by the manufacture for such a purpose.

D. Breaks, gaps, or jumps are not acceptable. At no time shall cable be unsupported.

E. Raceway is to be surface mounted to walls , from ceiling, or attached to top of racks/cabinets, as shown on the Telecommunications plans. The installation of which shall not interfere with the removal of ceiling tiles, run parallel under wet piping, be installed contrary to the manufacturer’s installation instructions or modified when the manufacturer provides systems components to meet an installation condition.

F. Each section of ladder rack shall be bonded to the adjacent section with components as supplied by the ladder rack manufacturer and shown in the design documents.

3.6 UPS AND PDU UNITS
A. Electrical Contractor shall provide and install PDU and UPS per the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Electrical Contractor shall install UPS hard -wired connections from the UPS panel to the power above the racks.

3.7 UNUSED COMPONENTS
A. Any components purchased in accordance with these specifications and unused shall be documented and passed to the Owner on completion of installation and audited at the time of acceptance testing.

END OF SECTION 27 11 00
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING
271300 August 26, 2025 1

SECTION 27 13 00

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Intrabuilding Copper Backbone Cabling
B. Intrabuilding Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling
C. Copper Connectors
D. Single-mode and Multimode Optical Fiber Connectors
E. Fiber Patch cords

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications
B. 27 05 28 – Pathways for Communications
C. 27 11 00 – Communications Equipment Room Fittings
D. 27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 COPPER BACKBONE CABLING
A. Product: Commscope 2-1499418-2 | 1061F SLT C5E 25/24 U/UTP

1. 25-pair CAT5e

2.02 OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING
A. OSP Single Mode Fiber

1. OS2 single-mode cable elements:
a. Number of elements as indicated on the drawings
b. Jacket color to be black.

B. Manufacturer: Commscope 810009737/DB | S-012-LN-8W-F12NS/25G/S

2.03 FIBER PATCH CORDS (JUMPERS)
A. Contractor shall provide and install Single mode OS2 fiber patch cords as part of this scope of work.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING
271300 August 26, 2025 2

B. Manufacturer: CommScope
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION PRACTICES
A. No cables shall be installed in a fashion that contravenes either the minimum installed or the minimum under-load bend radius of the cable.

B. No cable is to bepulled through a conduit “L-bend” (condulets). In existing routes with L-bends, the cables are to be pulled to the L-Bend. The cable is then to be carefully pulled through the remainder of the conduit run.

C. Install all cables in complete runs from outlet or patch panel to patch panel. In -line joints, splices, distribution points, or other intermediate connections are not permitted unless specifically called out by this specification.

D. At no point shall the communications cables be tied to power cables or other building services or their supports, or run in the same ducts, raceways, conduits, or connection boxes as power cabling or services.

E. Velcro Tie Wraps

1. Use plenum-rated tie wraps in plenum spaces 48”-60” on center or as needed to manage cable through cable management.

2. In non-plenum spaces use non-plenum tie wraps 48”-60” on center or as needed to manage cable through cable management.

3. Provide Velcro hook and loop ties to secure cabling running in the Telecom Closets MDF and IDF. Provide ties at 3’-0” intervals. On completion of installation, neatly run and re-tie all cable bundles in the Closet

4. Cables shall not be held so tightly with cable ties that the cable jackets are indented by the cable ties.

F. Waste Materials

1. Ensure that all waste materials are disposed of in a safe manner as instructed by the project site superintendent. Pay particular attention to waste materials produced during the termination of optical fiber cabling. Ensure that all used components and fi ber cut-offs are collected in purpose-made containers and disposed of properly.

2. Unused cable in lengths greater than 3m (9.8’) shall be turned over to the owner and not discarded as waste without the owner’s approval.

G. Conduit / Penetrations:

1. Provide expansion plugs in all ducts/conduits entering the building. Seal all unused ducts/conduits with plugs that allow the pull-string to be tied off on the inside.

2. Replace all moisture and fire barrier material in ducts, conduits , and other penetrations disturbed during the installation of communications cabling. Install barrier material in all Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING
271300 August 26, 2025 3

fire-rated penetrations that have cabling running through them. The barrier material shall be installed so the final penetration has the same fire rating as the original wall/floor.

3. Reinstate all pull-wires in conduits and ducts after use to facilitate future addition of cables

4. The number of cables in each conduit shall be controlled to allow for future cable installation and to stay within the manufacturer’s maximum allowable cable pulling tension.

Conduit fill ratios shall not exceed the current requirements of the NEC.

H. Labels shall be machine generated, not handwritten, and placed within 12 inches of each end of each cable.

3.02 COPPER BACKBONE CABLING AND TERMINATION
A. Copper backbone cables will be used as tie-lines between each Telecommunications Room, as shown on the drawings.

B. Terminate each end of the riser cable directly on rack-mounted 6 RJ45 patch panels at each Telecom Room, as shown on the drawings.

3.03 OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING AND TERMINATION
A. Provide optical fiber backbone cables running between MDF and each of the Telecommunications Rooms, as shown on the drawings.

B. Terminate each pair of optical fiber elements with the same optical fiber connectors used for the horizontal cabling system, fitted in an optical fiber rack-mounted patch panel.

C. Contractor shall use fusion spliced pigtails with LC connectors, as specified in the fiber section of this document U.N.O.

D. Mechanical splice is not acceptable.

E. Label each connector with the backbone cable number.

F. Provide patch panels fitted in the equipment cabinet, racks, and/or wall -mounted as shown on the drawings, to house optical fiber cables terminated on optical fiber connectors.

G. Terminate all elements of each optical fiber cable with the specified connectors. Strip back the optical fiber cable jacket, providing a 36" service loop for each optical fiber element.

H. Neatly dress these loops in the patch panel using appropriately sized spiral wrap, so they are protected.

END OF SECTION 27 13 00
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 August 26, 2025 1

SECTION 27 15 00

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling (Section 27 15 13) B. Communications Faceplates and Connectors (Section 27 15 43) C. Communications Consolidation Point Enclosure
D. Communications Copper Patch cords

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications
B. 27 05 28 – Pathways for Communications
C. 27 11 00 – Communications Equipment Room Fittings
D. 27 13 00 – Communications Backbone Cabling
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
A. Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling

1. Cable runs greater than 280’
a. OSP CAT6A F/UTP
b. The pinouts for the jack shall conform to the T568B wiring scheme.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 August 26, 2025 2

c. Product: Datacom Gamechanger 258340804

2. Cable runs less than 280’
a. OSP CAT6A F/UTP
b. The pinouts for the jack shall conform to the T568B wiring scheme. c. Product: CommScope 760178129 | 1592A BLK C6A 4/23 F/UTP R1000

3. Indoor Plenum runs less than 280’
a. CAT6A UTP Plenum
b. The pinouts for the jack shall conform to the T568B wiring scheme. c. Product: Commscope UN874035114/10 | CS44P BLU C6A 4/23 U/UTP CPK 1KFT

4. POE Extender
a. Aetek E69-201 PoE Extender
b. House PoE extender in pull box location shown in plans.

2.2 COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS
A. Wall-mounted Faceplate

1. Provide a wall-mounted flush modular faceplate to house work area jacks, capable of housing a minimum of four jacks.

2. The faceplate shall fit over a standard NEMA electrical 2-gang outlet box fitted with a single gang plaster ring cover.

3. Color shall match electrical receptacle outlets.

4. Coordinate finish with Architect.

5. Product:

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 August 26, 2025 3

a. CommScope
B. Blanking Inserts

1. Provide blanking inserts, matching faceplates, in sufficient quantities to cover all unused openings in every faceplate.

2. Manufacturer:
a. CommScope
C. Stainless Steel Wallphone Faceplate

1. Provide a stainless-steel wall-mounted flush modular faceplate to house a single work area jack.

2. The faceplate shall fit over a standard NEMA electrical 2-gang outlet box fitted with a single gang plaster ring cover.

3. The faceplate shall be capable of having a wall-mounted telephone fitted directly over it.

4. Manufacturer:
a. CommScope
D. Furniture Faceplate

1. Provide a flush-mounted modular faceplate to house work area jacks.

2. The faceplate shall fit over a modular raceway.

3. Manufacturer: CommScope
E. 106-Type Faceplate

1. Provide duplex mounting strips to house four work area jacks in a standard NEMA duplex electrical mounting fitted in a raceway, poke-through unit or flush floorbox.

2. Manufacturer: CommScope
F. Stainless Steel Faceplate

1. Provide decorative stainless-steel faceplate covers for locations where decorative wall outlets are required.

2. Provide stainless steel covers wherever stainless steel electrical receptacles are provided.

3. Manufacturer: CommScope
G. Floor box Faceplate
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 August 26, 2025 4

1. Provide an internal blank bracket to house combinations of work area connectors in a flush -mounted floor box.

2. The bracket shall be provided by the manufacturer of the flush floor box and shall be designed to fit in the floor box installed as a part of this project.

3. Manufacturer: CommScope
H. Copper Work Area Connectors

1. Product: Datacom GameChanger - LGEGPTRJ45
a. CAT 6A pass-through RJ45
I. WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS & IP CAMERA CONNECTORS

1. Provide an eight-position field terminated RJ-45 jack for wireless access points and IP cameras.

2. The pin outs for the jack shall conform to the T568B wiring scheme.

3. Manufacturer: CommScope and GameChanger
J. COPPER PATCH CORDS

1. The Contractor shall provide and install patch cords per type, length, color and quantity specified by IT.

2. For Workstation side:
a. Patch cords shall be Panduit Category 6, 23 AWG stranded, 4-pair assemblies with RJ45 plugs on both ends, straight through (no pair reversals), and slender-strain relief and clear boot type, Category 6, UTPSP, patch cords. The Low Voltage contractor shall be responsible for the installation and dressing of all patch cables in the Main Communications Room (MCR), Telecommunications Room (TR) and Workstations based on the Patch Schedule provided the IT.

3. For Main Communications Room (MCR) side (Patch Panel):
a. Patch cords shall be Panduit Category 6A, 28AWG Copper, UTP, 4-pair assemblies with RJ45 plugs on both ends, straight through (no pair reversals), and slender -strain relief and clear boot type, UTP28X**xx. (** - length, xx – color code).
b. The IT shall provide the Patch Schedule.
c. Slim type

4. Manufacturer: CommScope
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 August 26, 2025 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PRACTICES
A. No cables shall be installed in a fashion that contravenes either the minimum installed or the minimum under-load bend radius of the cable.

B. No cable is to be pulled through a conduit “L-bend” (condulets). In existing routes with L-bends, the cables are to be pulled to the L-Bend. The cable is then to be carefully pulled through the remainder of the conduit run.

C. Install all cables in complete runs from outlet or patch panel to patch panel. In -line joints, splices, distribution points or other intermediate connections are not permitted unless specifically called out by this specification.

D. At no point shall the communications cables be tied to power cables or other building services or their supports, or run in the same ducts, raceways, conduits or connection boxes as power cabling or services.

E. Backbone cables shall be installed separately from horizontal distribution cables.

F. Where cables are housed in conduits, the backbone and horizontal cables shall be installed in separate conduits or in separate innerducts within conduits.

G. Where backbone cables and distribution cables are installed in a cable tray or wireway, backbone cables shall be installed first and bundled separately from the horizontal distribution cables.

H. Any cable damaged by either installation conditions, or by or exceeding recommended installation parameters during installation shall be replaced by the contractor prior to final acceptance at no cost to the Owner. This would include, kinks, striped insulation, bends less than 4x O.D. of cable.

I. The contractor is responsible for protecting installed cables in unfinished working environments that would modify or otherwise void the UL listing of the installed system by paint or other means. The cable shall be replaced by the contractor prior to systems acceptance at no cost to the Owner unless a written exception is provided from the manufacturer by the contractor. Coordinate installation of network cabling system with other work in progress.

J. Use purpose-built pulling grips during cable installation. Do not pull cables by attaching pull wires to cable jackets, elements or reinforcement. Use strain gauges or equivalent measures to ensure that the maximum tensile load rating of the cables is not exceeded during installation.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 August 26, 2025 6

K. Provide bushings, grommets and strain-relief for cables terminating at wall-mounted outlets and patch panels to ensure durable and robust connections. The bushings and grommets are intended to protect the cables from any sharp edges that present a risk to the cables. Ensure that all sharp edges are covered to protect the cables from damage.

L. Velcro Wraps / Wire ties

1. Use plenum-rated tie wraps in plenum spaces 48”-60” on center or as needed to manage cable through cable management.

2. In non-plenum spaces use non plenum tie wraps 48”-60” on center or as needed to manage cable through cable management.

3. Provide Velcro hook and loop ties to secure cabling running in the Telecom Closets TR’s and BDF’s.

Provide ties at 3’ intervals. On completion of installation, neatly run and re -tie all cable bundles in the Closet

4. Cables shall not be held so tightly with cable ties that the cable jackets are indented by the cable ties.

5. Group cable bundles shall be 24 or less for cable cross talk (NEXT).

M. Waste Materials

1. Ensure that all waste materials are disposed of in a safe manner as instructed by the project site superintendent. Pay particular attention to waste materials produced during the termination of optical fiber cabling. Ensure that all used components and fi ber cut-offs are collected in purpose- made containers and disposed of properly.

2. Unused cable in lengths greater than 3m shall be turned over to the owner and not discarded as waste without the owner’s approval.

N. Conduit / Penetrations:

1. Provide expansion plugs in all ducts/conduits entering the building. Seal all unused ducts/conduits with plugs that allow the pull-string to be tied off on the inside.

2. Replace all moisture and fire barrier material in ducts, conduits and other penetrations disturbed during installation of communications cabling. Install barrier material in all fire -rated penetrations that have cabling running through them. The barrier material shall be installed so the final penetration has the same fire rating as the original wall/floor.

3. Reinstate all pull-wires in conduits and ducts after use to facilitate future addition of cables

4. The number of cables in each conduit shall be controlled to allow for future cable installation and to stay within the manufacturer’s maximum allowable cable pulling tension. Conduit fill ratios shall not exceed the current requirements of the NEC.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 August 26, 2025 7

3.2 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING
A. Communications Data Horizontal Copper Cabling

1. Provide two Category 6/6A horizontal cable running from each work area connector to the patch panels located in the Telecommunications Room serving that outlet.

2. Provide a 10’ service loop coiled within in the vertical rack wire manager for each cable termination.

3. Provide a 1’ service loop coiled in the ceiling space of each terminated wall outlet. Service loop shall have all cables to the station outlet bundled together with Velcro ties and supported either by a J- hook, or wire basket.

4. Terminate all four pairs of each end of each cable with an RJ45 communications connector using the EIA/TIA 568B termination scheme.

B. Provide J-hooks and cable hangers as necessary to support cables running in the ceiling void. J -hooks shall be appropriately sized to allow a minimum of 50% spare capacity for future cable installation. J -hooks shall be at least 1” wide and fitted at no more than 48” centers. At no time shall any cable rest on ceiling tiles.

See Section 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems for product and execution requirements.

C. The number of cables in each conduit shall be controlled to allow for future cable installation and to stay within the manufacturer’s maximum allowable cable pulling tension. Conduit fill ratios shall not exceed (40% of GSA) the current requirements of the NEC.

D. The maximum run length of each horizontal copper cable shall not exceed the 90m (~295ft) limit specified by ANSI/TIA-568.D-2. Notify the Owner’s Representative prior to installation if, due to on -site conditions or other factors, horizontal cable lengths exceed this distance.

E. All cable bundles exiting floor or wall conduit penetrations and running into open furniture cabling systems or casework shall be wrapped in spiral wrap or split-loom tubing from the point of entry to the last outlet served to protect the cabling and provide a neat installation.

F. Dedicated raceway systems are excluded.

G. Cabling in wireways shall be pulled taught to minimize cable slack and allow for easy disentanglement from other cables.

H. Label each connector with the cable number.

3.3 COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS
A. Standard Work Area Outlet
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
271500 August 26, 2025 8

1. Each standard work area outlet will be a wall-mounted flush modular faceplate configured with (2 or 4) RJ45 connectors as shown on the drawings unless otherwise noted.

2. The faceplate shall fit over a deep NEMA electrical outlet box fitted with a single gang plaster ring cover. Faceplate finish shall be as directed by the Architect.

3. Any unused faceplate opening shall contain a matching blanking insert.

B. Wall-phone Faceplate

1. Each wall-phone outlet will be a wall-mounted flush modular stainless-steel faceplate to house a single (1) RJ45 connector.

2. The faceplate shall fit over a deep NEMA electrical outlet box fitted with a single gang plaster ring cover and be capable of having a wall-mounted telephone fitted directly over it.

C. Furniture / Raceway Faceplate

1. Each Furniture outlet will be a flush-mounted modular faceplate to house RJ45 work area jacks as shown on the drawings.

2. The faceplate shall fit over a modular raceway.

3. Any unused faceplate opening shall contain a matching blanking insert.

END OF SECTION 27 15 00
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS
280500 08/26/2025 1

SECTION 280500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work shall consist of the design, provision, termination, testing and documentation of a complete and fully functional environment of electronic security systems. The instructions in this section are specific to security system installations and should be read in conjunction with other contract documents as applicable.

B. Related Documents:

1. The drawings and general provisions of the Subcontract apply to this Section.

2. Review these documents for coordination with additional requirements and information that apply to work under this Section.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section 010000 “General Requirements"

2. Division 01 Section 013500 "Special Procedures"

3. Division 07 Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping"

4. Division 08 Section 087100 "Door Hardware"

5. Division 26 Section 260500 "Common Work Results for Electrical"

6. Division 26 Section 260501 “Inspections and Testing of Electrical Work”

7. Division 26 Section 260523 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cable"

8. Division 26 Section 260526 "Secondary Grounding for Electrical Systems"

9. Division 26 Section 260533 "Electrical Conduit"

10. Division 26 Section 260533.13 "Boxes for Electrical Systems" D. Where there are discrepancies between the drawings and the specification, herein, and related specification’s sections, Contractor shall be responsible to providing the more onerous solution.

1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. General Description: This specification section covers general requirements for the furnishing, installation and testing of a complete expansion to the Owner’ electronic access control and video surveillance system.

B. Furnish and install Electric Access Control System (EACS) software programming, hardware devices, mounting brackets, power supplies, switches, equipment cabinets, controls, consoles and other components of the system as shown and specified.

C. Furnish and install Video Surveillance System (VSS) software programming, hardware devices, mounting brackets, power supplies, video servers, Network Video Recorders (NVR), and equipment enclosures, as shown and specified.

D. Furnish and install electrified locking hardware, special power supplies, door and frame modifications, and other components and services of the locking mechanisms as shown and specified.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS
280500 08/26/2025 2

E. Furnish and install outlets, junction boxes, pull boxes, conduit, connectors, wiring, and other accessories necessary to complete the system installation. Requirements shall be in accordance with Division 26, Electrical Work.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
A. General

1. The approved Contractor shall be responsible for satisfactory operation of the system and its certification.

2. Approval of the Owner is required of products or services of the proposed manufacturer, suppliers and installers and will be based upon conformance to the specifications.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications

1. System components shall be furnished by manufacturers of established reputation and experience who shall have produced similar equipment and who shall be able to refer to similar installations rendering satisfactory service.

2. The manufacturer's products shall have been in satisfactory operation on at least three similar installations for not less than three years. The contractor shall submit a list of similar installations.

3. Components including, but not limited to, card access controllers, cameras, intercoms, computers, and power supplies shall have been tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Factory Mutual Systems, or another approved independent testing labor atory.

4. Components installed within a common enclosure shall be approved by an agency recognized by the local city Department of Building and Safety as an assembly.

C. Contractor Qualifications

1. Hold current legally required California State Contractor's licenses necessary to accomplish the installation and activation of the described system at the facilities indicated. Contractors shall submit copies of licenses to Owner prior to the start of work.

2. Hold current legally required state registrations required to meet local requirements for submittal drawings.

3. Have manufacturers trained and certified engineering, field technicians and programming staff.

4. Indicate complete and total compliance with the provisions of these Specifications by letter or by submittal of the bid response forms, signed by an officer of the corporation, or a principal if other ownership exists. In addition, the letter or forms shal l include a complete listing of exceptions, if any.

1.4 GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. Contract Compliance: Provide the Systems and Services in accordance with the conditions and system descriptions as described in Part 1 of each specification section. Provide specified or Owner approved equivalent alternate products as described in Part 2 o f each specification section. Utilize specified procedures and practices as described in Part 3 of each specification section.

B. Codes: Furnish material and workmanship for this work in conformance with applicable legal and code requirements.

C. Inclusive Work: Provide sufficient time, material, and manpower to verify, revise or refine the Bid Drawings as necessary to develop fully engineered Shop Drawings as required by the General Requirements, and in order for this work to realize complete, stable and safe operation.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS
280500 08/26/2025 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Perform this work in accordance with acknowledged industry and professional standards and practices, and the procedures specified herein.

B. Aesthetics are an important consideration in this installation. Components shall be installed to have aesthetically pleasing results per Owner and Architect requirements. Actual locations of visible components shall be coordinated in advance with Owner and Architect.

C. The Contractor shall insure that installation personnel understand the requirements of this Specification.

3.2 SOFTWARE UPGRADES
A. If more recent versions of the operating system or application software are made available to or requested by the Owner prior to system acceptance, these updated versions shall be installed and verified by the Contractor.

B. Before installing upgrade software, Contractor shall ensure that existing database information is properly "backed-up" prior to any installation action.

3.3 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION, ACCEPTANCE TESTING, AND COMMISSIONING A. Provide Preliminary Testing, Inspection, Acceptance Testing, Burn -In and Commissioning Performance services for systems and equipment in accordance with Testing and Commissioning, Section 28 08 00.

3.4 FINAL PROCEDURES
A. Portable Equipment: Furnish portable equipment specified herein to the Owner, along with complete documentation for the materials furnished. Portable equipment shall be presented in the original manufacturer’s packaging, complete with manufacturer’s instructions, manuals and documents. Testing of portable equipment shall have been previously conducted by the Contractor.

B. Post Acceptance Work: Check, inspect and adjust systems, equipment, devices, and components specified, programming updates, at the Owner’s convenience, approximately sixty (60) days after Acceptance of the Installation.

3.5 NOTICE OF COMPLETION
A. Acceptance Testing and acceptance requirements described above, including the Final Acceptance Test, have been satisfactorily completed, the Owner shall issue a Letter of Completion to the Contractor indicating the date of such completion. The Notice of Completion shall be recorded by Contractor upon receipt of the Owner completion letter. This date of record shall be the start of the warranty period.

END OF SECTION
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 1
SECTION 28 10 00

ACCESS CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.00 CORRELATED DOCUMENTS AND OTHER WORKS OF JURISDICTION A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. The Architectural Drawing Package, marked for Bid, and any current revisions noted by project management.

C. Security systems drawings and other attached appendices and tables.

1.01 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
A. Owner: shall refer to City of Carlsbad, and all of its subsidiaries and affiliates B. Security Consultant (ACS Consultant, Consultant): shall refer to Vantage Technology Consulting Group. Refer to “PART 1, SUBMITTALS” for any specific identification.

C. Project/Construction Manager (CM): shall refer to TBD.

D. General Contractor (GC): shall refer to the lowest responsive GC awarded the construction contract.

E. Bidder: shall refer to any party proposing to provide the services and material delineated in this Specification.

F. Bid: shall refer to a Bidder’s proposal to provide the services and material delineated in this Specification.

G. ACS: shall refer to the Access Control System(s) described in this Section.

H. ACS Integrator (Security Contractor, Integrator, Contractor): shall refer to the awarded contractor for this scope of services.

I. ACS Specification (Specification): shall refer to the complete set of designs, performance and delivery requirements delineated within this document and all referenced documents.

J. ACS (Security System): shall refer to the complete complement of equipment, software and other material that upon completion of assembly, installation and configuration that provides full functionality and technical performance delineated in this Specification.

K. ACS Equipment (Security Equipment): shall refer to any and all individual equipment items and equipment items supplied by others installed as a part of the Access Control System.

L. Work: Design and provision the ACS and associated equipment, software, and services for the Project.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 2
M. Construction Documents: shall include all documentation associated with the design and general construction of the Project, including this Specification.

N. Provide: Supply (furnish), deliver, install, test, configure, label, and commission.

O. Manufacturer: shall refer to the original manufacturer of any equipment provided as part of the Work
P. Commissioning Date: shall refer to the date at which a system is formally accepted by the Owner.

Q. OFE: Owner Furnished Equipment.

R. OFCI: Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed.

S. CFCI: Contractor Furnished, Contractor Installed.

1.02 SCOPE/DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work covered in this Specification consists of furnishing all labor, material , and services to install a complete ACS as indicated on the project documentation, including this specification and related drawings.

B. The work described in this Specification shall include, but not be limited to, the following Basic Services:

1. Engineering and Design: The ACS Integrator shall provide all system engineering and design necessary to develop the complete systems described herein.

Engineering and Design shall include preparation of all necessary electronic schematics, hardware drawings, systems diagrams, schedules, and lists.

2. Procurement and Assembly: The ACS Integrator shall procure and assemble all hardware and equipment and any additional materials as required to deliver completely functioning ACS.

3. Software Programming: The ACS Integrator shall perform all required software setup, configuration, and programming required to develop a complete operating system in accordance with this Specification, including all control logic and push - button component faceplate or interface programming.

4. Installation: The ACS Integrator shall install all equipment, cable, wiring, connectors, plates and other material at the Project site per the ACS Integrator’s approved designs. The ACS Integrator shall install any Owner Furnished Equipment identified in this document and calibrate it to work with the integrated systems.

5. Testing and Adjustment: The ACS Integrator shall perform all tests and adjustments, furnish all test equipment necessary and perform all work required to properly configure the systems and to verify their performance in accordance with the information in this Specification and the ACS Integrator’s approved engineered designs.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 3

6. Acceptance Testing: Prior to Owner acceptance and hand-over of the completed ACS, the ACS Integrator shall demonstrate the operation of the complete systems, including all individual devices and specified control functions. Both subjective and objective tests may be required by the Owner to determine compliance with the information in this Specification and the ACS Integrator’s approved designs.

7. Training: The ACS Integrator shall provide technical training of the Owner's staff, instructing them on ACS operation, maintenance and troubleshooting.

8. Warranty: The ACS Integrator shall warranty the ACS in accordance with the terms of this Specification.

9. Specific Responsibilities:
a. Supply and install miscellaneous material, as necessary, to mount the ACS equipment.
b. All primary conduit and wire-ways are included in the General Contractor’s scope of work and are not to be provided in the ACS Contract. Supply and install all miscellaneous conduits and wireways to the extent not included in Division 26 to provide a complete and operable system.

10. The Preliminary Schedule below identifies critical Project milestones and delivery expectations currently anticipated. This information is provided for Bidder planning purposes only. The actual Schedule for delivery of the work shall be coordinated with the Owner’s representative or Construction Manager.

11. Refer to “BID SUBMITTALS”, Section 1.05 and “SUBMITTALS”, Section 1.07 .A for additional information and requirements.

1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. All onsite labor must be in compliance with job-site union requirements.

B. The ACS Integrator must obtain any permits and shall pay all fees required by public agencies having jurisdiction over the Work.

C. All products and materials provided shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratory (UL) and shall bear the UL label intended for the purpose specified and indicated. If UL has no published standards for a particular item, then other national independent testi ng standards shall apply, and such items shall bear those labels.

D. All equipment and installations under this Specification shall conform to the latest editions of the following:

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

2. NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code

3. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 4

4. ANSI/TIA-568, -569 and -607 Telecommunications Standards

5. IEEE 142-2007 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.

E. The ACS Integrator and its employees shall perform all work in compliance with current Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) guidelines and regulations and other safety and health requirements as may be mandated by the Owner, the General Contractor or other authorities.

F. The ACS Integrator shall have a thorough knowledge of governing codes and standards in effect and having jurisdiction over the Project. Lack of awareness of any of the relevant codes and standards will not be accepted as a reason for non -compliance.

G. The ACS Integrator shall be responsible for providing cable and materials that comply with applicable codes and requirements of regulating bodies. The cost for these materials shall be included in the Bid price, as the Owner shall not accept change orders for ch anges in materials.

1.04 COORDINATION OF RELATED WORK BY OTHERS
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: The ACS Integrator shall coordinate with the General Contractor and other construction trades to ensure proper integration and operation of the ACS with the complete Project designs, building systems and all other elements of the Project. The ACS Integrator should request from the Owner, General Contractor, or Architect complete project Construction Documents to help facilitate effective coordination of the ACS Integrator’s work with the work of others.

B. Some components of the complete ACS will be provided by the GC, its sub-contractors or the owner. It shall be the responsibility of the ACS Integrator to coordinate with all parties whose work impacts the ACS Integrator’s work to ensure the complete coordination and successful implementation of the ACS. Related work by GC shall include, but may not be limited to, the following:

1. Electrical Work (Division 26):
a. Electrical (AC) Power Service and Connections:
1) Technical Power Service: All electrical panels, power receptacles, lighting fixtures, dimmers, light poles, lighting controls, and interconnecting wiring shall be supplied by the Electrical Contractor. 2) If required, the ACS Integrator shall extend AC power circuits and insulated ground wires into each equipment rack. This work must be done by a qualified electrician, licensed in the jurisdiction of this project, and under direction from the ACS Integrator.
b. Low Voltage Cable Containment
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 5
1) Low voltage cable containment, including raceways, conduits and junction boxes, required to support ACS devices and interconnecting cabling shall be as specified in the Construction Documents and shall be provided by the Division 26 Contractor.
2) Upon commencement of work on the Project, the ACS Integrator shall review the Construction Documents to confirm that the infrastructure provided is sufficient to accommodate the ACS to be installed. Any conflicts or issues must immediately be brought to the attention of the Construction Manager or General Contractor, and the ACS Consultant. 3) The ACS Integrator shall provide blank cover plates or panels for all wall and ceiling boxes that are dedicated to the ACS but do not have devices and/or connectors at the time of ACS commissioning. Colors and types shall be coordinated with the Architect.
c. Metals (Division 5)
d. Rough Carpentry (061000)
e. Joint Sealants (079200)
f. Door Hardware (087100)
g. Finishes (Division 9)
h. Video Surveillance (282000)
i. Information Technology Systems: Unless otherwise specified, all data networking cabling shall be provided by Section 271300 and 271500 contractor(s) and the Owner. Unless otherwise specified, all active data networking electronics shall be provided by the Section 272000 contractor and the Owner. Patch cords to connect ACS equipment to a data network port shall be provided by the ACS Integrator. The ACS Integrator shall be responsible for coordinating with the Owner or the Owner’s designated representative regarding connections between the ACS and the Owner’s data network, including all client/server computing and peripherals, Internet, digital video storage and other data/media distribution systems. Unless otherwise specified, equipment racks and cabinets, PDU’s, and UPS’s shall be provided by the Section 271100 contractor and/or the Owner. Coordinate with those entities to ensure space is available for any rack-mounted equipment.
j. Paging and life safety: Interfacing the ACS System(s) to the life safety systems may be required. The ACS Integrator shall be responsible for coordinating with the Contractor or the Owner’s designated representative regarding connections between the ACS and the Life Safety system. All ACS with a control processor shall be connected to the fire/life safety systems by cabling extended by the F/LS contractor into the ACS equipment cabinet and shall be configured upon fire alarm or testing contact closure trigger to react as Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 6
required by the AHJ until the trigger is cleared and the system can be restored to its normal operation.

2. ACS Connections to Building Systems and Controls:
a. Building systems and controls provided by the General Contractor or Owner that may be interconnected to the ACS shall include environmental controls, fire and life safety, and CCTV systems. Where required, the interconnection between these systems and the ACS is designated in these Specifications and the Construction Documents, including requirements for low voltage interface electronics. The ACS Integrator shall verify that all required system components and interfaces are specified and provided to enabl e the functional performance described in this Specification. b. The ACS Integrator shall coordinate with the General Contractor to verify that all devices and controls to be interconnected to the ACS are functioning properly prior to commencing interconnection to the ACS Equipment. c. The ACS Integrator shall investigate all hardware and software control conflicts between the building systems and the ACS Equipment before interconnecting the building systems. Report any conflicts, potential or existing, to the ACS Systems Consultant, in writing, before interconnecting the systems. Damage caused to any base building systems due to the improper connection of ACS Equipment shall be the sole responsibility of the ACS Integrator.
d. The ACS Integrator shall select and install the appropriate cable type to facilitate device communication from the ACS Equipment to interconnected building systems.
e. The ACS Integrator shall coordinate with the General Contractor to verify the proper operation of the connected ACS Equipment and the building systems after interconnecting the systems.

3. Other Systems: The ACS Integrator shall be responsible for identifying and integrating with any other technology systems and services required to deliver the completely operating ACS.

4. Equipment Mounting and Support:
a. Structural support for ACS equipment shall be provided by others as noted and detailed in the Construction Documents. The ACS Integrator shall coordinate with the General Contractor and other trades as necessary to ensure compatibility of the structural supports provided by others with the ACS Equipment provided by the ACS Integrator.
b. The ACS Integrator shall install all ACS Equipment, including all camera and video monitor mounts, as indicated in this Specification and the Construction Documents. The ACS Integrator shall verify location and structural suitability before attaching equipment and mounts. Any variations from the drawings Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 7
and specifications or any question of structural integrity shall be brought to the attention of the General Contractor, Architect, and ACS Consultant before installing the equipment.

C. Work Furnished by Others (“F.B.O.”) but installed by the ACS Contractor:

1. Owner Furnished Equipment (OFE): Some equipment that will become a part of or connect to the ACS may be provided by the Owner and shall be designated as Owner Furnished Equipment (OFE). Owner Furnished Equipment shall be supplied by the Owner to the ACS Integrator for connection, installation and/or integration into the ACS as delineated in the construction documents and this Specification.

This may include new or existing equipment. The ACS Integrator shall be responsible for coordinating with the Owner’s representative or Construction Manager to ensure that all Owner Furnished Equipment is fully operational and compatible with other ACS Equipment and that it is made available to the ACS Integrator in a timeframe that does not delay the ACS Integrator’s work.

1.05 BID SUBMITTALS
A. Examinations: Carefully examine the contract documents and the construction site to obtain first-hand knowledge of existing conditions. Contractors are not compensated for conditions that can be determined by examining documents or site and will not be r elieved of any obligations with respect to bid.

B. Questions: Submit all questions about the contract documents in writing. Replies requiring changes to the contract documents will be issued to all bidders as addenda and will become part of the Contract. The Architect and Owner may give, but will not be responsible for, oral clarifications. Questions received less than 10 days before the bid date cannot be answered in writing.

C. Equipment Availability: Verify with manufacturers’ availability and cost of all equipment proposed, including equipment specified herein. No cost increases will be allowed for manufacturers' cost increases, or substitutions required because of unavailabil ity of proposed equipment.

D. Performance Bond (Add Alternate): Furnish a Performance Payment Bond and Labor and Material Bond, underwritten by a surety company approved by the Owner or Owner’s representative, for fulfillment of all provisions of the contract.

E. Basis of Bids: To be eligible for Bid consideration, submit bids in accordance with the following:

1. Include a complete itemized list for each base-bid system indicating the manufacturer, model number, unit cost and total costs for all specified items.

Itemization of miscellaneous equipment such as cable, switches, and receptacles is not required.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 8

2. Clearly indicate the total cost, including all expenses, for each individual system to allow the Owner to select any or all to be included in the contract. Itemization of miscellaneous equipment such as cable, switches, and receptacles is not required. a. Access Control

3. Organize each list with the information presented, in the order that it appears in this specification, in 6 columns from left to right:
a. Paragraph number as it appears in this specification. b. Paragraph title as it appears in this specification. c. Manufacturer and model number.
d. Quantity.
e. Unit Cost.
f. Extension (unit cost times quantity).

4. At the end of each list, indicate the cost of all other items such as for miscellaneous equipment, engineering, installation labor, overhead, taxes, etc.

5. On a separate list, indicate costs of any specified add- or deduct-alternates with the information presented in the same manner as for the base-bid system.

6. Include a listing of any voluntary alternates proposed by the bidder as substitutions or additions to the specified systems.

7. Include any notes or comments if necessary, to qualify the bid.

8. Identify any sub-contractors and indicate the work that is in their scope.

9. Provide documentation of ability in installing similar systems. Furnish the names, addresses and telephone numbers of the System Designer, Architect, General Contractor and Owner on three projects similar in scope, which the Contractor has installed within the last 5 years.

10. Identify the proposed project management, engineering, and installation staff.

Include resumes for each individual indicating relevant experience and certifications.

11. Include certification of ownership and full familiarity with the operation of the following minimum software and analysis tools:
a. AutoCAD, version as required by the Owner (or .dwg compatible software, Stardraw not acceptable).
b. Revit, version as required by the Owner; or other BIM software, version as required by the Owner.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 9

12. BIDS NOT FULLY ITEMIZED OR NOT SUBMITTED IN THIS FORMAT WILL BE REJECTED.

F. Delivery Schedule:

1. Unless otherwise directed in Division 00, within 14 days of receipt of bid package provide:
a. Basis of bid documents, including:
1) Itemized equipment costs for specified equipment or APPROVED substitutions.
2) Qualifications/References
3) Certifications (including certificate of bonding, if required) 4) Proposed payment terms.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Project Management: Maintain the same person in charge of work throughout the installation. Engineering and construction supervisors shall be ESA CSI or approved equal.

B. Contract Documents: Maintain a complete set of the latest version of system drawings and specifications, including any redlines, at the site at all times during installation.

C. Fabrication and Installation: Fabricate all equipment racks and subassemblies , as required.

Make field connections of all control wiring to equipment, equipment racks , and connection panels. Continuously supervise the installation and connections of cable and equipment.

D. ACS Contractor Qualifications: To be considered qualified for this work, bidders must meet the following standards:

1. The Contracting firm is experienced in the provision of ACS similar in complexity to those required for this project.

2. The Contractor’s primary business is the provision, fabrication , and installation of professional ACS and related systems.

3. The Contractor has been regularly engaged in the installation and service of professional ACS for a period of at least five years.

4. The Contractor is an authorized dealer for the major products furnished.

5. The proposed Project Engineer holds ESA CSSI certification or approved equal. The proposed installer holds ESA CAT certification or approved equal.

6. The Contractor is experienced in cloud-based control and management systems.

7. At the request of the Owner, Owner’s representative, or Architect, demonstrate the following capabilities:

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 10
a. Adequate plant and equipment to complete the work in accordance with the project schedule.
b. Sufficient staff with appropriate technical experience to oversee and execute the work.

E. Subcontractors: The Contractor may arrange for sub-contract field and special shop work to be done by others.

F. Prime Contractors: Any other installer who intends to bid on this work as the Prime Contractor and does not meet the “Contractor Qualifications” described above shall employ the services of a single “ACS Contractor” who does meet these requirements. The ACS Contractor shall Furnish and Install the equipment. The Prime Contractor shall clearly identify the ACS Contractor and submit complete qualification information for the ACS Contractor in the Bid. Failure to do so will be cause for rejection of the Bi d.

1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. General:

1. The ACS Contractor has the burden of proving, at the Contractor's own cost and expense and to the satisfaction of the Architect, that the proposed product is similar and equal to the named product.

B. Documentation:

1. File a formal request for each substitution, documenting the conditions outlined below, including:
a. Complete data on the proposed substitution, substantiating compliance with the ACS Contract Documents, including:
1) Specification Section and description of the equipment or service originally specified by the ACS Consultant
2) Product manufacturer, model, and description of the proposed substitution
3) Performance specification and test data verifying the proposed substitution’s compliance with ACS and installation requirements. 4) References and samples, where applicable
5) An itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the item originally selected in the ACS Specification
6) The impact of the proposed substitution on the Contract time schedule, system design, artistic effect (for changes in finish or dimension), and related contracts and trades
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 11

2. Submit item comparisons, coordination schedules, and design impact via addenda appended to manufacturer documentation.

C. Basis:

1. Requests for acceptance of proposed equivalents made following the award of bid are considered only in the following cases:
a. The named products cannot be obtained by the ACS Contractor because of strikes, lockouts, bankruptcies or discontinuance of manufacturer and the ACS Contractor makes a written request for consideration of the proposed equivalent.
b. The proposed equivalent is approved as equal or superior to the named product and its use is to the advantage of the Owner.

D. Consideration:

1. A request for substitution is a representation by the ACS Contractor that:
a. The ACS Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitution and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. b. The same warranty is provided for the substitution as the original equipment specified.
c. The cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract but excludes costs under separate contracts and excludes Architect's re-design costs, and that the ACS Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently becomes apparent. d. Any cost impact on work by other trades is indicated. e. Installation of the accepted substitute will be coordinated by the ACS Contractor, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects.

2. An accepted substitution shall be documented by Change Order, effectively modifying the ACS Specification. The Contract Price will be changed only if the substitution results in cost savings to the Owner.

1.08 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS
A. Coordinate all submittals with requirements set forth in Section 013300.

B. General: Unless directed otherwise in Section 013300,

1. Provide six (6) hard copies of all submittals (including CD-ROMs) and final deliverables per site location unless otherwise directed by the project manager.

2. Delivery Schedule:

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 12
a. Within 21 days of award provide:
1) Bill of Materials
2) Manufacturer Catalog Data Sheets: Product Submittals shall be issued no sooner than six (6) months prior to scheduled installation onsite. 3) Shop Drawings
4) Custom finish material samples, if applicable.
b. One week before acceptance testing visits (system “check-out”) provide:
1) System test and certification reports
2) Manufacturer’s owner’s manuals
3) One (1) draft copy of user operational manuals
4) One (1) draft copy of “as-built” system diagrams
c. Within 30 days after final acceptance testing visit provide:
1) As-built system diagrams
2) User operational manuals

3. Unless otherwise directed by contract, do not order equipment until the Bill of Materials, Catalog Data Sheets, and shop drawings have been reviewed and approved by the Owner, Owner’s representative, or ACS Consultant. Any acquisition, assembly or installation of any systems or components without ACS Consultant’s approval will be subject to removal at the ACS Integrator’s expense.

4. Approval for isolated items will not be considered, except by prior authorization by the ACS Consultant.

5. All rejected items and items requiring correction must be resubmitted together in entirety unless otherwise approved.

C. Binders:

1. Provide indexed tabs and flyleaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment.

2. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers, 1" minimum, 2" maximum ring size

3. When multiple binders are used, collate the data into related consistent groupings.

4. Provide product data sheets in electronic .pdf format, or other approved file format.

Data sheets shall be organized in a logical manner, such as per system, to allow efficient review against the design documents.

D. Bill of Materials & Manufacturer Product Data Sheets:

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 13

1. Organize the Bill of Materials with the information presented in the order and format that it appears in this specification.

2. After the Bill of Materials, include Catalog Data Sheets (“cut” sheets) for all specified products arranged in the order listed in the Bill of Materials.

3. Clearly indicate all finishes, colors and, options for equipment.

E. Shop Drawings:

1. Size: minimum 24” x 36” unless otherwise specified.

2. Media: provide in electronic .pdf file format unless otherwise specified or directed by the Construction Manager.

3. Prepare a drawing package on the approved Computer Aided Drafting (CAD) or Building Information Modeling (BIM) system, including:
a. ACS Integrator name, address, and phone number.
b. Block diagrams indicating proposed connections of all equipment and indicating equipment brand and model numbers.
c. Equipment/ control room layout and equipment rack and cabinet details d. Provide detailed drawings of custom-fabricated or stock mounts and hardware.
e. ACS equipment arrangements.
f. Other drawings and sketches as required by the Architect or ACS Consultant during the course of project installation.

4. Design drawing files provided by the Architect and/or ACS Consultant as a courtesy in aiding the ACS Integrator in preparing Shop Drawings must be modified to include the information specified above. Submitting design drawings without these modifications is not acceptable.

F. Data Network Connectivity

1. Any system, or components of a system, provided in this specification section which is to be connected to the Owner’s data network either via wired or wireless connections will conform to the requirements described in PART 3 - EXECUTION.

Vendors shall review the requirements of this section and provide a statement of compliance for each item that either:
a. Confirms that the proposed System (or any applicable components of the System) is compliant with the requirements listed in the item, or b. Explains why the proposed System (or any applicable components of the System) is not compliant, including any potential mitigation measures that may resolve the non-compliance issue.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 14
G. Configuration, Management, and Control Software Submittals

1. Control System Software consists of the following two primary components:
a. Control System Graphical User Interface (GUI)
b. Control System Processor Software

2. In order to develop Control System Software that is functional and understandable by the intended users, it will be necessary for the ACS Integrator to provide “working” copies of the software for review and comment by the Owner and the Project team as it is being developed.

3. The software programming process must be an iterative process that includes a minimum of three (3) iterative submittals prior to the first beneficial use. The following table is provided to help facilitate the software development process:

Deliverable Notes Due
Initial Submittal Listing of individual device control
functions
GUI logic flow diagram
Static touch panel layouts
Initial labeling of button panels

Due no later than one
week after return of
approved shop drawings
First Beta Review Dynamic touch panel Layouts
including page flips, pop-ups,
feedback, etc. to show operational
relationships between pages
Due no later than two
weeks after return of
approved Initial Submittal
Second Beta Review Interface updates and revisions
Test of loaded working system (in-
shop or on-site)
Due no later than three
weeks after return of
approved First Beta
Review submittal
Implementation / On-
site Testing
Loading of live code into working
systems
Prior to Substantial
Completion
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 15
Completion Follow-up programming review and
minor modifications based on user
feedback
60 days after Final
Acceptance
H. Project Plan

1. Provide a complete and detailed Schedule for the ACS Integrator’s work describing the major tasks, sequence of work, submittals and other critical milestones. At a minimum, the tasks noted in the Schedule shall include all required submittals, rack assembly, and shop testing, on-site cable installation, periodic shop, and site visits, on-site equipment installation, testing and commissioning, Substantial Completion and Project Completion. Indicate the sequence of installation and completion by area and/or system. The Schedule shall also include anticipated dates of acquisition of major equipment and their installation milestones.

2. Provide a complete listing of the ACS Integrator’s project team, including the names and all contact information (email address, cell phone, etc.) for all personnel assigned to the Project. At a minimum, this Project Team Directory shall include the ACS Integrator’s executive in charge of the Project as well as the Project Manager, Lead Engineer, and Lead Installer. Include names and contact information for all sub-contractors.

I. Weekly Status Reports

1. If directed by the Construction Manager, the Audiovisual Systems Integrator shall provide weekly progress updates to the Architect and Audiovisual Systems Consultant. Weekly Status Reports shall be submitted as directed by the Construction Manager via hard copy or electronic means (i.e. email). Issuance of Weekly Status Reports shall commence from the date of the first submittal delivery and shall continue until contract closeout.

2. The Weekly Status Report shall not be used as an official means of communicating Project issues. It does not replace any part of a required submittal, request for information, proposed change order, report of field conditions, schedule issues, etc. No official response will be given to the Weekly Status Report.

3. A representative of the ACS Integrator shall attend the weekly construction meeting at the job site. This representative shall be fully knowledgeable in all aspects of the Project and the ACS Integrator’s work and shall have the authority to make binding commitments on behalf of the ACS Integrator.

J. Substantial Completion Submittals
Substantial Completion of the ACS installation shall be the point at which all ACS Equipment has been installed, programmed, configured and initially tested to confirm proper operation. The point of Substantial Completion shall be as mutually agreed between the ACS Integrator and the ACS Consultant following discussion and observation. At the point of agreed Substantial Completion, the ACS Integrator shall submit the following:

1. Test Reports:

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 16
a. Upon completion of SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS specified in PART 3 - EXECUTION, submit for approval in writing test results including numerical values for all measurements.
b. Submit written certification that the installation conforms to specifications, is complete and operable, and is ready for FINAL ADJUSTMENTS AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS specified in PART 3 - EXECUTION.
c. The Owner or Owner’s representative reserves the right to withhold the final site visit “check-out” and any final certification of project completion until receipt of test report documents, as outlined in this section (SECTION 1 – “Test Reports”).

2. Preliminary Project Record Documents Submittal
a. Upon Substantial Completion, the ACS Integrator shall submit Preliminary Project Record Documents to the ACS Consultant. Preliminary Project Record documents shall be submitted prior to the Preliminary Checkout. b. Preliminary Project Record Documents shall include:
1) Corrected/updated shop drawings
2) Updated Equipment List
3) Half-size drawings modified to reflect the actual installation conditions 4) USB flash drive or other approved media with manufacturers’ operation manuals arranged alphabetically and current drawings in .DWG format c. ACS Consultant’s Preliminary Checkout will be scheduled after the Preliminary Project Record Documents and Test Reports have been approved.

K. Manufacturer’s Owner’s Manuals:

1. Archive all Manufacturers’ Owner’s Manuals for specified equipment in the following manner:
a. One original (not a photocopy) manufacturer’s owner’s manual per equipment item.
b. Submit in a 3-ring binder including a cover page and spine insert identifying the project, site location, and submittal.
c. Arrange manuals in alphabetical order, by manufacturer. d. Provide a table of contents and separate each section within the binder with tab dividers.
e. Provide all Manufacturer’s Owner’s Manuals in electronic .pdf format on USB flash drive or other approved media. Owner’s Manuals shall be organized in a logical manner such as per system and/or alphabetical order, by manufacturer.

L. User Operational Manual:

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 17

1. Intent: Prepare in the form of a system operations manual for use by Owner's personnel. System documentation shall be adequate such that a person trained on the System, but with no familiarity with this specific implementation, shall be able to understand the configuration and implementation of all major and minor systems as well as how these systems are integrated to form the overall System.

2. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed titles "SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS".

3. Format: Submit the User Operational Manual in the following format:
a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11", 20 lb. minimum weight white paper for typed pages, either manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten.
b. Drawings: Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages.
c. Provide Operational Manual in electronic .pdf format on USB flash drive or other approved media.

4. Content of Manuals: Prepare the User Operational Manual with the following content:
a. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume arranged in systematic order. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.
b. Contractor name of responsible principal, address and telephone number c. Certificate of Warranty
d. Service Contract: Include a preliminary schedule for the specified semi- annual site visits.
e. Complete as-built diagrams for systems.
f. Receptacle Location Plan
g. Shop drawings of all custom-fabricated items
h. Control Setting Schedule.
i. Documentation of all touch-panel screens both in the form of data files on CD-ROM and graphical printouts.
j. ACS control system configuration files on CD-ROMs for the management and control system, or other software required for re-configuring the ACS management and control system.

M. System Diagrams:

1. Provide sufficiently clear and complete information that a technician of average skill may efficiently troubleshoot and service the system, even if unfamiliar with the installation, based on diagrammatic representations of the installed system.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 18

2. Provide drawings showing all terminal blocks, connectors, relays, switches, equipment, components, and wires.

3. Provide layout drawings of panels and other custom assemblies containing switches, relays, terminal blocks, receptacles, etc., using reference numbers to identify physical locations of devices or label devices with reference numbers in a location visible while viewing cable terminations.

4. On wiring diagrams, label all conductors within cables for insulation color or other identifier.

5. Label connectors, barrier strips, switches, relay sockets, etc., for terminal number.

6. If device does not provide terminal designations, provide key diagram for reference.

7. Label all devices with manufacturer, model number, and reference number (e.g. "SW 15", "TB 6"); reference numbers shall be consistent across all drawings with no repetitions.

8. Provide labels for cables continued onto another drawing, indicating termination device, terminal numbers, and drawing sheet on which the termination is shown.

9. Illustrate all receptacles, patch panel jacks, and switches.

10. Mount one photographic, wash-off Mylar or rag paper photocopy prints of each system behind acrylic at locations to be determined.

11. Receptacle Location Plan: Plan drawing of area showing locations and designations of all receptacles.

N. Samples:

1. Advance Finish Samples for Approval/Coordination: Provide advance samples of finish for custom control panels and other custom items specified and provided by the ACS Contractor, as mandated within this document.

2. As-built Finish Samples for Archiving: For future repairs or modifications, include source information and samples for any custom finish or material including custom control panels and other custom items provided by the ACS Contractor.

O. Forward all submittals to:

1. The Construction Manager, or as directed.

1.09 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Sequencing and Scheduling:

1. Coordinate work with adjacent work of other trades to facilitate construction and prevent conflicts.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 19

2. Afford other trades reasonable opportunity for installation of work and for the storage of materials.

3. Staff the job to keep pace with the other Trades; otherwise, the project manager will require an increase in force or overtime work without additional expenses to the Owner.

4. Abide by the decision of the project manager in case of conflict or interference by other trades.

5. Remove all refuse from the job site to the satisfaction of the Owner’s representative.

B. Do not install equipment in dusty conditions or allow dust to accumulate in or on installed ACS Equipment.

C. Protect all work and equipment from damage by others.

D. Protect all existing work-in-place by others from damage by the ACS Integrator, the ACS Integrator’s agents and/or sub-contractors, or any employees or vendors. The ACS Integrator will be solely responsible for any/all damage to work-in-place by others.

E. Keep areas around and inside of each piece of equipment and each rack free from dust, dirt and debris throughout the project. Equipment that is not properly maintained during installation shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner before final payment is m ade to the ACS Integrator.

F. Storage and Staging:

1. The ACS Contractor is ultimately responsible for acquiring secure storage at the job site. Coordinate with project management and/or Owner to determine the location and size of the storage area.

2. All ACS Integrator equipment and materials and all owner furnished equipment turned over to the ACS Integrator stored at the ACS Integrator’s facility(s) or stored and/or installed at the Project site will remain the property of the ACS Integrator unless ownership is legally transferred and accepted in writing by the Owner. The ACS Integrator shall be solely responsible for the protection of all equipment from damage, theft or vandalism regardless of cause, until the work described herein is accepted by the Owner at the time of Final Checkout.

G. Refuse and Repair:

1. Upon completion of work remove all associated debris, waste, refuse, and rubbish from premises. Leave all areas and equipment within the scope of this contract clean, free of blemishes, and operational.

2. Repair any damage to the premises, at no cost to the Owner, caused by the ACS Contractor, its agents, and/or subcontractors.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 20
H. Adhere to the safety standards established by the General Contractor while performing work on site.

I. All employees of the ACS Integrator shall wear identification clearly indicating the ACS Integrator’s company name while on site.

J. All employees of the ACS Integrator shall comply with rules and policies established by the Owner and/or the General Contractor.

K. All vehicles of the ACS Integrator or employees shall be parked in areas designated by the Owner and/or the General Contractor.

L. Environmental Impact Considerations

1. The ACS Integrator is expected to comply with project specific practices and environmental considerations to comply with any LEED objectives and local environmental regulations.

2. The ACS Integrator is encouraged to utilize environmentally sustainable materials and work practices in the delivery of the Work. This may consist of (but not be limited to):
a. Energy Efficiency/Conservation
b. Waste Reduction/Recycling
c. Water Conservation
d. Pollution Prevention
e. Employee Education Programs
f. Transportation Planning
g. Utilization of Renewable Materials
h. Minimize Emission of Greenhouse Gases

3. Upon request, the ACS Integrator shall supply documentation on in-house policies for recycling and environmental offset goals.

M. Promotion/Publication:

1. The contractor does not have the rights to use any information or images, relative to this contractor installation, for publication or in promotional materials without the express written permission of the Owner, Architect, and Vantage Technology Consulting Group. Upon approval, the contractor must disclose full credit to the Architect and Consultant for facilities and system design.

N. Insurances on the work of this specialty trade shall be provided as specified in relevant project documentation.

O. Inspection
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 21

1. Notify the Architect of any defects in work by other trades affecting installation.

P. Packaging: Material and equipment manufacturers shall demonstrate efforts to reduce packaging waste and/or to use environmentally-preferable packaging materials. Examples include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Reusable and/or returnable pallets or crates

2. FSC-certified wood or salvaged wood pallets or crates

3. High recycled-content cardboard, paper, steel, or plastic packaging

4. Bio-based foam packing materials

1.10 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS:

A. Project Description

1. The project concerns the installation of new access control systems in the new North Building A at the Veteran’s Memorial park in the City of Carlsbad, as described below and shown in the drawings. This park consists of access control, video surveillance, and wireless access points.

B. Functional Requirements of Systems:

1. Access Control
a. Real-time access event monitoring
1) Control and response, including acknowledge, clear and annotate 2) Tracking and muster view/report generated by event or demand 3) Guard tour by point or card read
b. Manual override of system functions and schedules
1) Door modes: Lockout, Lockdown, PIN Only, Card+PIN, Card or PIN, Card Only
c. Reporting
1) Predefined or customized reports
2) Event triggered Muster/Tracking report
3) Schedule email of predefined reports
4) Export in HTML or delimited format
d. Elevator call and control
e. Anti-passback processing
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 22
1) Hard or Soft per reader
2) Learn mode override
f. Dynamic floor plans
1) Control access devices
2) Floor plan linking
g. Card numbers to 20 digits
h. Toggle lock during unlock schedule - lunch hour mode i. Toggle lock outside of schedule - after hours meeting mode j. Card database lookup
k. User defined procedures per event/ schedule
l. 3-Holiday types
m. ID badging production
n. Prioritized Alarm Events
o. Integrate access control, digital video and intrusion 1) Arm or disarm per card read
2) Record and playback access, intrusion or video events and alarms 3) Define video presets per event
4) Alarm video popup and user verification
5) Synchronized video playback with access, intrusion or video events 6) Define and extract video clips
p. Dynamic floor plans
1) Control access, intrusion and video devices
q. Manual override of system functions and schedules
1) Arm/disarm partitions and zone
2) Bypass/un-bypass zones
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 23
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ENGINEERING AND DESIGN
A. Engineering and other pre-site services included in this Specification are considered furnished goods delivered to the site in a similar manner to physical materials. PART 2 of the ACS specifications is for review by the ACS contractor’s engineering department. The contractor is responsible for reviewing the specification and drawings and providing an ENGINEERED fixed-price quotation covering the cost of all equipment and labor to install, program, warranty and service the systems described.

B. The contractor is responsible for attending all pre-bid meetings and reviewing and understanding the systems design, functionality and intent.

C. The owner assumes that all contractors providing bid responses have included all the necessary equipment, parts, cabling, labor, engineering, programming, project management, testing and training costs, and will not approve any additional fees or costs, unless shown and approved to be beyond the scope of the specification and drawings .

D. The equipment identified below provides examples of the level of quality and functionality required. These are predominantly major or unusual items and do not represent a complete list of equipment. The contractor is responsible for providing all equipmen t necessary for fully functioning turnkey systems.

E. Where the equipment described includes “or approved equal”, the contractor shall provide all documentation as indicated in paragraph 1.08 Substitutions to allow the owner or owner’s representative to make a determination prior to bid submittal.

F. Where the equipment described includes “or equal”, the contractor shall provide all documentation as indicated in paragraph 1.08 Substitutions as part of the product data submittal package delivered after award of contract.

G. Where the equipment described does not include “or approved equal” or “or equal”, the contractor shall provide only the product specified. No substitutions will be accepted.

2.02 ACCESS CONTROL
A. Integrated Security Software:

1. Provide turnkey system including software, server hardware, and all required licenses.

2. Acceptable Products:
a. AMAG
B. Integrated Security Software:
1) Symmetry
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 24
C. Door Controller:

1. 12 or 24 VDC power supply

2. SIO Communications: RS-485, half duplex, 2-wire

3. Compatible with specified card readers

4. Form-C relay outputs

5. Door contact supervision

6. REX pushbutton monitor

7. Strike control output

8. Elevator control

9. Dedicated tamper and power failure circuits

10. Encryption: AES 128-bit, minimum

11. Provide with all required reader modules, relay output modules, alarm input modules, as shown on the drawings or required; wall-mounted enclosure; power supply and battery; and daisy chain cable, as required.

12. Acceptable Products:
1) AMAG 2ENDC Two (2) Door POE Controller
D. Door Hardware Power Supply:

1. Applies to all integrated locksets. Power supplies for magnetic locks are provided by Division 8 contractor.

2. 115 VAC input

3. Dual-voltage output, 12/24 VDC

4. Amperage as required by lockset

5. Form C contacts for supervision

6. UL 294 and 603 listed

7. Acceptable Products:

8. Altronix Trove series
E. Card Reader:

1. 125 kHz proximity card reader

2. Wiegand interface

3. 5” read range
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 25

4. 5-16 VDC input power

5. Suitable for indoor or outdoor use

6. Approximately 1.7” wide for mullion mounting

7. Acceptable Products:
a. HID Signo 20K

2.03 GENERAL EQUIPMENT AND MISCELLANEOUS
A. Cabling, and Misc.

1. Windy City Composite. Plenum Rated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. All types of equipment installed by competent workers at locations shown on the drawings in strict accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions.

B. All delivered equipment, except portable equipment, firmly fastened or held in place. “Delivered equipment” includes cameras, video monitors, etc. Apply a minimum safety factor of four (4) times the load for all equipment fastenings and supports.

C. Take necessary precautions to prevent and guard against electro-magnetic and electro- static hum and to install the equipment to provide safety for the operator.

D. Protect all equipment, including patch panels, connectors, receptacles, racks, and consoles, from construction dust and debris until final acceptance of the system.

3.02 INTEGRATION/INSTALLATION
A. Conformance to Existing Facility Standards

1. Wherever possible provide equipment, finishes, and interfaces similar in nature to systems already in use by the Owner. Provide uniform functionality and operation to enhance ease of use and minimize instruction. Provide uniform finish and equipment to enhance the aesthetic unity of systems facility wide, and to improve end-user familiarity with equipment.

2. Equipment Integration:
a. New Equipment: Unless otherwise specified, supply only new equipment, parts and materials, and protect all equipment from construction dust and debris until final acceptance.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 26
b. Equipment Handling and Wear: Operate specified equipment only as required for testing, as part of the installation procedure.
c. Single Source: The provision of all manufactured components, installation, wiring, and testing is the responsibility of a single ACS contractor. d. All equipment and installations under this Specification shall conform to the latest edition of the following:
1) ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
2) ANSI/IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code
3) ANSI/TIA Standards 568, 569 and 607
4) IEEE/ANSI 142-2007 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.
5) Standard for Access Control Units
e. The ACS contractor shall not install any card reader, keypad, request-to-exit, or any other component located in exposed areas until a walkthrough has been scheduled for visual placement with final approval from the design team. The locations shown on the drawings are for reference purposes only, the Architect and Owner shall sign off on all final locations prior to the installation of the final devices with possible relocations based upon site conditions, these services shall be included in the contractors base bid. f. Equipment subject to public contact shall be installed with a torxhead or equal security fasteners unless protected by a factory supplied cabinet lock. g. Junction boxes, utility boxes, or other electrical enclosures housing system wiring not protected by factory supplied locks shall be installed with a torxhead or equal security fastener.
h. Interior mounted equipment shall be installed after room finishes have been completed to protect the equipment from contamination.

3. Equipment Quantities:
a. Determine and provide the quantities of installed equipment based on the Bid Documents including the plans, functional diagrams, riser diagrams, and specification.
b. Quantities of portable equipment are indicated in schedules contained in the drawings or specifications.

4. Engineering and Documentation:
a. The system drawings indicate the general layout of the various items of equipment and their functional relationships. Layout of equipment, accessories, and conduit systems are diagrammatic unless specifically Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 27
detailed and do not necessarily indicate every item or parameter required for a complete installation.
b. The ACS Contractor shall provide any incidental equipment needed in order to result in a complete and operable system even if not specified or shown on drawings without claim for additional payment.

B. Labels

1. Dry transfer, “Dymo”, or other types of adhesive labels not acceptable

2. Except where otherwise specified label as shown on drawings, and as specified, each item of rack-mounted equipment and all switches, controls, and receptacles

3. Switch and Control Panels: Constructed of engraved and filled anodized aluminum plates. Minimum 1/8" plate thickness - Dry transfer or other types of adhesive labels not acceptable

4. Rack-Mounted Equipment: Labels constructed of engraved and filled plastic laminate engraving stock. Designate function and input and output line(s) or loudspeaker(s) served by labeled equipment. Key all designations to system functional and patch panel diagrams. Where possible, mount labels on blank panel directly above corresponding component. For modular equipment, provide label on inside of mainframe door identifying type of module for each slot (unless there is only one type) and gain setting as established at final checkout.

5. Identification Panel: See drawings for layout and nomenclature. ACS Contractor is responsible for completing all bracketed items with the appropriate project - specific information.

6. Branding and Recognition: Identification of the contractor or use of contractor logos or similar “trademarks” or “signatures” (including but not limited to touch panel graphics and color schemes, silk-screened or engraved corporate logos, copyrighted fonts, and/or custom emblazoned panels) is strictly forbidden exce pt where explicitly indicated within the bid documents. Any unauthorized use of these marks will be rejected.

7. Receptacles: Engrave and fill receptacle label directly on mounting plate as indicated on drawings.

8. Patch Panels: Labels for jacks constructed of engraved and filled plastic laminate engraving stock or printable composition material with clear plastic cover. Labels for jack rows constructed of engraved and filled plastic laminate engraving stock.

Paper strips may be used as temporary labels only.
a. Label jacks with functional description of jack ("Camera 1", "Console Input 4", etc.).
b. Color-code jack labels with different colors for video level jacks, input and output jacks for recording/playback equipment, and other line-level jacks.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 28

9. Identify all wires and cables at every termination and connection point in accordance with the Owner’s standards using the specified cable markers, unless otherwise instructed by the Owner. Use a numbering scheme that identifies all cables terminating at patch panel jacks with the patch bay row and jack designation; use A, B, and C suffixes to distinguish multiple cables terminating at the same jack. Submit proposed numbering scheme for approval prior to installation.

10. Identify switches, relays, terminal blocks, etc., with reference numbers keyed to the as-built wiring diagrams.

11. Room numbers appear on the contract documents for reference only. All labels shall reflect the Owner's final room designations.

12. All labels and legends shall be as approved on shop drawings.

C. Racks, Cables, Connectors, and Miscellaneous Equipment

1. Wiring and Interconnections:
a. General:
1) Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to cables and equipment. 2) Make all joints and connections with rosin-core solder or approved mechanical connectors.
3) All wiring executed in strict adherence to standard security practices.

This includes:
a) Dress cables in conveniently sized bundles, combed into parallel runs, either laced or banded with sufficient plastic ties. b) For equipment mounted on glides, or otherwise requiring servicing from the front of the rack incorporate a cable "service loop" of sufficient length to permit the equipment to be pulled forward from the rack for servicing.
c) Support cables and bundles with sufficient plastic ties and support bars to ensure that no strain is placed on any connections or connectors.
d) Organize cables and cable bundles behind patch bays to permit easy access to the patch panels to add or remove cables. e) Place cable markers 3"-5" back from video connectors to permit easy viewing. Do not bind markers into cable bundles.
b. Grounding:

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 29
1) If not shown on drawings, ground case of power strip lines in equipment racks to the racks and directly to isolated ground buss in the power panel or to power system ground at the building AC service entry only. 2) Ground all conduits ONLY to power system ground. Insulate all conduits and electrical boxes from ACS, including equipment racks. 3) Insulate all conductors in conduit, including shields, from the conduit, back boxes, and from each other for the entire conduit length. c. Equipment Racks:
1) Install equipment in racks to permit access to all equipment for service.

Relays, terminal blocks, etc., mounted in rear of racks behind other equipment shall not prevent access to equipment connections or shall be mounted on hinged panels to permit access.
2) Where racks or cabinets are provided under this Section, wire all racks completely in the shop. No internal rack wiring is to be done on the job site.
3) Install equipment in racks with ventilating panels as required to provide adequate ventilation and according to equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
4) Where racks or cabinets are provided under this Section, p rovide unused panel space with blank or ventilating panels as shown on drawings.
5) Locate free-standing racks as indicated and to provide access to rear. d. Conduit:
1) Run all lines in metallic conduit or wireways unless otherwise indicated. 2) Do not locate AC power lines in conduit containing video lines. 3) Do not splice lines in conduit.
e. Receptacles:
1) Provide finish sample for approval by Architect.
2) Wall-mounted receptacles in metal boxes at building standard receptacle height unless otherwise indicated.
f. Video Receptacles:
1) Install feed-through receptacles to mounting plates with insulating washer and sleeve to electrically isolate the receptacle from the electrical box and conduit.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 30
2) Punch receptacles with "D" hole to prevent receptacle rotation within hole.

D. Wiring

1. Install systems wiring in accordance with the latest edition of local codes.

2. Any miscellaneous Ethernet cabling required, but not installed under Division 27, must be installed in accordance with Division 27.

3. Low voltage and coax cabling above access ceilings shall be grouped and supported every 3’ (and within 6” of terminations) with clips intended for this use. Low voltage and coax cabling in new wall construction shall be run in EMT sized to no more than 40% fill capacity. Low voltage and coax cabling along interior existing walls shall be run in surface metal raceway. Minimize use of surface metal raceway by routing vertically into ceiling spaces.

4. Label and color code wiring systems with labeling and coding shown on shop drawings.
a. Use white conductors only for neutral conductors and green only for grounding conductors.
b. Group conductors within junction boxes, pull boxes and equipment enclosures and lace with nylon tie straps with identification tags in individual sets, serving individual locks or groups. Conductor group shall be identified on the tag with respect to room or area served.

5. Standard wire shall be terminated with solderless, crimp-on, or insulated lugs properly sized for the gauge of wire and screw or push-on connection. The use of clamp type terminal connections is permitted. Pigtail and wire-nut connections are only permitted when equipment is supplied by the manufacturer in that manner as the only means of connection.

6. Point-to-point wiring less than 1,000 feet shall be installed with no sp lices. If wire runs exceed 1,000 feet, splices are acceptable in accessible junction or pull boxes.

3.03 NETWORK CONNECTIVITY
A. Requirements for Connection to the Owner’s Network:

1. All IP endpoints will be provisioned using 802.1X certificate-based authentication (EAP-TLS) with a unique private certificate deployed to every device using an automated tool.

2. The System shall natively support full dual-stack IPv4/6.

3. All ethernet connections shall support full duplex 10/100/1000Mb.

4. Any Power over Ethernet (PoE) requirements shall comply with 802.3af or 802.3at.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 31

5. Wi-Fi connections shall be compliant with at least one of the 802.11g/n/ac /ax standards. 802.11b shall not be supported.

6. All privileged/administrative user credentials shall be for named individuals. The use of shared/system accounts is prohibited except when justified by the system manufacturer and specifically authorized by the Owner.

7. Passwords for all accounts must be changed to adhere to the Owner’s password policy. Contractor shall provide documentation, tools and direct support to assist the Owner in changing any passwords known to the Contractor to those only known by the Owner. Passwords must support the Owner’s password policy (currently 16-character minimum for elevated accounts).

8. Authentication to all System components shall be using the Owner’s directory of record (Active Directory) and must support the Owner’s multi-factor authentication (Azure AD MFA) and FIDO2.

9. All authentication attempts (passwords) must be encrypted at rest and in -transit using industry standard encryption mechanisms.

10. Actions by service and privileged accounts must be logged and auditable.

11. Authentication and authorization events must be captured and logged. Logs are to be sent in real-time to the Owner’s log aggregation devices.

12. All Privileged access, user audit and important system and application logs must be sent to the Owner’s Security Information and Event Management (SIEM) in real - time.

13. All System components shall be configured using the least-privilege model ensuring that only necessary communication is possible. Unnecessary services shall be disabled, and host-based firewalls shall be used to enforce traffic restrictions.

Ingress/egress rules for System servers and handsets shall be applied to only allow only traffic that is required to ensure System functionality. Large port ranges are not to be allowed for Ingress. Ingress/Egress to the Internet shall be denied except to allow approved functionality.

14. Authorization is the determination of whether a user has permission to access particular information or applications. Proper authorization for use of an application usually requires the use of the appropriate attribute, group, and/or role as defined in the Owner’s Microsoft Active Directory (AD). The Contractor- provided service or application must be able to interface with AD.

15. The Owner requires secure and role-based authorization for the functions and elements appropriate to the individual’s role.

16. The Owner will provide any required physical or virtual servers or endpoint computers. Contractor shall provide requirements (including minimum and recommended configurations) for each System.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 32

17. All System software, operating systems and firmware shall be the latest version and updates at the time of Substantial Completion.

18. All components must be manufacturer-supported as active products for at least 5 years after installation. The use of software in or expected to be “Extended Support” during the 5 years subsequent to installation is prohibited. Security updates must be provided for products under active support.

19. All system products must detail End-of-Sale, End-of-Support and End-of- Maintenance dates.

20. The Contractor shall configure the entire System to periodically generate backups of all system software, configuration, programming, messages, and content to an Owner-directed location.

21. All web interfaces are expected to support the current version of the following browsers including the mobile versions for iOS and Android:
a. Microsoft Edge (or current Microsoft browser)
b. Apple Safari
c. Mozilla Firefox
d. Google Chrome

22. System shall be configured in accordance with Center for Internet Security (CIS) Benchmarks. Documentation shall be provided representing how the System is configured to align with the CIS Benchmarks.

23. The Owner limits the use of inherently insecure technologies, such as server - or client-side Java and Adobe Flash and requires that neither of these two technologies be used in or by any applications or interfaces.

24. Application whitelisting and endpoint malware prevention shall be deployed on all endpoints. Information detailing and supporting whitelisting support must be provided by the Contractor. All provided hardware and software must be compatible without disabling or reducing the Owner’s posture.

B. Network Connectivity:

1. All copper ethernet ports shall support 10Mb half-duplex as well as 10/100/1000Mb full duplex.

2. Upon installation, Contractor shall provide a table of switch port to patch panel connections

3. The network shall be provisioned such that each sub-system is on an isolated logical network (micro-segmentation). Dedicated and isolated segments will be setup for each connected system type and all traffic will be isolated to that logical network. Contractor will be responsible for coordinating with other project Contractors to document and configure the network in support of required firewall Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 33
rules and ACLs. Where required for functionality or described in this specification, connections to other systems will be permitted but must be locked down to the minimum traffic required and approved by the Owner. Individual system Contractors are responsible for documenting and justifying any proposed approved traffic to any other system with specific sources, destinations, traffic types and port numbers (e.g., source: server 1, destination, server 1, traffic type https, TCP port 443). The Owner shall be the sole arbiter of what traffic is allowed between systems.

4. Elevated or Administrative access shall be prohibited except via secure methods through an Owner bastion host.

5. Authentication, authorization and accounting (AAA) shall be via the Owner’s AAA directory of record (currently Active Directory).

3.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. Test all equipment to verify conformance with manufacturer's performance specifications and with this specification.

B. At a minimum, the following items shall be verified:

1. Cable Management, Termination, and Labeling Verification Item Numbers and Descriptions
a. CABL-100 – Cable Bend Radius
1) Verify that cables are not bent beyond their minimum bend radius as specified in cable data sheet in order to maintain signal integrity as defined in the project documentation.
b. CABL-101 –Connector Plate Input and Output Labeling
1) Verify that all ACS connector plate inputs and outputs are labeled as defined in the project documentation.
c. CABL-102 –Connector Seating
1) Verify that all ACS connectors are correctly keyed, seated, and latched to respective connection points as defined in the project documentation. Conditions where physical parameters exceed the connector's ability to maintain full seating should be resolved as defined in the project documentation.
d. CABL-103 –Connector Verification
1) Verify that all ACS cable terminations are made securely and meet the recommendations of the connector and cable manufacturer(s), published standards, and requirements defined in the project documentation.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 34
e. CABL-104 –Equipment Power Cable Management
1) Verify that all ACS equipment power cables are managed as defined in the project documentation. Verify that cables are managed in a uniform and acceptable manner so as not to compromise safety/OEM warranty, ACS signal quality, and/or future field service.
f. CABL-105 – ACS Cable Labeling
1) Verify that all ACS cables are identified by a unique ID as defined in the project documentation. Verify that this unique ID is displayed permanently at both ends of the cable, is legible, and is positioned where it can be seen without undue disturbance.
g. CABL-106 – Cable Separation
1) Verify that both site and rack cables have appropriate separation according to signal type and level as defined in the project documentation.
h. CABL-107 – Cable Supports
1) Verify that all cables are supported throughout their lengths as defined in the project documentation.
i. CABL-108 – Cable Ties
1) Verify that, where appropriate, cable ties are used to secure the cables, are correctly tensioned, and that the correct type of cable tie(s) is used as defined in the project documentation.
j. CABL-109 – Cables Bundled by Type
1) Verify that cables are only bundled together when their construction, signal type, and signal level are compatible and will not cause measurable crosstalk or interference between cables.
k. CABL-110 – Cables Dressed
1) Verify that cables are dressed to ensure that all rack and site cables are installed to provide serviceability, safety, and aesthetics as defined in the project documentation.
l. CABL-111 – Patch Panel Configuration
1) Verify that all patch panels have been correctly wired and configured as defined in the project documentation.
m. CABL-112 – Patch Panel Labeling
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 35
1) Verify that all patch panels have been labeled as defined in the project documentation. Verify that all labeling is machine-printed, consistent, durable, accurate, and legible.
n. CABL-113 – Termination Stress
1) Verify that all cable terminations have been completed and adequately supported to minimize stress on the termination point and/or connector.
o. CABL-114 –Connector Plate Consistent Labeling
1) Verify that ACS connector plates have consistent labeling throughout the project as defined in the project documentation.
p. CABL-115 –ACS Cabling Verification
1) Verify that all cabling is the correct type and routed correctly from point to point as defined in the project documentation.
q. CABL-116 – Cable Length Required for Serviceability
1) Verify that sufficient cabling is available so the device can be placed in a serviceable location as defined in the project documentation.

2. Control Performance Reference Verification Item Numbers and Descriptions a. CON-100 – Control System Communications
1) Verify that all control communications are tested from endpoint to endpoint via the appropriate midpoint(s) for operation and functionality as defined in the project documentation.
b. CON-101 – Interfacing and Control of External Devices and Systems 1) Verify that ACS control system interfaces to and from control systems provided by others conform to requirements as defined in the project documentation.
c. CON-102 – Mobile Device Integration
1) Verify that mobile devices that are to be supported are integrated and operating as defined in the project documentation.
d. CON-103 – System Response to Event Condition(s)
1) Verify that any required response of the installed ACS in the event of a configured event operates as defined in the project documentation. e. CON-104 – Control System Automated Functions
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 36
1) Verify that all time-dependent or automated functions executed by the control system conform to requirements as defined in project documentation.
f. CON-105 – Control System User Interface Performance
1) Verify that the control system is implemented in a manner consistent with the requirements as defined in the project documentation.

3. System and Record Documentation Reference Verification Item Numbers and Descriptions
a. DOC-100 – Final Inventory of ACS Equipment
1) Verify that all equipment has been delivered as defined in the project documentation.
b. DOC-101 – Approval of Samples
1) Verify that samples of all equipment to be used as defined in the project documentation have been submitted for approval.
c. DOC-102 – Delivered Product Against Samples
1) Where samples of products have been required for approval, verify that the products that are delivered are the same and of the same quality. d. DOC-104 – Consultant’s Testing
1) Verify that any consultant’s testing requirements defined in the project documentation have been performed and approved. e. DOC-105 – General Contractor’s Testing
1) Verify that any general contractor’s testing requirements defined in the project documentation have been performed and approved. f. DOC-106 – Integrator’s Testing
1) Verify that any integrator’s testing requirements have been performed and approved as defined in the project documentation.
g. DOC-107 – Manufacturer’s Testing
1) Verify that any manufacturer’s testing requirements defined in the project documentation have been performed and approved. h. DOC-108 – Owner’s Testing
1) Verify that any owner’s testing requirements defined in the project documentation have been performed and approved.
i. DOC-109 – Third-Party Testing
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 37
1) Verify that any third-party testing requirements have been performed and approved as defined in the project documentation.
j. DOC-110 – Substantial/Practical Completion
1) Verify that a conditional acceptance of the project has been issued by the owner or owner’s representative, acknowledging that the project or a designated portion is substantially/practically complete and ready for use by the owner, however some requirements and/or deliverables defined in the project documentation may not be complete. k. DOC-111 – As-Built Drawings Complete
1) Verify that a complete set of accurate as-built drawings indicating all ACS devices, ACS device locations, mounting details, system wiring and cabling interconnects, and all other details has been provided as defined in the project documentation.
l. DOC-113 – Control System Test Reporting
1) Verify that the control system test report has been completed and issued as defined in the project documentation.
m. DOC-114 – Final Commissioning Report and System Turnover 1) Verify that the final commissioning report has been completed, issued to the proper entity, and accepted as defined in the project documentation.
n. DOC-115 – Required Closeout Documentation
1) Verify that a complete set of as-built system documentation has been provided as defined in the project documentation.
o. DOC-116 – Software Licensing
1) Verify that the usage and ownership rights have been assigned as defined in the project documentation.
p. DOC-117 – User Manuals
1) Verify that manufacturer’s user manuals are delivered to the owner in a format defined in the project documentation (e.g., binders, PDFs), or dispose of the manuals in a responsible manner (recycling) if the owner specifies that they do not wish to receive the manuals. 2) Integrator- or programmer-created manuals and documentation shall be delivered to the owner in a format defined in the project documentation.
q. DOC-119 – Warranties
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 38
1) Verify that all warranties are activated and that all warranty details have been passed to the owner as defined in the project documentation. r. DOC-120 – Final Acceptance
1) Verify that a final acceptance of the project has been issued by the owner or owner’s representative, acknowledging that the project is 100% complete, that all required deliverables, services, project-specific verification lists, testing, verification and signoffs have been received, and that all requirements defined in the project documentation have been satisfied and completed.

4. Electrical Reference Verification Item Numbers and Descriptions a. ELEC-100 – ACS Equipment Connected to Proper Circuit 1) Verify that all ACS equipment is powered from the designated power circuit and outlet as defined in the project documentation. No additional (non-ACS) equipment should be connected unless permitted in the project documentation.
b. ELEC-101 – Grounding/Earthing
1) Verify that all elements of the ACS are correctly bonded to an electrical ground/earth in accordance with the requirements of the regulatory authority and as defined in the project documentation.
c. ELEC-102 – Mains Voltage Sub-Distribution Integrity
1) Verify that all electrical sub-distribution systems provided by the ACS contractor in equipment racks, consoles, and similar structures meet local regulatory requirements for electrical integrity. d. ELEC-103 – Power Sources
1) Verify that the sources of mains voltage AC power to be used for the supply of ACS equipment are correct as defined in the project documentation and have been tested to the outlet in accordance with local electrical standards.
e. ELEC-104 – Power Sequencing
1) Verify that the power sequencing of devices is correct as defined in the project documentation.
f. ELEC-105 – UPS Operation
1) Verify that the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is performing to the specifications as defined in the project documentation. g. ELEC-106 – DC Power Distribution
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 39
1) Verify that all DC powered devices are receiving the proper voltage and current for normal operation.
h. ELEC-107 – Power Loss Recovery
1) Verify that the ACS resume normal operation on the restoration of power following a hard electrical power outage. Power loss recovery shall include verification of the resumption state on power recovery.

Resumption state shall be the control system start-up condition/start page (where applicable) and resetting all devices to a known state as defined in the project documentation.

5. Information Technology Verification Item Numbers and Descriptions a. IT-102 – Network Bandwidth
1) Verify that the required network bandwidth is available for control, video, and data as part of either a shared or a dedicated ACS network. b. IT-103 – Network QoS (Quality of Service)
1) Verify that the required Quality of Service (QoS) is in place for video and data as part of either a shared network or a dedicated ACS network. c. IT-104 – Network Security
1) Verify that the shared or dedicated network is secure as defined in the project documentation and accessible to suit the required video and control systems.
d. IT-106 – Unified Communications
1) Verify that any connections to IT-based unified communication applications that will interface with the ACS system have been planned for and integrated.
e. IT-107 – ACS IP Address Scheme
1) Verify and document that all network-connected equipment has the correct IP address, subnet mask, hostname, and gateway configuration as defined in the project documentation.
f. IT-109 – PoE (Power over Ethernet)
1) Verify that PoE (Power over Ethernet) devices are supplied with correct power required for normal device operation.
2) Verify under normal operations that the switch providing PoE has the capacity to power all of the devices that are connected to it. g. IT-110 – Network Topology
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 40
1) Verify that the network for video and control is of a suitable topology to support the services to be delivered as defined in the project documentation.
h. IT-111 – Application Integration
1) Verify that the ACS and control and management systems have been integrated and have been fully configured with headend software, including monitoring and asset management; databases; web-based front ends; and appliances as defined in the project documentation. i. IT-112 – Enterprise Management Tools
1) Verify that enterprise management tools such as central monitoring client/server or web-based applications have been installed and connected to all systems they are required to monitor or control as specified in the project documentation.
j. IT-113 – Identity Management
1) Verify that all systems-authentication credentials are configured correctly. Any temporary credential used during system installation and commissioning should be removed.
2) User and group authentication and authorization are verified based on the requirements from the project documentation. Connectivity with the central directory, database, or other identity authority should be verified.
k. IT-114 – Network Performance Under Full Functional Load 1) Verify that the network can provide the required operational performance to carry control, video, and data under production load and at times of peak production load (refer to IT-102 Network Bandwidth).
l. IT-115 – Remote Access
1) Verify that remote access to ACS are configured as defined in the project documentation.
m. IT-116 – Remote Management
1) Verify that remote management tools such as virtual touch panels, internal web applications, or manufacturer’s applications are configured and functional as required by the project documentation and/or manufacturer’s specification.

6. Operations and Support Reference Verification Item Numbers and Descriptions a. OP-100 – Software
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 41
1) Verify that all control programming code, configuration files, and any other associated software have been provided as defined in the project documentation.

7. Physical Environment Verification Item Numbers and Descriptions a. PHYSE-101 – Human Factors, Usability, and Ergonomics 1) Verify that ergonomics and usability elements for system users are installed and configured as defined in the project documentation. b. PHYSE-104 – Backing/Blocking/Framing
1) Verify that installed backing, blocking, and framing meets project documentation requirements and industry standards for installation means and methods.
c. PHYSE-105 – Clean Building Handover
1) Verify that the area is clean, free of dust, and suitable for equipment installation and that no further work is planned that will release contaminants into any ACS equipment area.
2) Verify that the area released is isolated from any areas not yet released. d. PHYSE-106 – Coordinated Construction Elements
1) Verify that the elements (including but not limited to spatial requirements and building services) required by the ACS that are coordinated with other disciplines have been provided as defined in the project documentation.
e. PHYSE-107 – Device Enclosures
1) Verify that device enclosures accommodate the intended device and that all necessary environmental controls (e.g., heating, cooling, humidity) are incorporated into the enclosure as defined in the project documentation.
f. PHYSE-108 – Finishes
1) Verify ACS equipment, furniture, fixtures, and accessories against the project documentation.
g. PHYSE-109 –Wall Boxes/Ceiling Boxes
1) Verify that installed wall and ceiling boxes meet project documentation and regulatory authority requirements.
h. PHYSE-112 – Structural Mounting
1) Verify configuration and compatibility of structural accommodations and all mounting hardware based on the intended application. All Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 42
equipment mounting hardware shall be installed in the manner specified by the hardware manufacturer.
i. PHYSE-113 – Protection of Installed Equipment
1) Verify that all elements of the ACS are free of damage. j. PHYSE-114 – Accessibility
1) Verify that all systems are accessible in accordance with regulatory requirements.

8. Physical Installation Reference Verification Item Numbers and Descriptions a. PHYSI-100 – Cable Containment/Conduit
1) Verify that installed containment/conduit capacity and routes meet project documentation requirements, industry standards, and regulatory requirements for installation means and methods. 2) Verify that installed containment/conduit is serviceable and free of contaminants.
b. PHYSI-101 – ACS Rack Air Flow and Temperature Performance 1) Verify that the ACS rack(s) provides the air flow as required in the project documentation.
2) Verify that the temperature in the ACS rack has been measured and is within tolerances defined by manufacturers’ guidelines. c. PHYSI-102 – Equipment Security
1) Verify that equipment is secured as defined in the project documentation.
2) Verify that all security systems, devices, and manufacturer security accessories are installed and verified to be operating as defined in project documentation.
3) Verify that keyed devices have been keyed as defined in the project documentation and devices requiring configuration have been configured as defined in the project documentation and are verified to be operating within specification.
d. PHYSI-103 – ACS Equipment Labeling
1) Verify that all ACS equipment has been labeled in accordance with the requirements of the project documentation. All labeling must be consistent, durable, accurate, and visible without dismantling of sub - assemblies.
e. PHYSI-104 – Plumb and Level/Square
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 43
1) Verify that all ACS equipment has been installed, aligned, or angled correctly as defined in the project documentation. Level and plumb are the default requirement unless particular angles or other alignments are defined in the project documentation.
f. PHYSI-105 – Site Security
1) Verify that all elements of the ACS are free from loss, damage, or tampering.
g. PHYSI-106 – ACS Equipment Location
1) Verify that ACS equipment is installed at the location and/or in the rack or enclosure as defined in the project documentation. Equipment is installed per the elevation or other specification provided by the project documentation or the manufacturer’s specification.
h. PHYSI-107 – ACS Rack Cleanliness
1) Verify that all components installed in ACS equipment racks are free from dirt, dust, water, or any other element that would compromise the performance and/or longevity of the ACS.
i. PHYSI-108 – Non-End-User Controls Protection
1) Verify that installed items with user-facing controls that are not intended for end- user access have been covered, disabled, or otherwise secured to prevent end- user operation.
j. PHYSI-110 – Handling of Accessories Otherwise Undefined 1) Verify that all items that are pre-packaged with primary system equipment but have no documented/planned use in the ACS(s) are managed in accordance with the project documentation.
k. PHYSI-111 – Turnover of Accessory System Elements
1) Verify that any equipment that may be considered portable and/or otherwise not specifically incorporated into the installed ACS(s) has been set up, configured, and tested.

9. Serviceability Reference Verification Item Numbers and Descriptions a. SERV-100 – Access Panels
1) Verify that any access panels that have been installed to provide access to any type of ACS equipment are properly sized and positioned as detailed in the project documentation.
b. SERV-101 – Ability to Maintain and Service Equipment Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 44
1) Verify that all equipment is accessible and capable of being maintained, serviced, cleaned, or adjusted as necessary.
2) Verify that all equipment requiring regular cleaning or maintenance is accessible without requirement for special equipment or tools that would disrupt the normal use of the facility and systems therein. c. SERV-102 – Input and Output Panel Accessibility
1) Verify that all input and output panels are accessible and meet all requirements for user access and placement.
d. SERV-103 – Rack Clearance
1) Verify rack placement and use for physical stability in accordance with the project documentation and regulatory authority.

C. Acknowledgement of Conformance to the Requirements
Acknowledgment of conformance to the Requirements shall include the following written statement, authored and signed by the system verifier, stating that all requirements of this Section have been completed, the date of completion, and that the handover of the completed, verified system is finalized.

“The system verifier acknowledges that the performance of this ACS has been verified in conformance with all required processes and contains all required elements as documented within this Section.

System Verifier Date Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 45

3.05 FINAL ADJUSTMENTS AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS
A. Upon approval of the contractor's test report, and at a time set by the Owner or Owner's authorized representative, perform final system adjustments and acceptance tests. Provide all labor, material, tools, and measurement equipment necessary for these te sts and adjustments, including the test equipment and material specified in Article 1.1, except as otherwise specified.

B. The contractor's representatives performing these tests shall be thoroughly familiar with all details of the system and shall include the field supervisor in overall charge during the course of the installation work.

C. Budget eight (8) working hours for the performance of these tests and adjustments. If final acceptance is delayed beyond this period because of installation not in accordance with these specifications, pay for all additional time and expenses of Owner -designated observers during any resultant extension of the acceptance testing period.

D. Adjustments: Adjust the system as instructed by the ACS Consultant.

3.06 TRAINING
A. The Owner may assign personnel to participate with the contractor during installation.

Without delaying the work, familiarize the Owner's personnel with the installation, equipment, and maintenance.

B. During tests and adjustments, permit the Owner's personnel to observe. When feasible explain the significance of each test.

C. After the completion of FINAL ADJUSTMENTS AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS, provide on -site training to the end-user to instruct them on the proper use of each system, including:

1. Explain operation of control systems and overall function of installed systems to staff selected by the Owner as “requiring general instruction”.

2. Explain operation of control systems, set-up and operation of individual pieces of equipment, functions of overall systems, and rudimentary service guidelines to staff selected by the Owner as “requiring technician level instruction”.

3. If requested by the Owner, record these training sessions and provide them to the Owner for future reference by the Owner’s personnel.

4. After successful training, a repair sequence (schedule of responsibility, response tree, etc.) should be established with any “technician level” staff, designated by the Owner as responsible for ACS operation and maintenance, to expedite service calls.

D. Separate from the bid response quotation; provide an hourly cost for additional training.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 46

3.07 WARRANTY
A. Unless otherwise described in Division 01, provide for the warranty of the delivered system under the following terms and exclusions:

B. Basic Warranty

1. Basic Warranty provided by the ACS Integrator shall include repair or replacement for one year from date of Final Acceptance on all ACS Equipment provided (including products having a manufacturer’s warranty of less than one year) and all ACS Integrator workmanship. Basic Warranty shall be provided at no additional cost, except in case of obvious abuse.

2. Warrant all repairs to "existing" equipment for a period of ninety (90) days.

3. During the Basic Warranty period the ACS Integrator shall:
a. Provide telephone support within 4 hours of a call requesting service. b. Provide emergency service: Within 24 hours of a call requesting service not corrected by telephone support, restore the system to operation, replacing defective materials and repairing faulty workmanship. Make temporary repairs and provide loaner equipment at no charge if defective materials cannot be permanently replaced or repaired within this 24-hour time period.

Repair or replace faulty items within 72 hours of on-site service or within manufacturers’ specific repair program whichever is quicker.

4. ACS Integrator shall not involve the Owner with removing, re-installing equipment, shipping or receiving equipment being repaired under Basic Warranty, nor shall the Owner be responsible for any shipping or freight charges associated with any item under warranty.

5. The Owner shall be copied with all paperwork related to any and all warranty work during the Basic Warranty period.

6. The Basic Warranty period will commence no sooner than the date of first beneficial use by the Owner and no later than the date of contract closeout.

7. Paint and exterior finishes, and batteries and other consumables excluded from above warranties except when damage or failure results from defective materials or workmanship covered by warranty.

8. The terms of individual equipment manufacturers' warranties are not diminished by the minimum warranty provisions specified above.

C. Preventative Maintenance

1. Within the term of the one-year Basic Warranty period the ACS Integrator shall provide, at no additional cost, periodic Preventative Maintenance on the installed ACS to ensure proper ongoing maintenance and operation.

2. A minimum of four (4) Preventive Maintenance visits shall be provided.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

ACCESS CONTROL
281000 08/26/2025 47

3. Preventative Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
a. Reviewing control system functionality
b. Any other maintenance and adjustments necessary to ensure that the ACS is in proper working order

4. Any problems or issues noted by the users or other Owner representatives shall be documented and completely resolved at each of the scheduled visits.

5. Preventative Maintenance Schedule
a. 90 days (±15 days) after the commencement of the Warranty Period. b. 180 days (±15 days) after the commencement of the Warranty Period. c. 270 days (±15 days) after the commencement of the Warranty Period. d. 20 days (±10 days) before the end of the Warranty Period.

END OF SECTION
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 1
SECTION 28 20 00

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 CORRELATED DOCUMENTS AND OTHER WORKS OF JURISDICTION A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. The Architectural Drawing Package, marked for Bid, and any current revisions noted by project management.

C. Security systems drawings and other attached appendices and tables.

1.02 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
A. Owner: shall refer to City of Carlsbad, and all of its subsidiaries and affiliates B. Technology Consultant (CCTV Consultant, Consultant): shall refer to Vantage Technology Consulting Group. Refer to “PART 1, SUBMITTALS” for any specific identification.

C. Project/Construction Manager (CM): shall refer to TBD.

D. General Contractor (GC): shall refer TBD.

E. Bidder: shall refer to any party proposing to provide the services and material delineated in this Specification.

F. Bid: shall refer to a Bidder’s proposal to provide the services and material delineated in this Specification.

G. CCTV Integrator (Security Contractor, Integrator, Contractor): shall refer to the awarded contractor for this scope of services.

H. CCTV Specification (Specification): shall refer to the complete set of designs, performance and delivery requirements delineated within this document and all referenced documents.

I. CCTV System (Security System): shall refer to the complete compliment of equipment, software and other material that upon completion of assembly, installation and configuration provides the full functionality and technical performance delineated in this Specification.

J. CCTV Equipment (Security Equipment): shall refer to any and all individual equipment items and equipment items supplied by others installed as a part of the Video Surveillance System.

K. Work: Design and provision the CCTV Systems and associated equipment, software and services for the Project.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 2
L. Construction Documents: shall include all documentation associated with the design and general construction of the Project, including this Specification.

M. Provide: Supply (furnish), deliver, install, test, configure, label, and commission.

N. Manufacturer: shall refer to the original manufacturer of any equipment provided as part of the Work
O. Commissioning Date: shall refer to the date at which a system is formally accepted by the Owner.

P. OFE: Owner Furnished Equipment.

Q. OFCI: Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed.

R. CFCI: Contractor Furnished, Contractor Installed.

1.03 SCOPE/DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work covered in this Specification consists of furnishing all labor, material and services to install a complete CCTV system as indicated on the project documentation, including this specification and related drawings.

B. The work described in this Specification shall include, but not be limited to, the following Basic Services:

1. Engineering and Design: The CCTV Systems Integrator shall provide all system engineering and design necessary to develop the complete systems described herein. Engineering and Design shall include preparation of all necessary electronic schematics, hardware drawings, systems diagrams, schedules and lists.

2. Procurement and Assembly: The CCTV Systems Integrator shall procure and assemble all hardware and equipment and any additional materials as required to deliver completely functioning CCTV Systems.

3. Software Programming: The CCTV Systems Integrator shall perform all required software setup, configuration, and programming required to develop a complete operating system in accordance with this Specification, including all control logic and push button component faceplate or interface programming.

4. Installation: The CCTV Systems Integrator shall install all equipment, cable, wiring, connectors, plates and other material at the Project site per the CCTV Systems Integrator’s approved designs. The CCTV Systems Integrator shall install any Owner Furnished Equipment identified in this document and calibrate it to work with the integrated systems.

5. Testing and Adjustment: The CCTV Systems Integrator shall perform all tests and adjustments, furnish all test equipment necessary and perform all work required to properly configure the systems and to verify their performance in accordance with Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 3
the information in this Specification and the CCTV Systems Integrator’s approved engineered designs.

6. Acceptance Testing: Prior to Owner acceptance and hand-over of the completed CCTV Systems, the CCTV Systems Integrator shall demonstrate the operation of the complete systems, including all individual devices and specified control functions.

Both subjective and objective tests may be required by the Owner to determine compliance with the information in this Specification and the CCTV Systems Integrator’s approved designs.

7. Training: The CCTV Systems Integrator shall provide technical training of Owner's staff, instructing them on CCTV Systems operation, maintenance and troubleshooting.

8. Warranty: The CCTV Systems Integrator shall warranty the CCTV Systems in accordance with the terms of this Specification.

9. Specific Responsibilities:
a. Supply and install miscellaneous material, as necessary, to mount the CCTV system equipment.
b. ADDITIONAL UNIQUE TEXT: All primary conduit and wire-ways are included in the General Contractor’s scope of work and are not to be provided in the CCTV Systems Contract. Supply and install all miscellaneous conduit and wireways to the extent not included in Division 26 in order to provide a complete and operable system.

10. The Preliminary Schedule below identifies critical Project milestones and delivery expectations currently anticipated. This information is provided for Bidder planning purposes only. The actual Schedule for delivery of the work shall be coordinated with the Owner’s representative or Construction Manager.

11. Refer to “BID SUBMITTALS”, Section 1.06 and “SUBMITTALS”, Section 1.08 .A for additional information and requirements.

1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. All onsite labor must be in compliance with job-site union requirements.

B. The CCTV Systems Integrator must obtain any permits and shall pay all fees required by public agencies having jurisdiction over the Work.

C. All products and materials provided shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratory (UL) and shall bear the UL label intended for the purpose specified and indicated. If UL has no published standards for a particular item, then other national independent testi ng standards shall apply, and such items shall bear those labels.

D. All equipment and installations under this Specification shall conform to the latest editions of the following:

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 4

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

2. NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code

3. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code

4. ANSI/TIA-568, -569 and -607 Telecommunications Standards

5. IEEE 142-2007 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.

E. The CCTV Systems Integrator and its employees shall perform all work in compliance with current Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) guidelines and regulations and other safety and health requirements as may be mandated by the Owner, the General Contractor or other authorities.

F. The CCTV Systems Integrator shall have a thorough knowledge of governing codes and standards in effect and having jurisdiction over the Project. Lack of awareness of any of the relevant codes and standards will not be accepted as a reason for non -compliance.

G. The CCTV Systems Integrator shall be responsible for providing cable and materials that comply with applicable codes and requirements of regulating bodies. The cost for these materials shall be included in the Bid price, as the Owner shall not accept change order s for changes in materials.

1.05 COORDINATION OF RELATED WORK BY OTHERS
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: The CCTV Systems Integrator shall coordinate with the General Contractor and other construction trades to ensure proper integration and operation of the CCTV Systems with the complete Project designs, building systems and all other elements of the Project. The CCTV Systems Integrator should request from the Owner, General Contractor, or Architect complete project Construction Documents to help facilitate effective coordination of the CCTV Systems Integrator’s work with the work of others.

B. Some components of the complete CCTV Systems will be provided by the GC, its sub- contractors or the owner. It shall be the responsibility of the CCTV Integrator to coordinate with all parties whose work impacts the CCTV Integrator’s work to ensure the complete coordination and successful implementation of the CCTV Systems. Related work by GC shall include, but may not be limited to, the following:

1. Electrical Work (Division 26):
a. Electrical (AC) Power Service and Connections:
1) Technical Power Service: All electrical panels, power receptacles, lighting fixtures, dimmers, lighting controls, and interconnecting wiring shall be supplied by Electrical Contractor.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 5
2) If required, the CCTV Integrator shall extend AC power circuits and insulated ground wires into each equipment rack. This work must be done by a qualified electrician, licensed in the jurisdiction of this project, and under direction from the CCTV Integrator.
b. Low Voltage Cable Containment
1) Low voltage cable containment, including raceways, conduits and junction boxes, required to support CCTV System devices and interconnecting cabling shall be as specified in the Construction Documents and shall be provided by the Division 26 Contractor. 2) Upon commencement of work on the Project the CCTV Systems Integrator shall review the Construction Documents to confirm that the infrastructure provided is sufficient to accommodate the CCTV Systems to be installed. Any conflicts or issues must immediately be brought to the attention of the Construction Manager or General Contractor, and the CCTV Systems Consultant.
3) The CCTV Integrator shall provide blank cover plates or panels for all wall and ceiling boxes that are dedicated to the CCTV Systems but do not have devices and/or connectors at the time of CCTV System commissioning. Colors and types shall be coordinated with the Architect.

2. Metals (Division 5)

3. Rough Carpentry (061000)

4. Joint Sealants (079200)

5. Finishes (Division 9)

6. Information Technology Systems: Unless otherwise specified, all data networking cabling shall be provided by the Section 271300 and 271500 contractor(s) and the Owner. Unless otherwise specified, all active data networking electronics shall be provided by the Section 272000 contractor and the Owner. Patch cords to connect CCTV equipment to a data network port shall be provided by the CCTV Systems Integrator. The CCTV Systems Integrator shall be responsible for coordinating with the Owner or the Owner’s designated representative regarding connections between the CCTV Systems and the Owner’s data network, including all client/server computing and peripherals, Internet, digital video storage and other data/media distribution systems. Unless otherwise specified, equipment racks and cabinets, PDU’s, and UPS’s shall be provided by the Section 271100 contractor and/or the Owner. Coordinate with those entities to ensure space is available for any rack-mounted equipment.

7. Other Systems: The CCTV Systems Integrator shall be responsible for identifying and integrating with any other technology systems and services required to deliver the completely operating CCTV Systems.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 6

8. Equipment Mounting and Support:
a. Structural support for CCTV system equipment shall be provided by others as noted and detailed in the Construction Documents. The CCTV Systems Integrator shall coordinate with the General Contractor and other trades as necessary to ensure compatibility of the structural supports provided by others with the CCTV Equipment provided by the CCTV Systems Integrator. b. The CCTV Systems Integrator shall install all CCTV Equipment, including all camera and video monitor mounts, as indicated in this Specification and the Construction Documents. The CCTV Systems Integrator shall verify location and structural suitability before attaching equipment and mounts. Any variations from the drawings and specifications or any question of structural integrity shall be brought to the attention of the General Contra ctor, Architect, and CCTV Systems Consultant before installing the equipment.

C. Work Furnished by Others (“F.B.O.”) but installed by the CCTV Contractor:

1. Owner Furnished Equipment (OFE): Some equipment that will become a part of or connect to the CCTV Systems may be provided by the Owner and shall be designated as Owner Furnished Equipment (OFE). Owner Furnished Equipment shall be supplied by the Owner to the CCTV Systems Integrator for connection, installation and/or integration into the CCTV Systems as delineated in the construction documents and this Specification. This may include new or existing equipment. The CCTV Systems Integrator shall be responsible for coordinating with the Owner’s representative or Construction Manager to ensure that all Owner Furnished Equipment is fully operational and compatible with other CCTV Equipment and that it is made available to the CCTV Systems Integrator in a timeframe that does not delay the CCTV Systems Integrator’s work.

1.06 BID SUBMITTALS
A. Examinations: Carefully examine the contract documents and the construction site to obtain first-hand knowledge of existing conditions. Contractors are not compensated for conditions that can be determined by examining documents or site and will not be r elieved of any obligations with respect to bid.

B. Questions: Submit all questions about the contract documents in writing. Replies requiring changes to the contract documents will be issued to all bidders as addenda and will become part of the Contract. The Architect and Owner may give, but will not be responsible for, oral clarifications. Questions received less than 10 days before bid date cannot be answered in writing.

C. Equipment Availability: Verify with manufacturers’ availability and cost of all equipment proposed, including equipment specified herein. No cost increases will be allowed for manufacturers' cost increases, or for substitutions required because of unavail ability of proposed equipment.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 7
D. Basis of Bids: To be eligible for Bid consideration, submit bids in accordance with the following:

1. Include a complete itemized list for each base-bid system indicating the manufacturer, model number, unit cost and total costs for all specified items.

Itemization of miscellaneous equipment such as cable, switches, and receptacles is not required.

2. Clearly indicate the total cost, including all expenses, for each individual system to allow the Owner to select any or all to be included in the contract. Itemization of miscellaneous equipment such as cable, switches, and receptacles is not required. a. CCTV System

3. Organize each list with the information presented, in the order that it appears in this specification, in 6 columns from left to right:
a. Paragraph number as it appears in this specification. b. Paragraph title as it appears in this specification. c. Manufacturer and model number.
d. Quantity.
e. Unit Cost.
f. Extension (unit cost times quantity).

4. At the end of each list indicate the cost of all other items such as for miscellaneous equipment, engineering, installation labor, overhead, taxes, etc.

5. On a separate list indicate costs of any specified add- or deduct-alternates with the information presented in the same manner as for the base-bid system.

6. Include a listing of any voluntary alternates proposed by the bidder as substitutions or additions to the specified systems.

7. Include any notes or comments if necessary to qualify the bid.

8. Identify any sub-contractors and indicate the work they are to do.

9. Provide documentation of ability in installing similar systems. Furnish the names, addresses and telephone numbers of the System Designer, Architect, General Contractor and Owner on three projects similar in scope, which the Contractor has installed within the last 5 years.

10. BIDS NOT FULLY ITEMIZED OR NOT SUBMITTED IN THIS FORMAT WILL BE REJECTED.

E. Delivery Schedule:

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 8

1. Unless otherwise directed in Division 0, within 14 days of receipt of bid package provide:
a. Basis of bid documents, including:
1) Itemized equipment costs for specified equipment or APPROVED substitutions.
2) Qualifications/References
3) Certifications (including certificate of bonding, if required) 4) Proposed payment terms.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Project Management: Maintain the same person in charge of work throughout installation.

Engineering and construction supervisors shall be ESA CSI, or approved equal.

B. Contract Documents: Maintain a complete set of system drawings and specifications at the site at all times during installation.

C. Fabrication and Installation: Fabricate all equipment racks and subassemblies , as required.

Make field connections of all video and control wiring including video, and control system circuits to equipment, equipment racks and connection panels. Continuously supervise the installation and connections of cable and equipment.

D. CCTV System Contractor Qualifications: To be considered qualified for this work, bidders must meet the following standards:

1. The Contracting firm is experienced in the provision of CCTV systems similar in complexity to those required for this project.

2. The Contractor’s primary business is the provision, fabrication and installation of professional CCTV and related systems.

3. The Contractor has been regularly engaged in the installation and service of professional CCTV systems for a period of at least five years.

4. The Contractor is an authorized dealer for the major products furnished.

5. The proposed Project Engineer holds ESA CSSI certification, or approved equal. The proposed installer holds ESA CVT certification, or approved equal.

6. The Contractor is experienced in cloud-based control and management systems.

7. At the request of the Owner, Owner’s representative, or Architect, demonstrate the following capabilities:
a. Adequate plant and equipment to complete the work in accordance to the project schedule.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 9
b. Sufficient staff with appropriate technical experience to oversee and execute the work.

E. Subcontractors: The Contractor may arrange for sub-contract field and special shop work to be done by others.

F. Prime Contractors: Any other installer who intends to bid on this work as the Prime Contractor and does not meet the “Contractor Qualifications” described above shall employ the services of a single “CCTV Systems Contractor” who does meet these requirements.

The CCTV System Contractor shall Furnish and Install the equipment. The Prime Contractor shall clearly identify the CCTV Systems Contractor and submit complete qualification information for the CCTV Systems Contractor in the Bid. Failure to do so will be cause for rejection of the Bid.

1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. General:

1. The CCTV Systems Contractor has the burden of proving, at the Contractor's own cost and expense and to the satisfaction of the Architect, that the proposed product is similar and equal to the named product.

B. Documentation:

1. File a formal request for each substitution, documenting the conditions outlined below, including:
a. Complete data on the proposed substitution, substantiating compliance with the CCTV Systems Contract Documents, including:
1) Specification Section and description of the equipment or service originally specified by the CCTV Systems Consultant
2) Product manufacturer, model, and description of the proposed substitution
3) Performance specification and test data verifying the proposed substitution’s compliance with CCTV System and installation requirements.
4) References and samples, where applicable
5) An itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the item originally selected in the CCTV Specification
6) The impact of the proposed substitution on the Contract time schedule, system design, artistic effect (for changes in finish or dimension), and related contracts and trades

2. Submit item comparisons, coordination schedules, and design impact via addenda appended to manufacturer documentation.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 10
C. Basis:

1. Requests for acceptance of proposed equivalents made following the award of bid are considered only in the following cases:
a. The named products cannot be obtained by the CCTV Systems Contractor because of strikes, lockouts, bankruptcies or discontinuance of manufacturer and the CCTV Systems Contractor makes a written request for consideration of the proposed equivalent.
b. The proposed equivalent is approved as equal or superior to the named product and its use is to the advantage of the Owner.

D. Consideration:

1. A request for substitution is a representation by the CCTV Systems Contractor that:
a. The CCTV Systems Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitution and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified.
b. The same warranty is provided for the substitution as the original equipment specified.
c. The cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract, but excludes costs under separate contracts and excludes Architect's re-design costs, and that the CCTV Systems Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently becomes apparent.
d. Any cost impact on work by other trades is indicated. e. Installation of the accepted substitute will be coordinated by the CCTV Systems Contractor, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects.

2. An accepted substitution shall be documented by Change Order, effectively modifying the CCTV Systems Specification. The Contract Price will be changed only if the substitution results in cost savings to the Owner.

1.09 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS
A. Coordinate all submittals with requirements set forth in Section 013300.

B. General: Unless directed otherwise in Section 013300,

1. Delivery Schedule:
a. Within 21 days of award provide:
1) Bill of Materials
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 11
2) Manufacturer Catalog Data Sheets: Product Submittals shall be issued no sooner than six (6) months prior to scheduled installation onsite. 3) Shop Drawings
4) Custom finish material samples, if applicable.
b. One week before acceptance testing visits (system “check-out”) provide:
1) System test and certification reports
2) Manufacturer’s owner’s manuals
3) One (1) draft copy of user operational manuals
4) One (1) draft copy of “as-built” system diagrams
c. Within 30 days after final acceptance testing visit provide:
1) As-built system diagrams
2) User operational manuals
d. Unless otherwise directed by contract, do not order equipment until the Bill of Materials, Catalog Data Sheets, and shop drawings have been reviewed and approved by the Owner, Owner’s representative, or CCTV Systems Consultant. Any acquisition, assembly or installation of any systems or components without CCTV Systems Consultant’s approval will be subject to removal at the CCTV Systems Integrator’s expense.
e. Approval for isolated items will not be considered, except by prior authorization by the CCTV Systems Consultant.
f. All rejected items and items requiring correction must be resubmitted together in entirety, unless otherwise approved.

C. Binders:

1. Provide indexed tabs and flyleaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment.

2. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers, 1" minimum, 2" maximum ring size

3. When multiple binders are used, collate the data into related consistent groupings.

D. Bill of Materials & Manufacturer Product Data Sheets:

1. Organize the Bill of Materials with the information presented in the order and format that it appears in this specification.

2. After the Bill of Materials, include Catalog Data Sheets (“cut” sheets) for all specified products arranged in the order listed in the Bill of Materials.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 12

3. Clearly indicate all finishes, colors and, options for equipment.

E. Shop Drawings:

1. Size: minimum 24” x 36” unless otherwise specified.

2. Media: provide in electronic .pdf file format unless otherwise specified or directed by the Construction Manager.

3. Prepare a drawing package on the approved Computer Aided Drafting (CAD) or Building Information Modeling (BIM) system, including:
a. CCTV Systems Integrator name, address, and phone number. b. Block diagrams indicating proposed connections of all equipment and indicating equipment brand and model numbers.
c. Equipment/ control room layout and equipment rack and cabinet details d. Provide detailed drawings of custom-fabricated or stock mounts and hardware.
e. Video display arrangements.
f. Other drawings and sketches as required by the Architect or CCTV Systems Consultant during the course of project installation.

4. Design drawing files provided by the Architect and/or CCTV Systems Consultant as a courtesy in aiding the CCTV Systems Integrator in preparing Shop Drawings must be modified to include the information specified above. Submitting design drawings without these modifications is not acceptable.

F. Data Network Connectivity

1. Any system, or components of a system, provided in this specification section which are to be connected to the Owner’s data network either via wired or wireless connections will conform to the requirements described in PART 3 - EXECUTION. Vendors shall review the requirements of this section and provide a statement of compliance for each item that either:
a. Confirms that the proposed System (or any applicable components of the System) is compliant with the requirements listed in the item, or b. Explains why the proposed System (or any applicable components of the System) is not compliant, including any potential mitigation measures that may resolve the non-compliance issue
G. Configuration, Management, and Control Software Submittals

1. Control System Software consists of the following two primary components:
a. Control System Graphical User Interface (GUI)
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 13
b. Control System Processor Software

2. In order to develop Control System Software that is functional and understandable by the intended users, it will be necessary for the CCTV Systems Integrator to provide “working” copies of software for review and comment by the Owner and the Project team as it is being developed.

3. The software programming process must be an iterative process that includes a minimum of three (3) iterative submittals prior to first beneficial use. The following table is provided to help facilitate the software development process:

Deliverable Notes Due
Initial Submittal Listing of individual device control
functions
GUI logic flow diagram
Static touch panel layouts
Initial labeling of button panels

Due no later than one
week after return of
approved shop drawings
First Beta Review Dynamic touch panel Layouts
including page flips, pop-ups,
feedback, etc. to show operational
relationships between pages
Due no later than two
weeks after return of
approved Initial Submittal
Second Beta Review Interface updates and revisions
Test of loaded working system (in
shop or on site)
Due no later than three
weeks after return of
approved First Beta
Review submittal
Implementation / On-
site Testing
Loading of live code into working
systems
Prior to Substantial
Completion
Completion Follow-up programming review and
minor modifications based on user
feedback
60 days after Final
Acceptance
H. Project Plan

1. Provide a complete and detailed Schedule for the CCTV Systems Integrator’s work describing the major tasks, sequence of work, submittals and other critical milestones. At a minimum, the tasks noted in the Schedule shall include all required submittals, rack assembly and shop testing, on-site cable installation, periodic shop and site visits, on-site equipment installation, testing and Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 14
commissioning, Substantial Completion and Project Completion. Indicate the sequence of installation and completion by area and/or system. The Schedule shall also include anticipated dates of acquisition of major equipment and their installation milestones.

2. Provide a complete listing of the CCTV Systems Integrator’s project team, including the names and all contact information (email address, cell phone, etc.) for all personnel assigned to the Project. At a minimum, this Project Team Directory shall include the CCTV Systems Integrator’s executive in charge of the Project as well as the Project Manager, Lead Engineer and Lead Installer. Include names and contact information for all sub-contractors.

I. Weekly Status Reports

1. If directed by the Construction Manager, the CCTV Systems Integrator shall provide weekly progress updates to the Architect and CCTV Systems Consultant. Weekly Status Reports shall be submitted as directed by the Construction Manager via faxed hard copy or electronic means (i.e. email). Issuance of Weekly Status Reports shall commence from the date of the first submittal delivery and shall continue until contract closeout.

2. The Weekly Status Report shall not be used as an official means of communicating Project issues. It does not replace any part of a required submittal, request for information, proposed change order, report of field conditions, schedule issues, etc. No official response will be given to the Weekly Status Report.

3. A representative of the CCTV Systems Integrator shall attend the weekly construction meeting at the job site. This representative shall be fully knowledgeable in all aspects of the Project and the CCTV Systems Integrator’s work and shall have the authority to make binding commitments on behalf of the CCTV Systems Integrator.

J. Substantial Completion Submittals
Substantial Completion of the CCTV System installation shall be the point at which all CCTV Equipment has been installed, programmed, configured and initially tested to confirm proper operation. The point of Substantial Completion shall be as mutually agreed between the CCTV Systems Integrator and the CCTV Systems Consultant following discussion and observation. At the point of agreed Substantial Completion, the CCTV Systems Integrator shall submit the following:

1. Test Reports:
a. Upon completion of SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS specified in PART 3 - EXECUTION, submit for approval in writing test results including numerical values for all measurements.
b. Submit written certification that the installation conforms to specifications, is complete and operable, and is ready for FINAL ADJUSTMENTS AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS specified in PART 3 - EXECUTION.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 15
c. The Owner or Owner’s representative reserves the right to withhold the final site visit “check-out” and any final certification of project completion until receipt of test report documents, as outlined in this section (SECTION 1 – “Test Reports”).

2. Preliminary Project Record Documents Submittal
a. Upon Substantial Completion, the CCTV Systems Integrator shall submit Preliminary Project Record Documents to the CCTV Systems Consultant.

Preliminary Project Record documents shall be submitted prior to the Preliminary Checkout.
b. Preliminary Project Record Documents shall include:
1) Corrected/updated shop drawings
2) Updated Equipment List
3) Half-size drawings modified to reflect the actual installation conditions 4) CD-ROM or other approved media with manufacturers’ operation manuals arranged alphabetically and current drawings in .DWG format c. CCTV Systems Consultant’s Preliminary Checkout will be scheduled after the Preliminary Project Record Documents and Test Reports have been approved.

K. Manufacturer’s Owner’s Manuals:

1. Archive all Manufacturers’ Owner’s Manuals for specified equipment in the following manner:
a. One original (not photocopy) manufacturer’s owner’s manual per equipment item.
b. Submit in a 3-ring binder including a cover page and spine insert identifying the project, site location and submittal.
c. Arrange manuals in alphabetical order, by manufacturer. d. Provide a table of contents and separate each section within the binder with tab dividers.
e. If approved by Owner, provide all Manufacturer’s Owner’s Manuals in electronic .pdf format on CD-ROM or other approved media. Owner’s Manuals shall be organized in a logical manner such as per system and/or alphabetical order, by manufacturer.

L. User Operational Manual:

1. Intent: Prepare in the form of a system operations manual for use by Owner's personnel. System documentation shall be adequate such that a person trained on the System, but with no familiarity with this specific implementation, shall be able Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 16
to understand the configuration and implementation of all major and minor systems as well as how these systems are integrated to form the overall System.

2. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed titles "SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS".

3. Format: Submit the User Operational Manual in the following format:
a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11", 20 lb. minimum weight white paper for typed pages, either manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten.
b. Drawings: Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages.
c. If approved by Owner, provide Operational Manual in electronic .pdf format on CD-ROM or other approved media.

4. Content of Manuals: Prepare the User Operational Manual with the following content:
a. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.
b. Contractor name of responsible principal, address and telephone number c. Certificate of Warranty
d. Service Contract: Include a preliminary schedule for the specified semi- annual site visits.
e. Complete as-built diagrams for systems.
f. Receptacle Location Plan
g. Shop drawings of all custom-fabricated items
h. Control Setting Schedule.
i. Documentation of all touch-panel screens both in the form of data files on CD-ROM, or other approved media, and graphical printouts. j. CCTV control system configuration files on CD-ROMs, or other approved media, for the management and control system, or other software required for re-configuring the CCTV management and control system.

M. System Diagrams:

1. Provide sufficiently clear and complete information that a technician of average skill may efficiently troubleshoot and service the system, even if unfamiliar with the installation, based on diagrammatic representations of the installed system.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 17

2. Provide drawings showing all terminal blocks, connectors, relays, switches, equipment, components, and wires.

3. Provide layout drawings of panels and other custom assemblies containing switches, relays, terminal blocks, receptacles, etc., using reference numbers to identify physical locations of devices or label devices with reference numbers in a location visible while viewing cable terminations.

4. On wiring diagrams, label all conductors within cables for insulation color or other identifier.

5. Label connectors, barrier strips, switches, relay sockets, etc., for terminal number.

6. If device does not provide terminal designations, provide key diagram for reference.

7. Label all devices with manufacturer, model number, and reference number (e.g. "SW 15", "TB 6"); reference numbers shall be consistent across all drawings with no repetitions.

8. Provide labels for cables continued onto another drawing, indicating termination device, terminal numbers, and drawing sheet on which the termination is shown.

9. Illustrate all receptacles, patch panel jacks, and switches.

10. Mount one photographic, wash-off Mylar or rag paper photocopy prints of each system behind acrylic at locations to be determined.

11. Receptacle Location Plan: Plan drawing of area showing locations and designations of all receptacles.

N. Forward all submittals to:

1. The Project Manager, or as directed.

O. Sustainable Building Submittals

1. Sustainable Building Submittals are required to verify compliance with the “Sustainable Building Performance Criteria” defined in this section.

2. Refer to Division 1 Section “Sustainable Design and Construction,” for detailed descriptions of the submittal documents listed below.

3. Green Building Materials Certification Form (GMF): Submit a completed GMF for the materials included in this section (blank copy is appended to Division 1 Section “Sustainable Design and Construction”). The following information shall be provided:
a. Itemized material costs for the Green Building Focus Material (GBFMs) identified under the “Sustainable Building Performance Criteria” heading of this section.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 18

4. Supplementary Information: In addition to the GMF, the following Sustainable Building submittal information shall be provided per Section 01 81 13:
a. GMF Back-Up Documentation
b. Product Cut Sheets
c. Verification of lack of Prohibited Compounds in Adhesives, Sealants, and Sealant Primers.
d. Energy Star Label Certification (Note: only include where applicable).

1.10 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Sequencing and Scheduling:

1. Coordinate work with adjacent work of other trades to facilitate construction and prevent conflicts.

2. Afford other trades reasonable opportunity for installation of work and for the storage of materials.

3. Staff the job to keep pace with the other Trades; otherwise, the project manager will require an increase in force or overtime work without additional expenses to the Owner.

4. Abide by the decision of the project manager in case of conflict or interference by other trades.

5. Remove all refuse from the job site to the satisfaction of the Owner’s representative.

B. Do not install equipment in dusty conditions or allow dust to accumulate in or on installed CCTV Equipment.

C. Protect all work and equipment from damage by others.

D. Protect all existing work-in-place by others from damage by the CCTV Systems Integrator, the CCTV Systems Integrator’s agents and/or sub-contractors, or any employees or vendors.

The CCTV Systems Integrator will be solely responsible for any/all damage to work-in-place by others.

E. Keep areas around and inside of each piece of equipment and each rack free from dust, dirt and debris throughout the project. Equipment that is not properly maintained during installation shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner before final payment is m ade to the CCTV Systems Integrator.

F. Storage and Staging:

1. The CCTV Systems Contractor is ultimately responsible for acquiring secure storage at the job site. Coordinate with project management and/or Owner to determine the location and size of the storage area.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 19

2. All CCTV Systems Integrator equipment and materials and all owner furnished equipment turned over to the CCTV Systems Integrator stored at the CCTV Systems Integrator’s facility(s) or stored and/or installed at the Project site will remain the property of the CCTV Systems Integrator unless ownership is legally transferred and accepted in writing by the Owner. The CCTV Systems Integrator shall be solely responsible for the protection of all equipment from damage, theft or vandalism regardless of cause, until the work described herein is accepted by the Owner at the time of Final Checkout.

G. Refuse and Repair:

1. Upon completion of work remove all associated debris, waste, refuse, and rubbish from premises. Leave all areas and equipment within the scope of this contract clean, free of blemishes, and operational.

2. Repair any damage to the premises, at no cost to the Owner, caused by the CCTV Systems Contractor, its agents, and/or subcontractors.

H. Adhere to the safety standards established by the General Contractor while performing work on site.

I. All employees of the CCTV Systems Integrator shall wear identification clearly indicating the CCTV Integrator’s company name while on site.

J. All employees of the CCTV Systems Integrator shall comply with rules and policies established by the Owner and/or the General Contractor.

K. All vehicles of the CCTV Systems Integrator or employees shall be parked in areas designated by the Owner and/or the General Contractor.

L. Environmental Impact Considerations

1. The CCTV Systems Integrator is expected to comply with project specific practices and environmental considerations to comply with any LEED objectives and local environmental regulations.

2. The CCTV Systems Integrator is encouraged to utilize environmentally sustainable materials and work practices in the delivery of the Work. This may consist of (but not be limited to):
a. Energy Efficiency/Conservation
b. Waste Reduction/Recycling
c. Water Conservation
d. Pollution Prevention
e. Employee Education Programs
f. Transportation Planning
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 20
g. Utilization of Renewable Materials
h. Minimize Emission of Greenhouse Gases

3. Upon request, the CCTV Systems Integrator shall supply documentation on in- house policies for recycling and environmental offset goals.

M. Promotion/Publication:

1. The contractor does not have the rights to use any information or images, relative to this contractor installation, for publication or in promotional materials without the express written permission of the Owner, Architect, and Vantage Technology Consulting Group. Upon approval, the contractor must disclose full credit to the Architect and Consultant for facilities and system design.

N. Insurances on the work of this specialty trade shall be provided as specified in relevant project documentation.

O. Inspection

1. Notify the Architect of any defects in work by other trades affecting installation.

P. Packaging: Material and equipment manufacturers shall demonstrate efforts to reduce packaging waste and/or to use environmentally-preferable packaging materials. Examples include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Reusable and/or returnable pallets or crates

2. FSC-certified wood or salvaged wood pallets or crates

3. High recycled-content cardboard, paper, steel, or plastic packaging

4. Bio-based foam packing materials

1.11 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS:

A. Project Description

1. The project concerns the installation of new video surveillance systems at the Veteran’s Memorial Park at the City of Carlsbad, as described below and shown on the drawings. The pole/wall mounted cameras are installed throughout the park utilizing fiber optic and copper cabling.

B. Functional Requirements of Systems:

1. CCTV System
a. Interior and exterior IP cameras to capture video of sufficient quality for recognition of individuals. Field of view and pixel density shall be as shown on the drawings.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 21
b. All cameras, NVR’s, and video management software must be ONVIF compliant to ensure interoperability with future adds or changes. c. Recording to be motion-based, 24/7, with 30-second pre-record. Provide storage for 30 days at highest frame rate/bit rate/resolution available from camera.
d. Cameras are to integrate with the City’s existing video surveillance system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ENGINEERING AND DESIGN
A. Engineering and other pre-site services included in this Specification are considered furnished goods delivered to the site in a similar manner to physical materials. PART 2 of the CCTV specifications is for review by the CCTV contractor’s engineering dep artment. The contractor is responsible for reviewing the specification and drawings and providing an ENGINEERED fixed-price quotation covering the cost of all equipment and labor to install, program, warranty and service the systems described.

B. The contractor is responsible for attending all pre-bid meetings and reviewing and understanding the systems design, functionality and intent.

C. The owner assumes that all contractors providing bid responses have included all of the necessary equipment, parts, cabling, labor, engineering, programming, project management, testing and training costs, and will not approve any additional fees or costs, unless shown and approved to be beyond the scope of the specification and drawings.

D. The equipment identified below provides examples of the level of quality and functionality required. These are predominantly major or unusual items and do not represent a complete list of equipment. The contractor is responsible for providing all equipment necessary for fully functioning turnkey systems.

E. Where the equipment described includes “or approved equal”, the contractor shall provide all documentation as indicated in paragraph 1.08 Substitutions to allow the owner or owner’s representative to make a determination prior to bid submittal.

F. Where the equipment described includes “or equal”, the contractor shall provide all documentation as indicated in paragraph 1.08 Substitutions as part of the product data submittal package delivered after award of contract.

G. Where the equipment described does not include “or approved equal” or “or equal”, the contractor shall provide only the product specified. No substitutions will be accepted.

2.02 CAMERAS
A. Hanwha PNM-9085RQZ1 20.0-Megapixel 360 - Degree Vandal Dome Camera.

B. Hanwha PNM-9031RV 15.0-Megapixel 180-Degree Vandal Dome Camera Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 22
C. Hanwha QNV-8010R 5.0-Megapixel 90 – Degree Vandal Dome Camera

2.03 NETWORK VIDEO RECORDERS
A. Network Video Recorder: DELL or approved equal.

2.04 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A. VMS and camera licenses are provided by the City of Carlsbad .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. All types of equipment installed by competent workers at locations shown on the drawings in strict accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions.

B. All delivered equipment, except portable equipment, firmly fastened or held in place. “Delivered equipment” includes cameras, video monitors, etc. Apply a minimum safety factor of four (4) times the load for all equipment fastenings and supports.

C. Take necessary precautions to prevent and guard against electro-magnetic and electro- static hum and to install the equipment to provide safety for the operator.

D. Protect all equipment, including patch panels, connectors, receptacles, racks, and consoles, from construction dust and debris until final acceptance of the system.

3.02 INTEGRATION/INSTALLATION
A. Conformance to Existing Facility Standards

1. Wherever possible provide equipment, finishes, and interfaces similar in nature to systems already in use by the Owner. Provide uniform functionality and operation to enhance ease of use and minimize instruction. Provide uniform finish and equipment to enhance the aesthetic unity of systems facility wide, and to improve end-user familiarity with equipment.

2. Equipment Integration:
a. New Equipment: Unless otherwise specified, supply only new equipment, parts and materials, and protect all equipment from construction dust and debris until final acceptance.
b. Equipment Handling and Wear: Operate specified equipment only as required for testing, as part of the installation procedure.
c. Single Source: The provision of all manufactured components, installation, wiring, and testing is the responsibility of a single CCTV systems contractor.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 23
d. All equipment and installations under this Specification shall conform to the latest edition of the following:
1) ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
2) ANSI/IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code
3) ANSI/TIA Standards 568, 569 and 607
4) IEEE/ANSI 142-2007 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.

3. Equipment Quantities:
a. Determine and provide the quantities of installed equipment based on the Bid Documents including the plans, functional diagrams, riser diagrams, and specification.
b. Quantities of portable equipment are indicated in schedules contained in the drawings or specifications.

4. Engineering and Documentation:
a. The system drawings indicate the general layout of the various items of equipment and their functional relationships. Layout of equipment, accessories, and conduit systems are diagrammatic unless specifically detailed and do not necessarily indicate every item or parameter required for a complete installation.
b. The CCTV Contractor shall provide any incidental equipment needed in order to result in a complete and operable system even if not specified or shown on drawings without claim for additional payment.

B. Labels

1. Dry transfer, “Dymo”, or other types of adhesive labels not acceptable

2. Except where otherwise specified label as shown on drawings, and as specified, each item of rack-mounted equipment and all switches, controls, and receptacles

3. Switch and Control Panels: Constructed of engraved and filled anodized aluminum plates. Minimum 1/8" plate thickness - Dry transfer or other types of adhesive labels not acceptable

4. Rack-Mounted Equipment: Labels constructed of engraved and filled plastic laminate engraving stock. Designate function and input and output line(s) or loudspeaker(s) served by labeled equipment. Key all designations to system functional and patch panel diagrams. Where possible, mount labels on blank panel directly above corresponding component. For modular equipment, provide label on inside of mainframe door identifying type of module for each slot (unless there is only one type) and gain setting as established at final checkout.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 24

5. Identification Panel: See drawings for layout and nomenclature. CCTV Contractor is responsible for completing all bracketed items with the appropriate project - specific information.

6. Branding and Recognition: Identification of the contractor, or use of contractor logos or similar “trademarks” or “signatures” (including but not limited to touch panel graphics and color schemes, silk-screened or engraved corporate logos, copyrighted fonts, and/or custom emblazoned panels) is strictly forbidden except where explicitly indicated within the bid documents. Any unauthorized use of these marks will be rejected.

7. Receptacles: Engrave and fill receptacle label directly on mounting plate as indicated on drawings.

8. Patch Panels: Labels for jacks constructed of engraved and filled plastic laminate engraving stock or printable composition material with clear plastic cover. Labels for jack rows constructed of engraved and filled plastic laminate engraving stock.

Paper strips may be used as temporary labels only.
a. Label jacks with functional description of jack ("Camera 1", "Console Input 4", etc.).
b. Color-code jack labels with different colors for video level jacks, input and output jacks for recording/playback equipment, and other line-level jacks.

9. Identify all wires and cables at every termination and connection point in accordance with the Owner’s standards using the specified cable markers, unless otherwise instructed by the Owner. Use a numbering scheme that identifies all cables terminating at patch panel jacks with the patch bay row and jack designation; use A, B, and C suffixes to distinguish multiple cables terminating at the same jack. Submit proposed numbering scheme for approval prior to installation.

10. Identify switches, relays, terminal blocks, etc., with reference numbers keyed to the as-built wiring diagrams.

11. Room numbers appear on the contract documents for reference only. All labels shall reflect the Owner's final room designations.

12. All labels and legends shall be as approved on shop drawings.

C. Racks, Cables, Connectors, and Miscellaneous Equipment

1. Wiring and Interconnections:
a. General:
1) Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to cables and equipment. 2) Make all joints and connections with rosin-core solder or approved mechanical connectors.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 25
3) All wiring executed in strict adherence to standard security practices.

This includes:
a) Dress cables in conveniently sized bundles, combed into parallel runs, either laced or banded with sufficient plastic ties. b) For equipment mounted on glides, or otherwise requiring servicing from the front of the rack incorporate a cable "service loop" of sufficient length to permit the equipment to be pulled forward from the rack for servicing.
c) Support cables and bundles with sufficient plastic ties and support bars to ensure that no strain is placed on any connections or connectors.
d) Organize cables and cable bundles behind patch bays to permit easy access to the patch panels to add or remove cables. e) Place cable markers 3"-5" back from video connectors to permit easy viewing. Do not bind markers into cable bundles.
b. Grounding:
1) If not shown on drawings, ground case of power strip lines in equipment racks to the racks and directly to isolated ground buss in the power panel or to power system ground at the building AC service entry only. 2) Ground all conduits ONLY to power system ground. Insulate all conduits and electrical boxes from CCTV system, including equipment racks. 3) Insulate all conductors in conduit, including shields, from the conduit, back boxes, and from each other for the entire conduit length. c. Equipment Racks:
1) Install equipment in racks to permit access to all equipment for service.

Relays, terminal blocks, etc., mounted in rear of racks behind other equipment shall not prevent access to equipment connections or shall be mounted on hinged panels to permit access.
2) Where racks or cabinets are provided under this Section, wire all racks completely in the shop. No internal rack wiring to be done on the job site.
3) Install equipment in racks with ventilating panels as required to provide adequate ventilation and according to equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
4) Where racks or cabinets are provided under this Section, p rovide unused panel space with blank or ventilating panels as shown on drawings.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 26
5) Locate free-standing racks as indicated and to provide access to rear. d. Conduit:
1) Run all lines in metallic conduit or wireways unless otherwise indicated. 2) Do not locate AC power lines in conduit containing video lines. 3) Do not splice lines in conduit.
e. Receptacles:
1) Provide finish sample for approval by Architect.
2) Wall-mounted receptacles in metal boxes at building standard receptacle height unless otherwise indicated.
f. Video Receptacles:
1) Install feed-through receptacles to mounting plates with insulating washer and sleeve to electrically isolate the receptacle from the electrical box and conduit.
2) Punch receptacles with "D" hole to prevent receptacle rotation within hole.

D. Wiring

1. Install systems wiring in accordance with the latest edition of local codes.

2. Any miscellaneous Ethernet cabling required, but not installed under Division 27, must be installed in accordance with Division 27.

3. Label and color code wiring systems with labeling and coding shown on shop drawings.
a. Use white conductors only for neutral conductors and green only for grounding conductors.
b. Group conductors within junction boxes, pull boxes and equipment enclosures and lace with nylon tie straps with identification tags in individual sets, serving individual locks or groups. Conductor group shall be identified on the tag with respect to room or area served.

E. Cameras

1. The CCTV Systems contractor shall not install any camera in the field until a walkthrough has been scheduled for visual placement of the cameras with final approval from the design team, the locations shown on the drawings are for reference purposes only, the Architect and Owner shall sign off on all final locations prior to the installation of the final devices with possible relocations based upon site conditions, these services shall be included in the contractors base bid.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 27

2. Set for Auto-Iris.

3. Set ABL (auto black level) off.

4. Set color temperature filter to setting 1.

5. Set Gain to 0 dB.

6. Determine a white-balancing procedure for normal use. Determine if an appropriate white area is available in each room or can be made available prior to each room use. If providing white surface for each day's use is difficult, evaluate the effect of using the preset 3200°K color temperature setting. Consul t with Owner to confirm procedure suitability. Note that following camera shutdown, white balance, iris, and pedestal adjustments are stored in memory for a maximum of 12 hours. In the test results submission, report on findings.

7. Set lens Macro to "OFF".

8. Set horizontal and subcarrier phase for all cameras. Determine that all video signal parameters can be adjusted to within normal limits, with settings as described above.

9. Coordinate pan/tilt/zoom preset requirements with Owner, and program as required.

10. Cameras with Built-In Microphones: Disable microphones, unless otherwise instructed by the Owner.

11. IP Cameras: Coordinate network requirements, switch PoE requirements, IP addresses, VLANs, QoS, etc., with Owner’s IT staff.

12. Configure camera frame rate, bit rate, resolution, and any other available parameters in accordance with the construction documents, unless otherwise instructed by the Owner or Consultant.

F. Network Video Recorders

1. Rack-mount each recorder in locations shown on the drawings.

2. Coordinate network requirements, IP addresses, VLANs, QoS, etc. with Owner’s IT staff.

3. Provide recorder with storage, as indicated, to achieve the desired capacity with the recording policies, resolution, bit rate, etc.

G. Video Management System (VMS)

1. Coordinate VMS hardware requirements with Owner.

2. Install the VMS software on an Owner-furnished computer.

3. Provide copies of all configuration and support files to allow the Owner to re - configure the system.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 28

3.03 NETWORK CONNECTIVITY
A. Requirements for Connection to the Owner’s Network:

1. All IP endpoints will be provisioned using 802.1X certificate-based authentication (EAP-TLS) with a unique private certificate deployed to every device using an automated tool.

2. The System shall natively support full dual-stack IPv4/6.

3. All ethernet connections shall support full duplex 10/100/1000Mb.

4. Any Power over Ethernet (PoE) requirements shall comply with 802.3af or 802.3at.

5. Wi-Fi connections shall be compliant with at least one of the 802.11g/n/ac/ax standards. 802.11b shall not be supported.

6. All privileged/administrative user credentials shall be for named individuals. The use of shared/system accounts is prohibited except when justified by the system manufacturer and specifically authorized by the Owner.

7. Passwords for all accounts must be changed to adhere to the Owner’s password policy. Contractor shall provide documentation, tools and direct support to assist the Owner in changing any passwords known to the Contractor to those only known by the Owner. Passwords must support the Owner’s password policy (currently 16-character minimum for elevated accounts).

8. Authentication to all System components shall be using the Owner’s directory of record (Active Directory) and must support the Owner’s multi-factor authentication (Azure AD MFA) and FIDO2.

9. All authentication attempts (passwords) must be encrypted at rest and in -transit using industry standard encryption mechanisms.

10. Actions by service and privileged accounts must be logged and auditable.

11. Authentication and authorization events must be captured and logged. Logs are to be sent in real-time to the Owner’s log aggregation devices.

12. All Privileged access, user audit and important system and application logs must be sent to the Owner’s Security Information and Event Management (SIEM) in real - time.

13. All System components shall be configured using the least-privilege model ensuring that only necessary communication is possible. Unnecessary services shall be disabled, and host-based firewalls shall be used to enforce traffic restrictions.

Ingress/egress rules for System servers and handsets shall be applied to only allow only traffic that is required to ensure System functionality. Large port ranges are not to be allowed for Ingress. Ingress/Egress to the Internet shall be denied except to allow approved functionality.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 29

14. Authorization is the determination of whether a user has permission to access particular information or applications. Proper authorization for use of an application usually requires the use of the appropriate attribute, group, and/or role as defined in the Owner’s Microsoft Active Directory (AD). The Contractor- provided service or application must be able to interface with AD.

15. The Owner requires secure and role-based authorization for the functions and elements appropriate to the individual’s role.

16. The Owner will provide any required physical or virtual servers or endpoint computers. Contractor shall provide requirements (including minimum and recommended configurations) for each System.

17. All System software, operating systems and firmware shall be the latest version and updates at the time of Substantial Completion.

18. All components must be manufacturer-supported as active products for at least 5 years after installation. The use of software in or expected to be “Extended Support” during the 5 years subsequent to installation is prohibited. Security updates must be provided for products under active support.

19. All system products must detail End-of-Sale, End-of-Support and End-of- Maintenance dates.

20. The Contractor shall configure the entire System to periodically generate backups of all system software, configuration, programming, messages, and content to an Owner-directed location.

21. All web interfaces are expected to support the current version of the following browsers including the mobile versions for iOS and Android:
a. Microsoft Edge (or current Microsoft browser)
b. Apple Safari
c. Mozilla Firefox
d. Google Chrome

22. System shall be configured in accordance with Center for Internet Security (CIS) Benchmarks. Documentation shall be provided representing how the System is configured to align with the CIS Benchmarks.

23. The Owner limits the use of inherently insecure technologies, such as server - or client-side Java and Adobe Flash and requires that neither of these two technologies be used in or by any applications or interfaces.

24. Application whitelisting and endpoint malware prevention shall be deployed on all endpoints. Information detailing and supporting whitelisting support must be provided by the Contractor. All provided hardware and software must be compatible without disabling or reducing the Owner’s posture.

Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 30
B. Network Connectivity:

1. All copper ethernet ports shall support 10Mb half-duplex as well as 10/100/1000Mb full duplex.

2. Upon installation, Contractor shall provide a table of switch port to patch panel connections

3. The network shall be provisioned such that each sub-system is on an isolated logical network (micro-segmentation). Dedicated and isolated segments will be setup for each connected system type and all traffic will be isolated to that logical network. Contractor will be responsible for coordinating with other project Contractors to document and configure the network in support of required firewall rules and ACLs. Where required for functionality or described in this specification, connections to other systems will be permitted but must be locked down to the minimum traffic required and approved by the Owner. Individual system Contractors are responsible for documenting and justifying any proposed approved traffic to any other system with specific sources, destinations, traffic types and port numbers (e.g., source: server 1, destination, server 1, traffic type https, TCP port 443). The Owner shall be the sole arbiter of what traffic is allowed between systems.

4. Elevated or Administrative access shall be prohibited except via secure methods through an Owner bastion host.

5. Authentication, authorization and accounting (AAA) shall be via the Owner’s AAA directory of record (currently Active Directory).

3.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. Test all equipment to verify conformance with manufacturer's performance specifications and with this specification.

B. At a minimum, the following items shall be verified:

C. Video System Performance Verification Item Numbers and Descriptions

1. VP-110 – Test Video Routes
a. Verify that all video routes are tested from endpoint to endpoint via the appropriate midpoint(s) for operation and routing required by the project documentation.

2. VP-111 – Video Camera Image and Operation
a. Verify that cameras, lenses, and pan/tilt systems operate as defined in the project documentation. Inspect the camera image through the full lens operation.

D. Cable Management, Termination, and Labeling Verification Item Numbers and Descriptions Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 31

1. CABL-100 – Cable Bend Radius
a. Verify that cables are not bent beyond their minimum bend radius as specified in cable data sheet in order to maintain signal integrity as defined in the project documentation.

2. CABL-101 –Connector Plate Input and Output Labeling
a. Verify that all CCTV connector plate inputs and outputs are labeled as defined in the project documentation.

3. CABL-102 –Connector Seating
a. Verify that all CCTV connectors are correctly keyed, seated, and latched to respective connection points as defined in the project documentation.

Conditions where physical parameters exceed the connector's ability to maintain full seating should be resolved as defined in the project documentation.

4. CABL-103 –Connector Verification
a. Verify that all CCTV cable terminations are made securely and meet the recommendations of the connector and cable manufacturer(s), published standards, and requirements defined in the project documentation.

5. CABL-104 –Equipment Power Cable Management
a. Verify that all CCTV equipment power cables are managed as defined in the project documentation. Verify that cables are managed in a uniform and acceptable manner so as not to compromise safety/OEM warranty, CCTV signal quality, and/or future field service.

6. CABL-105 – CCTV System Cable Labeling
a. Verify that all CCTV system cables are identified by a unique ID as defined in the project documentation. Verify that this unique ID is displayed permanently at both ends of the cable, is legible, and is positioned where it can be seen without undue disturbance.

7. CABL-106 – Cable Separation
a. Verify that both site and rack cables have appropriate separation according to signal type and level as defined in the project documentation.

8. CABL-107 – Cable Supports
a. Verify that all cables are supported throughout their lengths as defined in the project documentation.

9. CABL-108 – Cable Ties
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 32
a. Verify that, where appropriate, cable ties are used to secure the cables, are correctly tensioned, and that the correct type of cable tie(s) is used as defined in the project documentation.

10. CABL-109 – Cables Bundled by Type
a. Verify that cables are only bundled together when their construction, signal type, and signal level are compatible and will not cause measurable crosstalk or interference between cables.

11. CABL-110 – Cables Dressed
a. Verify that cables are dressed to ensure that all rack and site cables are installed to provide serviceability, safety, and aesthetics as defined in the project documentation.

12. CABL-111 – Patch Panel Configuration
a. Verify that all patch panels have been correctly wired and configured as defined in the project documentation.

13. CABL-112 – Patch Panel Labeling
a. Verify that all patch panels have been labeled as defined in the project documentation. Verify that all labeling is machine-printed, consistent, durable, accurate, and legible.

14. CABL-113 – Termination Stress
a. Verify that all cable terminations have been completed and adequately supported to minimize stress on the termination point and/or connector.

15. CABL-114 –Connector Plate Consistent Labeling
a. Verify that CCTV connector plates have consistent labeling throughout the project as defined in the project documentation.

16. CABL-115 –CCTV System Cabling Verification
a. Verify that all cabling is the correct type and routed correctly from point to point as defined in the project documentation.

17. CABL-116 – Cable Length Required for Serviceability a. Verify that sufficient cabling is available so the device can be placed in a serviceable location as defined in the project documentation.

E. Control Performance Reference Verification Item Numbers and Descriptions

1. CON-100 – Control System Communications
Veterans Memorial Park Project No 4609

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282000 08/26/2025 33
a. Verify that all control communications are tested from endpoint to endpoint via the appropriate midpoint(s) for operation and functionality as defined in the project documentation.

2. CON-101 – Interfacing and Control of External Devices and Systems a. Verify that CCTV control system interfaces to and from control systems provided by others conform to requirements as defined in the project documentation.

3. CON-102 – Mobile Device Integration
a. Verify that mobile devices that are to be supported are integrated and operating as defined in the project documentation.

4. CON-103 – System Response to Event Condition(s)
a. Verify that any required response of the installed CCTV system in the event of a configured event operates as defined in the project documentation.

5. CON-104 – Control System Automated Functions
a. Verify that all time-dependent or automated functions executed by the control system conform to requirements as defined in project documentation.

6. CON-105 – Control System User Interface Performance
a. Verify that the control system is implemented in a manner consistent with the requirements as defined in the project documentation.